Perry, A Sanskrit Primer

Published on February 2017 | Categories: Documents | Downloads: 114 | Comments: 0 | Views: 1004
of 252
Download PDF   Embed   Report

Comments

Content

SANSKRIT PRIMER:
BASED ON THE

LEITFADEN

FUR DEN ELEMENTAR-CURSUS DES SANSKRIT
OF

PROFESSOR GEORG BUHLER
OF VIENNA

BY

EDWARD DELAVAN PERRY,
OF COLUMBIA COLLEGE, NEW- YORK.

v
BOSTON:
GINN AND COMPANY

r.

,

tS£
if-

Entered according to Act of Congress, in the year 1885,

By E. D. PERRY,
In the Office of the Librarian of Congress at Washington.
24.9

(ffamposition

lip

GEBRUDER UNGER,
SCHONEBBRGBR StRASSE,
BKRTtN, SW.

Jprrssto-ir!*.

ij)

JOHN WILSON AND SON,
I'/

A,

university press.

Cambridgf, Mass.

c

(OI

t

Preface.

In the preface to the

work* of which

the following

is

a revision,

Prof. Bithler writes as follows:

"The following

Leitfaden

was

written last winter [1881



82],

and, printed in manuscript form, was used in the instruction of
quite a large
practical

number

of scholars.

method of Sanskrit

Haug's and

my own

It

is

based upon the purely

which was introduced

instruction,

at

instance into the Indian secondary schools,

and has become established there by means of R. G. Bhandarkar's
text-books.
versities

is

The attempt

to be gained thereby.

is

beginners master the

first difficulties

that learners take the
if

study,

first,

European uni-

and they

For

I

my

are.

ex-

have found that

of Sanskrit very rapidly, and

lively and continued interest

own

part

is

in the

given them

introduced at once into the living
is

made

the

the fact that the elements of Sanskrit form an

Leitfaden fur den Elementarcursus des Sanskrit; mitUebungsund zwei Glossaren. Von Georg Buhler. Wien, 1883.



stiicken
I

to

Moreover, the question of economy of time

more weighty by
*

most

opportunity for activity on their

from the very
language.

method

by the practical success which, as

justified

perience shows,

to transfer this

have translated above a

little freely.

iv

important aid to students of Classical and Germanic Philology, yet
to a large

number of such are

accessible only

On

can be mastered in a short time.

when

the subject

the other hand, the disad-

vantages necessarily entailed by the purely practical method
readily be

removed

later

The

grammar

may

by a short methodical exposition of the
the exercises are taken chiefly

verses in

from Boehtlingk's Indischen Spruchen; the sentences are in part
derived from various Sanskrit works, or modelled after passages

contained in them.

To

the last lessons no Sanskrit exercises have

been appended, since the reading of the Nala or of some other
easy Sanskrit

work may very well be begun

as soon as the form-

ation of the perfect has been learned."

After using the Leitfaden for some time in the instruction of

a

I

class,

was convinced

of

its

great merits as a practical intro-

duction to the language; while on the other hand

unfortunate that

which,

since the

America
stances

it

it

at least

seemed advisable

to

to

distrust.

in

Under these circum-

attempt a combination of Buhler's

Whitney's theory; and

really rewritten.

An

to

this

end the

introduction has been added,

of the structure of the language; the exer-

have been pruned here and there, chiefly to remove forms

which seemed too unusual or doubtful
the

we

appearance of Prof. Whitney's work,

have learned

giving a general view
cises

seemed very

held throughout to the native system of grammar,

practical exercises with

book has been

it

to

have a just claim on

beginner's memory; and the number of lessons has been re-

duced from forty-eight to forty-five, by condensing the description,
needlessly full for beginners,

of the aorist, precative, and second-

have endeavored

ary conjugations.

I

would supply the

real

to

retain nothing but

wants of those for

whom

the

book

what
is

de-

who may

signed; yet here and there, having in mind those

up
I

should otherwise have

A
of the

left for oral

communication by the instructor.

detailed explanation of the changes in the grammatical part

book would require too much space

to be given here.

They

be summarized in the statement that I have striven to remove

may
all

take

without a teacher, I have added explanations which

this study

forms at present "non- quotable".

In

the explication of the

rules I have sought to be brief, but never to the sacrifice of clear-

In very

ness.

many

cases not only the substance but also the

words of Prof. Whitney's rules have been incorporated
of the Primer, which

was done with

needless to designate

all

his sanction.

are due to those

possible the appearance of the work.

different

mention.

aid has

made

consenting to the rendering of his book into a very

To

Prof.

Whitney

I

owe deep

was kind enough

manuscript, and, later, to put at

my

equally indebted

;

as well for

task of looking over

not a

gratitude for

many

valu-

work

to look over the

in

To

Prof.

Lanman

I

am

many

proof-sheets,

which he imposed on himself

little in

acknowledgments are

deserves most grateful

useful hints as for the arduous

My

with characteristic readiness.

me

it

disposal the advance sheets of

invaluable collection of verb -forms.

assisted

whose

Prof. Buhler's ready gene-

form from that which he gave

able suggestions; he

his

seemed quite

such borrowings by quotation-marks.

Many acknowledgments

rosity in

It

into those

pupil,

Mr. A. V.

W.

Jackson,

the compilation of the Glossaries.

also

due

to

the

printers,

My

Gebr. Unger

(Th. Grimm) of Berlin, for the careful manner in which their part
of the

work has been done.

From V.

S.

Apte's "Guide

derived occasional examples.

to Sanskrit

Composition"

I

have

VI

The appearance

of the book has been delayed considerably

beyond the date originally planned for

begun

in

November

The printing was

it.

but was interrupted by

last,

a resulting stay of considerable length in the
I shall

will notify

may

they

esteem

me

a favor

it

if

my illness,

West

any who may use

of misprints or inaccuracies of

and

Indies.
this

sort

any

book

which

remark.
E. D. P.

Berlin, August, 1885.

NOTE TO THE SECOND EDITION.
In this edition errors have been corrected in the plates

wherever possible, otherwise noted in a

Prof.

Lanman and

Prof.

list

My

additions at the end of the book.

of corrections

and

thanks are due to

H. F. Burton of Rochester for

corrections furnished.

E. D. P.

New

York, September,

1886.

NOTE TO THE THIRD EDITION.
The

revision of the book for the

Dr. Louis H.

Gray,

to

whom

I

am

new impression

glad to express

I

my

owe

to

hearty

thanks for his kindness in undertaking and performing this
irksome task.
E. D. P.

Munich, July,

1901.

Table of Contents,
in systematic
The

I.

grammatical arrangement.
heavy type refer

figures iu

Introductory suggestions,
Alphabet and Sounds.



p. xi.





Guna and Vrddni.

Changes of Sounds.

II.

paragraphs.

Classification of Sounds, and Pronunciation,
Accent, 56.
Light and Heavy Syllables, 48.

Characters, 1—20.

21—47.

to

49—54.
Bales of Euphonic Combination.
Rules of Vowel Combination, 105,

III.

— General


156—161, 164.

106,



Laws

Deaspiration, 242.
concerning Finals, 239—242.
Surd and Sonant
Transferral of Aspiration, 244, 249, 428.



Assimilation,
s

and

r,

191, 192,

266,

148,

147,

95, 117—123, 129.

342. 352.







267.

Combinations

Conversion of

Conversion of n to

s

to

»,

of

Final

p. 27 (note**),

n, p. 32 (note**), 166.



Conversion of Dental Mutes to Linguals and Palatals, 149, 150,
Combinations of n, p. 29 (note), 138—140,
p. 99 (note), 342.
Combinations
184.
Change of ch to cch, p. 27 (note*), 165.









of m, p. 29 (note).
Final t, 148—151.



Final n [and n] 184.

IV. Declension.

Gender, Number, Case, 83—89.
Paefo-endings,
V. Substantives





Final

k,

t,

Case-endings, 90,

p, 266.

91.



91, 241.

and Adjectives.
Vowel-stems:

Stems

in a,

m.

n.,

103,

III.



Stems

in

i,

m.,

113, 115;

n., 114, 115.

Vlll



Stems

in u,



185—187.
in

i,

In

a, 162;

in

189, 212, 214;

Stems

in

in

128;

m.,

Stems in

I,

136,

n.,

a,

go,



Stems

209; nau,



van), 265.

256—264.

i

In

and

w,

in r,

f.,

a, 212, 213;

201—205, 208.

f.



:



(a)

In

(b) Derivative Stems.

in

211; rai, 277.

Consonant-stems
General, 237—242.

Stems

(b) Derivative Stems,

197, 212, 214.

fi,

183; in u, 198.

Diphthongs:



137.

u: (a) Root-words.

z,

Root-stems, 243, 244, 246—250.
252—254. In an (an, man,

as, is, us,

— In ant (ant, mant, vant)
— In in
vin), 251.
— Perfect Participles in vans, 268. — Comparatives
(in, rain,

in yas, 255.

Irregular

Nouns: 269

— 284.



Comparison, 337 345.
Formation of Feminine-stems,

187, 251, 255,

262—264, 268.

VI. Numerals.

328—336.
VII. Pronouns.

223—236, 285—288,
VIII.

Conjugation.

413.

(fM)

Voice, Tense, Mode,

Number, Person, 57—65.

jectives and Nouns, 66—68.
Mode and Tense-stems, 71.

IX. Present-System.
Conjugation Classes, 72



Verbal Ad-

Secondary Conjugation, 69

—70. —

— 80.

First Conjugation.

General, 383—387.
I.

Root-class (Hindu second or

ad-class),

404—412, 414

—429.
III.

Reduplicating Class (H. third or Au-class), 430—440.
Nasal Class (H. seventh or rudh-c\a,ss), 441 446.

IV.

Nu

II.



and ^-Classes (H.

classes),

fifth

and eighth, or su and tan-

388—395.

V. iVa-Class (H. ninth or &n-class), 399-403.

IX

Second, or a-Conjugation.

VI. a-Class
135.

(H.

or Mu-class),

first

152—154,

92—94, 97—102,

178—182, 188, 193—196,

200.

199,

207, 210, 222, 260.

VII. Accented a-Class (Hindu sixth or tad-class),

152—154

etc.

VIII. va-Class
152

etc.

107



110,

(as for a-class).

or tfw-class),

fourth

(H.

— 155

134,

206,

124—127, 131—134,

(as for a-class).

IX. Accented yd-C\ass or Passive
188, 199, 200, 210,

Conjugation,

168

— 176,

222.

=

H. tenth
[Causative and Denominative Conjugation (partly
154 etc. (as for a-class);
or cur-class), 141
146, 152





also 215—221.]

X. Perfect-System.

447—471, 474.
Periphrastic Perfect, 472, 473.

XI. Aorist-System.



General,

486.

488.

Reduplicated Aorist,



s-aorist, 491;

Simple Aorist

is-aorist,

Root-aorist,

:



490.

489,

487; a-aorist,

Sibilant

Aorist:

492; m-aorist, 493; sa-aorist, 494.



Aorist Passive, 495, 496.

XII. Future-System.



General, 475.



Xm.

Simple Future, 476—481.

— Conditional,

482.

483—485.

Periphrastic Future,

Verbal Adjectives and Substantives: Participles, Infinitive,
Gerund.

Passive Participle in ta or «a, 289

— 301. — Past Active Par— Gerunds Absolutives,

ticiple in tavant or navant, 302, 303.

304—313.



Infinitive,

314—322.



:

Future Passive Participles:

Gerundives, 323—327.

XIV. Derivative or Secondary Conjugations.
General,

497.

Intensive, 499
tive,



Passive,

— 502. —

498.



Causative,

Desiderative, 503

509, 510.

XV. Periphrastic Conjugation.
Perfect, 472, 473.



Future, 483-485.

507,

— 506. —

508.



Denomina-

XVI. Vcrhal Prefixes: Adverbs and Prepositions.
81, 82, 167, 190, 395—397.
XTII. Formation of Compound Stems.

346—353.

Classification,





Copulative Compounds, 354—357.
Compounds, 358; Dependent, 359—361; De— Secondary Adjective Compounds, 366—
scriptive, 362—365.
370; Possessive, 371—377; with Governed Final Member, 378.

Determinative



Adjective Compounds as Nouns and Adverbs, 350, 379—381.
[Z?t;awGfoa-compounds, p. 136 (note); Ta^wrusa-compounds, p. 137
(note **) A'armaJAara^a-compounds, p. 137 (note *)
Dvigu-com;

;

pounds, 380; Bahuvrlhi-compounds,

compounds,

p. 142 (note);

Avyayibhava-

381.]

XVIII. Syntactical Rules.



Position of Modifiers, p. 35 (note).
Repetition of Words, p. G7
Force of Cases,
Agreement of Adjectives, 245.
kirn with
104, 112.
Prepositions with Cases, 82, 130.

(note*).








Instrumental (and Genitive),

Comparatives, 345.

p. 89



(note).

-



Construction with

Numerals, 333.
Pronouns, 225, 234
Force of Tenses: Present, 96;
Force of Modes:
Imperfect, 182; Perfect, 474; Aorist, 486.

—236.



iti,

Imperative,
Passive,

177.

p. 47 (note).









Participle, 303.



Appendix.

Hindu Names of

Letters.





320—322.



Modern Hindu Accentuation

of

Gerund, 311—313.
Future Passive Participle, 327.

Sanskrit.



194—196; Optative, 207.
Causative, 221.
Past Passive Participle, 290. — Past Active
Infinitive,

Suggestions for using the Primer.

The Primer can be

finished

by earnest students

in sixteen or

seventeen weeks, reckoning three lessons per week, with here and
After that Lanman's Sanskrit Reader,
there an hour for review.

an introduction

to

which

this

work

is

partly intended to be, should

be taken up.
Students are strongly recommended to provide
themselves with Whitney's Sanskrit Grammar at the outset.

seemed advisable

It

to

leave the Introduction undivided into

may prefer to impart the alphabet,
Some of the
scholars at different rates of speed.
exercises for translation may be found rather too long to be com-

lessons,

as different teachers

to their

etc.,

pleted in one lesson.

In such cases

after requiring the translation

it

will

of only so

probably be better,

many

sentences as the

reasonably be expected to master in the preparation of
one day's lesson, to proceed directly to the next lesson in. the
following hour, leaving the untranslated sentences for a review.

may

pupil

The

vocabularies prefixed to each exercise are not exhaustive,

words which have been treated of immediately before are
sometimes omitted from them. The glossaries at the end of the

since

book

will,

it

is

hoped, be found complete for the exercises; but

meaning of compound words must in most cases be learned
from their elements; and proper names have often been omitted,
the

their Sanskrit

The

forms being discernible from the transliteration.

of contents in systematic grammatical arrangement
designed to facilitate the finding of any desired article; it may
also be found useful as an outline for a rapid grammatical review.
table

is

Arrangement of Vocabularies.

The vocabularies

are arranged

>:n

in strict alphabetic order (see below).

All nouns, whether sub-

stantives or adjectives, are given in the stem-form.

All verb-forms

are placed under the root; prepositional compounds of verbs likeOf
wise, and not in the alphabetic place of the preposition.
verbal adjectives and nouns, some important ones have been given
in their alphabetic places, but the
meaning of most of them must

be learned from their respective roots.
form of the nominative.

in the

Pronouns are given generally



Alphabetic Order. The alphabetic order is that given in § I,
but the following points are to be noticed here:
The visarga stands next after the vowels; but a visarga regarded as equivalent to a sibilant and exchangeable with it has
the alphabetic place of that sibilant.

The

representing "the anusvdra of more independent
place before all the mutes etc.; thus dang and
danstrd stand before daksa.
origin",

The

n,

sign

has

its

sign m, representing an assimilated m, is placed according

to its phonetic value.

m

to

1.

If m, resulting

anusvdra, then

its

place

is

punya and samgaya before

m

assimilated to

place

is

from the assimilation of

represent a nasal semivowel or
like that of n. Thus purhs comes before

a semivowel, sibilant, or

h,

sakrt.

2.

But

a mute, representing

n,

that of the nasal so represented.

if

m

be the product of
or m, then its

n, n, n,

Introduction.

Alphabet.
I.

Sanskrit

is

commonly

The

Devanagarl alphabet.

written

in

what

called

is

characters of this, and the

the

European

characters which will be used in transliterating them, are as follows^

Vowels.
short

^
simple

a

palatal

^[

i

labial

^

u

lingual

^

r

dental

*J

/

long

&

a=n

^u

palatal

a.

+7* TJ

e

\|

at

diphthongs
labial

Visarga

:

Anus vara

3*1

h.



n or m.
I

3

Consonants.
surd

sonant

sonant asp.

nasal

k

T§ kh

7[

g

Ti gh

>gp

w

palatal

c

^



^j

?J jh

"5f

n

lingual

<r

*

-J

^

%

dh

1$ n

t

^

th

^d
^d

\f

ai>

*[

n

MM

*

»»

dental

7{

labial

T(

Perry, Sanskrit Primer.

f

sr.rd asp.

^
^

guttural

p

qj ph

;

b

1

* 9

2

Introduction.

,1s

c

palatal *J y

Semivowels
r/"

V-'

w»r\

dental

Sibilants: palatal If p;

Aspiration
2.

by

^

T

lingual

^

labial

I

lingual If

dental ^J

-y,

r

v.
8.

//.

The above order

native grammarians

that in which the sounds are catalogued

is

and European scholars have adopted

;

as the alphabetic order,

from

^

for dictionaries,

The

etc.

it

writing runs

left to right.

3.

The theory

and consonantal.

of the devanagari

That

is, it

mode

simple sound, but the syllable; and further,
stantial part of the syllable the

ceding the vowel



this

is

syllabic

it

regards as the sub-

consonant (or the consonants) prebeing merely implied, as

latter

except when

case with short ^J a,

of writing

regards as the written unit, not the

initial,

or,

if

written,

is

the

being

written by a subordinate sign attached to the consonant.
4.

Hence follow these two

principles:

A. The forms of the vowel- characters given above are used
only

when

the vowel forms a syllable by

with a preceding consonant: that

by another vowel.

is,

itself,

when

or

is

not combined

it is initial,

or preceded

In combination with a consonant, other

modes

of representation are used.
B.

with

it

If

more than one consonant precede a vowel, forming

a single syllable, their characters must be

combined into

a single character.
5.

syllable

According to the Hindu mode of dividing syllables, each

must end

in

a vowel, or visarga. or anusvdra, except at

the end of the word; and as ordinary
the

words of a sentence

in writing,

into one syllable with the initial

Hindu usage does not

a final consonant

is

divide

combined

vowel or consonant of the following

word, so that a syllable ends in a consonant only at the end of
the sentence.

Introduction.

Thus


prarudham

'

by the water which drops from the clouds

tields the grain

m

of signs,

single group

are

the

IT

works

*T

f^ ^T *J

"H

^^^ — or thus:^J-

printed in Europe, the

words so

Thus, ^«£j«[

in which,

5W

indrdya

varenyam, because the

not written with their

have been printed,

common

forms.

full

by a

with

the

all

is

I

and

But some few works

free use of a sign called virdma

In translite-

no good reason for printing otherwise than

words separated.

Vowels combined

Under A.

7.

namah ;

final ?^

(see below, § 8), the individual words are separated.

rated texts there

practice

be done without any

far as this can

tat savitur

f^ rf^^ igj T^

are

T" r

and the syllables

with more or less closeness of

this:

alteration of the written form.
7f(^f

nyam

w ru te 3rau^s*c-

In Sanskrit

to separate the

but

dbhi rdhd

without any reference whatever to the di-

%%|jfa WrfaW^T
6.

ma

would be indicated by a

these syllables

always written independently,

ftnfrrfaifV

upon the

be considered as consisting of

words composing the sentence;

approach; either like

is

— would

kta bhi rme ghd nd

si

Each of

pra ru dham.

of

tall'

grows

the syllables kse tre

vision

meghdndm adbhir dhdnyarh

the sentence ksetrem siktdbhir

with

preceding

consonants

are written as follows:
1.

Short a has no written sign at

a:

itself implies

attached to

it

a following

«,

unless

virdma

(or else the

all;

the consonant-sign

some other vowel-sign



see below, § 8).

is

Thus

the consonant-signs given above are really the signs for ka,

klc

ca, clta, etc. (as far as

2.

a: cRT

&

3.

i

and

I:

'^T cd.

^

ha).

\tf dha etc.

r

The hook

f^R

hi.

fx? pi.

f** dhi.



eft kl.

\ft dhx.

tft pi.

above, turning to the left or to the right,

is

histori-

been originally
cally the essential part of the character, having
1*

-

4

Introduction.

the whole of

way down

and

that the i-hooks

below the

hooks were only

the

it:

as to reach all the

the

prolonged, so

later

Observe

beside the consonant.

M-hooks, respectively above and

are analogous in turning to the left for the

line,

short vowel and to the right for the
long.

u and u:

4.



bu.

gj ku.

^f cu.

Owing

«f bhu.

are sometimes disguised; thus,

du, H" du;

^

f

:

3a

kr.

-

hook

vowel

the

Xf

^ ru;

^ ru,

^[

ko.

e

:

ift

cfi

kr.

7{

tr.

With

^

middle

;

thus,

mkl.

I:

ke.

3ft bho.

the fi-sign,

g

g

usually attached to the

is
6.

Diphthongs,



pr.

<z

hr.

o:

^

hu, Jg hu.

and f

r

7.

^

cu.

consonant and vowel-sign

or
5.

^

<K ku.

to the necessities of combination,

^ pe. ^
^" kau.

du:

ye.

di:

%

kdi.

\f dhdi.

~^t rdu.

In some printed texts the signs for o and du are separated,
the

ior^.

being placed over the consonant-sign, and not over the

%T

perpendicular stroke; thus,
8.

A

consonant-sign

%f

ko,

may

kau.

be made to

signify

the sound

of

that consonant alone, without an added vowel, by writing beneath
it

a stroke called the virdma ('rest', 'stop'); thus,

eft

k,

|| h,

^

d.

Strictly, the virdma should be used only at the end of a sentence;

but

it is

often used by scribes, or in print, in the middle of a
to

avoid

•f%sgfij: Jidbhih.

f^&m

or sentence,

9.

not

Under B.

difficult.

to almost all;

method
that

is

is

to

awkward

or

difficult

The combinations

if

pursued.

thus,

litsu,

The perpendicular and
and

combinations;

word

two or more are

The

of consonants are in general

horizontal lines are
to

characteristic

be added to another

is

common

be combined, the following
part

of a consonant-sign

taken (to the exclusion of the

perpendicular or of the horizontal framing -line, or of both), and
they are put together according to convenience, either side by side,

5

Introduction.

or one above the other: in some combinations either arrangement
is

The consonant

allowed.

be pronounced

to

first

is set first in

the one arrangement, and above in the other arrangement.

top of a perpendicular group, are written in

Examples
TJJ gga,

Only

and that

the consonant at the right of a horizontal group,

at the

full.

of the horizontal arrangement are:

^

jja,

TJ[

«U nma,

pya,

«j bhya,

^BT ttha,

"^R ska,

QJT sna.

Examples of

^

the perpendicular arrangement are: gj kka, f| eca,

kva, fT nja, fT pta, ft tna.

some combinations

In

10.

there

is

less abbreviation or

more or

disguise of the independent form of a consonant-sign.

Thus, of ^j k
of ?£

of

?

of *\

in

d

in |f dga,

m

iff

in ^TIJ kna, ^Sf

W dda, ^

y,

p,

thya,

when following

fca,

stha; and the
In a case

recognizable; thus,

compounds

or two,

^

dma, ^T dya, ^(hma,

f«,

<;na,

"Q gla, ^?r gya.

when a vowel- sign

is

of r)

;

^

h,

as

^

hna,

nna.,

hna.
jj"

no trace of the constituent

letters

is

"^ r,

in

making combinations with other

treated in a wholly peculiar manner, analogous with

that of the vowels.

written with a

of

is

"*J $r.

km, "^ jna,

The semivowel

consonants,

sign

etc.;

Other combinations, of not quite obvious value, are ^T

§t a > TJ

13.

"*T

usual

is

added below; thus, *|

12.

"%J

dbha

other consonants,

which generally becomes *T when followed by

The same change

11.

etc.;

ST dhya ;

a consonant; thus, ^f

H

^

ddha,

^%kya, ^f kma, ^T nma,

thus,

kya

tta;

and IT

W %a, gj
of JJ

and

in JQ kta\

^

1.

As

the

first

hook above, opening

thus,

^

rka, J( rpta.

of a group of consonants

it is

to the right (like the subjoined

When

a

compound consonant

6

Introduction.

thus containing r as

its

vowels

au,

sign

i,

I,

o,

e,

ai,

member

first

followed by one of the

is

with or without a nasal symbol, the r-

must stand at the extreme right; thus, T%rke,

^f

fsjj rki,

If

2.

rki,

%f

rko,

%f r&aw,

rkam, oRt1% r£a?i«, *ff rbhim.

ifi

pronounced

after another

consonant or consonants, r

is

indicated by a slanting stroke below, to the left; thus,
Tlgra, If pro,

And, with modifications of the preceding consonant-

rfra.

sra,

?jf

jj£

sign like those noted above, "^ tra, ^r gra.

group, r has the same sign as at the end
3.

"When

is

written in

Combinations of

14.

^

ttva,

Wf

sthya;

;gr

with

full,

the consonant in subordination to

it;

~\|?

nksva,

SJJ s?r#a,

even

X^

five

to the

psva,

differ

who

enable one

is

r, it is

character, and

consonants

same

(this

rules; thus,

fljr tsya,

*gr ?c ?/a,

rtsnya.

considerably

management of consonant-combinations, but a

srva.

fa-'ttfa nirrti.

rr,

r^Rr tsmya; cfzH

Both MSS. and type-fonts

15.

^g

made according

ddhya, gr dvya, 51 drya,

initial

its

thus,

three, four, or

latter excessively rare) are

^

combined with a following ^J

"^ r is to be

the vowel which

In the middle of a

thus, JZf grya,

;

little

in

their

practice will

thoroughly familiar with the simple signs and

with the principles of combination to decipher, as well as to

make

for himself, all such groups.
16.

A

sign ($) called the avagraha,

printed texts to

below, §

119,

mark

158):

or 'separator',

is

used in

the elision of initial a after final e or

thus

%

SW^l.

te

But some

'bruvan.

(see
texts,

especially those printed in India, dispense with this sign.

In our transliteration this
inverted
is

comma, as

in the

sign

example

will

be

just given.

also used as a hyphen, and sometimes as a
17.

The

• is used to
sign

mark an omission

represented
In the

mark

the

by

MSS.

the $

of hiatus.

of something easily

understood (whether from the context, or from previous knowledge),

7

Introduction.

and thus becomes a mark of abbreviation
^ctas -tarn

-Una,

The only signs of punctuation
The numeral figures are

18.
19.

q

1,

^

^

2,

g

3,

q

4,

European

thus,

digits;

system of notation originated

by the Arabs, who

call

it

|

and

||.

0.

numbers, they are used precisely

In combination, to express larger
as are

are

6, <0 7, "C 8, q. 9,

$

5,

^*T

1RR£ °<P^

thus,

;

etc.

gatam gatena

e.

i.

^g

gtrq 485,

24,

in India,

the Indian

we

system, as

This

7620.

^§^0

and was brought

to

Europe

style

the

it

Arabic.
20.

In writing Sanskrit the

make

of the letter, and

Tj

*>

*i>

ID

•'

•>

Hindus generally begin

the horizontal

""•

But

°ft en

at the left

top-stroke last; thus, 7,

tne horizontal stroke

is

*J,

made

and the perpendicular stroke added without raising the pen

first,

from the paper; thus,

"T,

^;

1, ^u,

System of Sounds: Pronunciation.
21.

The Sanskrit

is

used

in

India to this day very

Latin was used in Europe in the previous century

medium of communication between
tongues what they may, and

whatever.
skrit

India

mode

Hence

it

is

it is

the

:

it is

a

much

as

common

be their native

learned,

not the vernacular of any district

not strange that the pronunciation of San-

words varies greatly among scholars from

different parts of

and probably no one system represents the true ancient

;

of utterance with

much

I.

22.

A. The

a,

and long, and are

i,

to

exactness.

Vowels.

and u-vowels.
be pronounced

These three occur both short
in the

'

&t(or-)gan and father, pin and pique, pull and

Italian

'

manner



rule, respectively.

as

The

8

Introduction.

a-

vowel stands

in

no relation of kindred with any of the classes

But

of consonantal sounds.

the

i-

vowel

is

and

distinctly palatal,

the w-vowel as distinctly labial.

The

B.

23.

Both of these are plainly the

and /-vowels.

r

result of abbreviating syllables containing a "^ r or ^T

another vowel: r
I

like

le

The diphthongs.

1.

long, should receive the long

and

fibre,

in able.'

C.

24.

along with

I

be sounded like the re in the English

is to

The

e

and

bone, without true diphthongal character.

were doubtless

main pure diphthongs

in the

which are always

o,

and o-sounds of the English

e

they

In their origin, both
(e

=a+

?',

o

=a+

u);

but they lost this character at a very early period.

The

2.

in

ai

and au are spoken

German Baum

They were

with long prior element.

guished from

e

and

o

only by

II.

25.

A. Mates.

;

that

is,

as pure diphthongs
doubtless, distin-

originally,

the length of the

first

element.

Consonants.

In each series of mutes there are two surd

members, two sonants, and one nasal
labial series, the

and au

like the ai in English aisle

(ou in English house)

surds

(also sonant);

p and ph, the sonants

and

b

e.

g.,

bh,

in

the

and the

sonant m.
26.

The

first

and third members of each series are the ordinary

corresponding surd and sonant mutes of European languages; thus,

k and

g,

27.

What

m

nasal to

t

and

Nor
is

its

to

d,
is

p and

character

the

p and

own

b.

b,

or n

is

of the nasal any
to

t

and

d,

that

is

more

doubtful.

also each other

series of mutes: a sonant expulsion of breath into

and through the nose, while the mouth-organs are

in the

mute-

contact.
28.

The second and

fourth of each series are aspirates;

tj

"

9

Introduction.

we have

beside the surd mute k

the corresponding surd aspirate

kh, and beside the sonant g, the corresponding aspirate gh.

u9ual

among European

a very closely fol-

rates as the corresponding non- aspirates with

dh
nearly as in boathouse, ph a6 in haphazard,

e. g., th

lowing h;

This

as in madhouse.

inaccurate

is

still

unsettled.

29.

The

several mute-series will

30.

1.

Gutturals: k,

English k and g

and nasal; the
2.

but the question of the original
sounds

l

('

kh,

now

g,

c

These are the ordinary

hard")-sounds, with their corresponding aspirates

last, like

Palatals:

and the

of corruption of

ng

in singing.

This whole series

ch, j, jh, n.

c,

sibilant c often represent
A;;

For

j.)

the palatals is in

many

c

and j are pronounced

ch

and

j,

32.
to

Unguals:

dome

e.

r,

European Sanskritists
the dentals
4.

:

t is

t,

The

g.

somewhat
in very is

make no

pronounced like

Dentals:

The

palatal mutes

sounds of English

See also § 28.

dh, n.

d,

th,

d,

treatment

reason the euphonic

lingual mutes are said

as

drawn back

the English (or rather

pronounced.

In

attempt to distinguish
t,

dh,

equivalents of our so-called dentals
*

derivative,

(The palatal

and
tip of the tongue turned up

of the palate,

American) smooth

33.

this

with the compound

th,

t,

be uttered with the

into the

is

two successive stages

respects peculiar.

as in church and judge.
3.

gutturals.

the corresponding degrees of corruption of g are

both represented by
of

difficulty,

be taken up in detail.
n.

gh,

being generated by the corruption of original

mute

one of great

is

aspirates are not double letters.

The

31.

;

of

pronunciation of this entire group

and

It is

pronounce both classes of aspi-

scholars to

d like

and so on.

These are practically the

n.
t,

d,

practice

them from

d,

n*

But the Hindus generally use Unguals to represent the English
dentals; thus, <?JUsg«I landana - 'London.',

Introduction.

]

34.

Labials: p, ph,

5.

valents of the English p,

These are exactly the equi-

m.

m.

b,

B. Semivowels:

35.

b, bh,

r,

y,

v.

I,

The

1.

palatal semivowel y

stands in the closest relationship with the vowel

i

(short or long):

the two exchange with one another in cases innumerable.

than our

y.

36.

2.

The

r is clearly a lingual sound.

the English smooth
37.

3.

38.

the

4.

The

is

I

The

like this

It

thus resembles

seems to have been

a sound of dental position, quite as



same

syllable,

when

to

it

sounds like English w;

practice (with or without

same

ustrictly the v stands related to an

But

same exception).

an i-vowel: that

is,

it is

a w- sound in the

sense, or perhaps more like the ou in French

English

rules of Sanskrit

euphony

affecting this

(German w)
sounds

a v- sound

:

'

th
f^ot-r.

-

C. Sibilants:

39.

The

no semivowel, but a spirant, like the English
*ri ,?/<;*.;. C &rtJlf~.
otA r fer»;*Af*A
ne
€ -tour

is

Af
and/.

dental,

out.

sound, and the name "semi-

vowel", have no application except to such a w-sound

A

in Euglish.

when preceded by a consonant

except

scholars follow the

vowel precisely as y

untrilled.

pronounced as English or French v by

labial v is

in the

and European

and

r,

modern Hindus

(except r)

the

Very

y had everywhere more of an i-character

the Sanskrit

probably

and exactly

p,

like

s,

s.

1.

The

s

is

of plain character: a

the English s (as in

lesson



never as

in ease).

40.

2.

The

It is, therefore,

as

s is the sibilant

pronounced

in the lingual position.

a kind of s^-sound, and by Europeans

ordinary English

sh,

no attempt

being made

is

pronounced

to give

it

its

proper lingual quality.
41.

It is the

3.

The

y is

by

all

native authorities described as palatal.

usual sh- sound of English, though the Hindus

are said

11

Introduction.

to

speak

it

somewhat

variously pronounced

perhaps oftener as

All three sibilants are always surd.

43.

D. Aspiration:

This

euphony of the language

is

in

some few cases from dh or

c,

ing,

a

h.

The

(in

the

E. Yisarga:
final h-

sound

h

true value in the

its

It is

appears to include in

It

g.

sense of h), uttered in the

European

The
s

The anusvdra, n

lacking that closure of the organs
nasal mute; in

its

utterance there

some degree of openness of

or

which

to,

visarga

which
46.

indicate

is

Two

not

r.

is

a nasal sound

required to

is

is

or

make a

nasal resonance along with

is

the mouth.

European scholars give

the anusvdra the value of the nasal in the French -an, -on,
etc.,

gh,

itself

appears to be merely a surd breath-

for final
original, but always a mere substitute

F. Anusvara.

not an original

most cases from an older

vowel.
articulating position of the preceding

45.

sh.

one corresponding with that of k

the other with that of k to
44.

in

bh.

two stages of corruption of gh:
to

But

h.

that of a sonant.

sound of the language, but comes

is

it

usually pronounced like the

is

ordinary European surd aspiration

than as

s

42.

h.

By Europeans

nowadays.

differently



-en, -in,

a mere nasal coloring of the preceding vowel.
different signs,

Jl

and

2L,

Most commonly

the anusvdra.

are used in the
_1

is

employed;

not often be met with in printed texts, except to

mark

MSS.

to

2L will

the change

of a nasal mute to anusvdra before a following semivowel, particularly
47.

milated

I;

It

thus, HT^lf
is

^WT't.

tdnl labdhdn.

Cf. § 139.

convenient in transliteration to distinguish the assi-

to (in all

more independent

cases)

by a

special sign

origin, represented

by

n.

to,

from the anusvdra

of

12

Introduction.

Light and Heavy Syllables.

For metrical purposes

48.

tinguished as 'heavy' and 'light'.

syllables

A

(not vowels) are dis-

syllable is

heavy

if its

vowel

long, or short and followed by more than one consonant ("long

is

by

Visarga and anusvara are here counted as

position ").

sonants.

The

full

con-

aspirated mutes, of course, do not count as double

letters.

Changes of Sounds.
49.

The changes

to

Guna and

Vrddhi.

which both the vowels and the consonants

of Sanskrit, are subject are very numerous.

Among

the vowel-

changes, the most regular and frequent are the so-called guna and
vrddhi,
50.

which are of frequent occurrence

The following

Simple vowels

in derivation

table exhibits these changes:

and

inflection.

13

Introduction.

as

it

sometimes expressed, ^J a

is

is its

own guna; ^n & remains

unchanged for both guna and vrddhi.

The guna- increment does

53.

consonant:

become

%

e.

f%t^

g.,

tit

may become %<^

cet,

and

cent or

ipBV

wenrf or

in

nl

«ft

but f^«fT tint or fa«^ mntf or iffa 7'w

ne;

become ^fnfV
54.

not, except in exceedingly rare

take place in a heavy syllable (see § 48) ending

instances,

may

quently,

making-up

words from

of single

of suffixes and endings, and in the formation of



by the union of two or more stems
greatest frequency
the language

is

in Sanskrit.

handed down

not

^^N jev.

Other changes of vowels and consonants occur very
in the

a

may

by

roots,

compound words
of the

a process

form

very

in

which

the literature, the

words

Furthermore,
to us

fre-

by means

in the

composing a sentence or paragraph are adapted to and combined
with each other by nearly the same rules as those which govern the

making

of compounds, so

that

it

understand the simplest sentence
those rules.

The most important

is

in

impossible to take apart and
Sanskrit without understanding

of the rules for such combination

will be given piecemeal in the lessons.

Roots and Stems.
55.

A

application

supposed.

knowledge on the student's part of the meaning and
of the

terms root, stem, personal ending,

The formative processes by which both

forms and derivative stems are made,
to bases

etc.,

is

pre-

inflectional

by the addition of endings

and roots, are more regular and transparent

in

Sanskrit

than in any other Indo-European language.*
In the present work, which aims preeminently to give the
considerable practical acquaintance with the language

student

within a brief compass of lessons, not every given form will be
explained by analysis. But wherever any explanation of forms is
given,

it

will of course be according to this

method.

14

Introduction.

Accent
56.

of

all

The phenomena of

accent are, by the

Hindu grammarians

ages alike, described and treated as depending on a variation

of tone or pitch; of any difference of stress involved, they

These accents are marked only

no account.

and employed only

in their recitation,

nowadays by Hindus
undenoted
stress.

in

The

whereas the accents used

the pronunciation of Sanskrit (and left

in

writing) are

mainly ictus-accents,

principles of the latter system

appendix.

The

portance;

the latter none whatever;

i.

variations of
in

and only the older system

Here

it

will

be enough to state

A

two: a higher, or acute; and a lower, or grave.

of actual

third,

called

origin, being ordinarily the result

always of secondary

is

combination of an acute vowel and a grave vowel into

syllable.

It is

uniformly defined as compound in pitch, a union

of higher and lower tone within the limits of a single syllable.
is

an

the primary tones or accent-pitches of the older system are

svarita,

one

e.

will be given

older system of accents has great etymological im-

will be referred to in the following.
that

make

Vedic texts,

in certain

thus identical in physical character with the

circumflex,

Whenever,
finition,

and

fully

entitled

in the sequel,

the acute accent

signated by

accent
is to

It

Greek and Latin

to

be called by the same name.

is

mentioned, without further de-

be understood; and

will

it

be de-

the ordinary acute sign.

Conjugation of Verbs.
57.

The Sanskrit verb

exhibits the closest analogy with that

of Greek, being developed in tense-systems, as outgrowths of certain
tense-stems.

In the older stage of the language,

called Vedic period,

the

i.

e.

in

the

so-

modal ramifications of each tense -stem

are as numerous as in Greek; but in the later stage, the Sanskrit

proper (also called the classical language),

these outgrowths have

Introduction.

been lopped

off to so

15

very great an extent,

that with one insigni-

ficant exception, the precative or aorist optative,

system

There

58.

which we

call

only the present-

any modal variety whatever.

retains

still

a simple or ordinary conjugation of verbal roots,

is

primary;

and there are certain more or

less fully

developed secondary or derivative conjugations (§ 69).
59. Voices.

There are two

throughout the

voices, active

and middle, which extend

whole system of conjugation.

system alone there

is

outside that system,

For

and sometimes even within

An

be used likewise in a passive sense.

active

middle form, atmane
conjugated

in

present-

padam 'word

for one's

are liable to

it,

form

Hindu grammarians parasmdi padam 'word

the

the

a special passive inflection; the middle forms

is

Some

self.'

called

by

for another'; a

verbs

are

both voices, others in one only; sometimes some of

the tenses are inflected only in one voice, others only in the other
voice, or in both

;

of a verb usually inflected in one voice sporadic

forms of the other occur; and sometimes the voice
verb

is

compounded with

60.

differs as the

certain prepositions.

Persons and Numbers.

There are

three

persons:

first,

second, and third; and, as with substantives, adjectives, and pro-

nouns, three numbers: singular, dual, and plural. All these persons

and numbers
the

first
61.

we

The

tense and

and as

we

are

^o^uou, the verb aino,

M<tfa bhdvati (3rd

wont

etc.,

to

— except

that

person what

so the Hindus use for instance

sing. pres. indie, of

j

bhu) to signify the whole

of forms in the native
grammar, as Xeyw, or

Greek or Latin.

first

speak of the verb Xeyuj,

system of verbal forms from that root, since

in

mode

native grammarians denote as the

call the third;

the verb

made from every

are

persons of the imperative are really subjunctive forms.

^^fa
sp-^ofxxi,

The Hindus even make

heads the

list

or amo, does

substantives out of

'

Introduction.

16

such catchword forms, and

inflect

them according to the needs of

expression.
62. In

the following,

indicated

by the 3rd

the root

thus,

63.

;

V

the

sing.

bhu

conjugation -class of verbs will be

pres.

ind.,

placed in parenthesis after

(*r^"frT bhdvati).

Tenses and modes.

The scheme

of tenses and

modes put

by the Hindus holds good only for the later language, and

forth

even there utterly confounds the ideas of mode and tense.
64.

Sanskrit

The only
is

shown

logical
in the

arrangement of the modes and tenses in
following table (which includes only the

classical speech):
I.

Present -System:
d. Optative,

II.

III.

e.

a. Indicative,

b. Imperfect,

c.

Imperative.

Participle.

Perfect- System,

a. Indicative,

b. Participle.

Aorist Systems (of triple formation),
tative (sometimes

a. Indicative,

b.

Op-

= "Precative").

IV. Future Systems.

A. Sibilant Future,

a. Indicative, b. Preterit(= "Conditional'').

c. Participle.

B. Periphrastic Future, a. Indicative.
65.

The

tenses here distinguished as imperfect,

aorist receive those

names from

their

perfect,
in

correspondence

and

mode

of

formation with tenses so called in other languages of the family,
especially in Greek, and

not at all from any differences of time

designated by them.

In no period of the Sanskrit

there any expression

of imperfect or pluperfect

perfect time, except in the older language,
this value;

in

the later speech,

rare use) are so

many

language

time



nor

is

of

where the "aorist" has

imperfect, perfect,

and

aorist (of

undiscriminated past tenses or preterits.

17

Introduction.

Verbal Adjectives and Substantives.
66.

The

Participles.

participles belonging to the tense-systems

have been already indicated

in the table at

§64. There

is,

a participle formed directly from the root of the verb,

Moreover,

and passive

of past

prevailingly

future passive

different formations,

(sometimes

participles,

or

is

meaning.

neuter)

gerundives,

besides,

which

of several

are made, but without connection with the

future-stems.
67.

The

Infinitive*

classical Sanskrit

has a single

infinitive.

really an accusative case of a verbal noun, having nothing

It is

whatever
68.

to

do with the tense-systems.

A

Gerund.

frequent, and

so-called gerund, or absolutive,

like the infinitive,

is,

is

especially

a stereotyped case -form (in-

strumental) of a derivative verbal noun.

value

Its

that of an

is

indeclinable active participle, with indeterminate, but oftenest past,

temporal force.

Secondary Conjugations.
69.
2.

The secondary

Intensive;

3.

conjugations are as follows:

Desiderative;

4.

Passive;

1.

In these, not the

Causative.

simple root, but a conjugation-stem, underlies the whole system
of inflections.

Yet

a present-system,
tion;

the passive

70.

Under

in

them

expanded
is

all is

into a

plainly visible the character of

more or

less

palpably a present-system.

the

complete conjuga-

Compare

same general head belong:

5.

§

58—59.

Denominative

conjugation, which results from the conversion of noun-stems, both
substantive and adjective, into conjugation-stems; 6.
jugation,

Compound con-

resulting from the prefixion of prepositions to

from the addition of auxiliary verbs to noun-stems and
;

7.

roots,

or

Periphrastic

conjugation, from the looser combination of auxiliaries with verbal

nouns and adjectives.
Perry, Sanskrit Primer.

n

18

Introduction.

The

71.

verb-form

of

characteristic

is

its

a

proper

By

personal ending.

(i.

or personal)

finite

e.

determined

this alone is

its

character as regards person and number, and in part also as regards

mode

and

But the

tense.

mainly made by

of

distinctions

mode and

the formation of

mode and

tense are

tense-stems, to which,

instead of to the bare root, the personal endings are
appended.

Conjugation

Of

72.

portant and prominent part.

quent than those of

manner

in

as being their

this,

is

the im-

forms are very much more fre-

Its

As

the other systems together.

all

also great variety in the

made

Classes.

whole conjugation, the present -system

the

present-stems,

-

which

different roots

most conspicuous

the basis of their principal classification;

there

is

form their

difference,

and a verb

is

is

said

to

be of

this

in

which

its

present-stem

73.

Of

these conjugation- classes there are nine, including the

or that conjugation, or class, according to the

which

passive,

is

really

way

made.

is

The

a present-system only.

first

five

exhibit coincidences enough to justify their inclusion into one con-

jugation,

and the remaining four

conjugation.

The

compose likewise a second

will

chief distinctions between the

two groups are

as follows:
74.

In the first,

the classes have in

mental characteristic, a
personal ending,

now upon

goes a variation

this

in

when

the accent

:

the stem itself,

is

common,
the tone

as
is

rests

upon

it,

their funda-

now upon

the root or the class-sign.

form when the accent

fuller,

form

shift of accent

the

Along with

which has a stronger, or

and a weaker, or

on the ending.

We

briefer^

distinguish

these

forms as the strong and the weak stem-forms respectively.
75.

In

the second conjugation, on the

contrary,

the

accent

has a fixed place, remaining always upon the same syllable of the

19

Introduction.

stem, and never being shifted to the endings

weak forms

strong and

is

unknown.

;

and the distinction of

Moreover, the present-stem

of every verb in the four classes of this conjugation ends in

There are also other points of

The

76.

^

a.

difference.

classification current

among

the Hindu, and hitherto

among

the

classes,

arranged according to no intelligible principle whatever.

The

European

grammarians comprises ten conjugation-

,

native "tenth class"
i.

causative,

e.

is

limits of the present-system.
all

really

no present-class

at all,

but a

a derivative conjugation, which extends beyond the

Probably the

by no means

fact that

conjugation- stems formed by the causative sign had really a

causative

value induced the natives to adopt such a present- class.

The Hindu scheme
77.

The Hindu

also quite omits the passive.
first,

sixth, fourth,

and tenth classes form the so-

called first conjugation of their scheme,

which corresponds, except as

The remainder

regards the tenth class, with our second conjugation.

of the classes form the natives' second conjugation, which agrees
in the

main with our

78.

The

first.

classes are then as follows:

First Conjugation.
I.

The

root-class

present-stem

\h

is

'sacrifice';
III.

^1^

its

ad, 'eat';

class

(third

or

/m-class)

;

the

rool

is

dada from Ida,

'give'.

nasal class (seventh or rudh-d&ss); a nasal, extended

to the syllable

na [na]

consonant of the root

^V

of the Hindus);

form the present- stem; thus, *fW juhu from \'\ hu,

^^T

The

orf-class,

dvis, 'hate'.

The reduplicating

reduplicated to

or

coincident with the root itself; thus,

'go'; f^TO
II.

(second

in
;

strong forms,

is

inserted before the final

thus, ^«tr rundh (or

^ZOV

runadh) from

rudh, 'hinder'.

9*

20

Introduction.

IV.

added

The

a.

ww-class

A

b.

very small number

root not so ending

it is

from l/<f^

weak

is

^

inflected

u alone to form the

the eighth or tan- class of the

Hindu gram-

best ranked as a sub-class, the u-class; thus,

<T5T

tanu

tan, 'stretch.'

The

V.
in

is

nu

of roots (only half-a-dozen) ending

'make'), add

kr,

(efi

This

present-stem.

«f

j/^J su, 'press.'

and also one very common and irregularly

already in «^ n,

marians;

or su- class); the syllable

(fifth

H«I sunu from

to the root; thus,

nd- class (ninth or kri- class);

sftllH krini)

added

is

forms, «ft ni)

from \'^\

kri,

the syllable «fT nd (or,

to the root; thus, SJffan krlnd (or

See note**,

'buy'.

p. 32.

Second Conjugation.

The

VI.

accent,

is

or unaccented a-class

a-class,

the added class-sign

is

a simply

and the

;

(first

root,

strengthened by guna throughout,

taking guna (see §§ 52—53);

1^

thus,

if

or &M-class);

which bears the
it

be capable

of

bhdva (through the inter-

mediate stage bho-a) from y vbhu, 'be.'
VII.

The

a-class,

the added class-sign
accent,
7Tq[

or accented a-class (sixth or tud- class)

is a,

as in the preceding class; but

and the unaccented root

tudd from
VIII.

The

!

\

thus,

systems;
in

a class-sign

though

it

differs

;

ya

is

added to the

d\<H divya from l'^fa^ dlv (by

div), 'play.'

IX. The passive conjugation
having

not strengthened by guna; thus,

ya- class (fourth or ofty-class)

Hindus given as "fe^

only,

which

is

also properly a present-system

is

not extended into the other

markedly from the remaining classes

having a specific meaning, and in being formable from

sitive verbs, but

;

has the

Tfir tud, 'thrust.'

root, which has the accent;

the

is

it

with endings of the middle voice only.

all

tran-

It

forms

21

Introduction.

stem by adding an accented yd to the root; thus, from j'^TCT ad,

its

adyd; from j/^ff rudh, ^pzr rudhyd.

^JTir

Roots are not wholly

79.

to

even in the later language,

limited,

one mode of formation of their present-stem, but are sometimes

reckoned as belonging to two or more different conjugation-classes.
80.

The verbs

of our second conjugation

simplicity of formation

and

and numerous than those of our

first; their

be given before those of our

fore

show much

greater

and are far more frequent

inflection

paradigms will there-

first.

Prepositions and Prepositional Prefixes.
81.

more

Prepositions, or,

speaking, adverbial prefixes,

strictly

are used with verbs quite as frequently in Sanskrit as in Greek;

and more than one

anu
^l«J

may

be prefixed.

Thus when v'^V budh

TjT9f

-f-

is

given in the vocabulary, this signifies that the preposition

is

prefixed to the proper verbal form; and the 3rd sing. pres.

ind. act. of the

+ ^^-^TT

(or

verb would then be ^Sf«T^t\jf?f anubodhati; so dhd

^WT) sam-d,

rules prevailing in

Greek

The

3rd sing.
^mi^VJTfrT samadadhati.

for the prefixion of prepositions, etc., to

verbal forms will be found to hold good in Sanskrit.
82.

the

There

is

in Sanskrit

no proper class of prepositions

modern sense of the term); no body of words having as

exclusive office the

more

fully

But many adverbial
way which approximates them

"government" of nouns.

words are used with nouns
to the

in

a

developed prepositions of other languages.

are used prepositionally along with

all

the noun-cases,

dative (and of course the nominative and vocative).
their

office

is

(in

their

directive

only, determining more

strengthening, the proper case-use of the noun.

But

Words

except the
in general

definitely,

or

Introduction.

22

Declension.

The

83.

declension of substantives and that of adjectives cor-

of words must be treated
respond so closely that the two classes

here as in the kindred languages
84.

the other hand, exhibit

The pronouns and numerals, on

together.

many

striking peculiarities.

There are three numbers, singular,

Numbers and Genders.

dual, and plural; and the usual three genders, masculine, feminine,

The

and neuter.

Greek, where
85.

Cases.

following order

it

:

is

is

much more

used
in

appears

The

a moribund

extensively

state.

and vocative.

The

object sought in the arrange-

cases which are
simply to set next to one another those

one number or another,

form; and, putting the nominative

first,

Stems

few others

in

^TTd,

substantives and adjectives

I,

I.

Stems

in

is

^

a.

II.

for convenience

may

Stems

in

\i

and

^ u.

and ^? u: namely, A. radical- stems, and a

them; B. derivative stems.

IV. "Stems in

V. Stems in consonants.
In stems ending in consonants,

Strong and weak cases.

and those

form

%

inflected like

^g[ r (or ^J"^ or).

87.

there

attained.

the uses of the cases in detail see Wli. §§ 267—305.

The stems of

be classified as follows:
III.

identical in

as leading case,

no other order by which that object could be

86.

in

cases are eight in number, given generally in the

to a greater or less extent, in

For

than

nominative, accusative, instrumental, dative, ablative,

genitive, locative,

ment

dual

in ^jf r (or

^T^ ar )-> tnere

in different cases.

*s

9een a distinction of stem-

Sometimes the stem-forms are two, when

they are called strong and

weak

strong, middle, and weakest. As

is

respectively;

sometimes three:

the case with verbs, this variation

of stem-form often goes hand-in-hand with a shift of accent.
88.

In the masculine and feminine, the strong cases are the

nom. and ace, both

sing,

and dual, and the nom.

pi.

The

rest

23

Introduction.

are

weak

;

or, if there

the instr.,

dat.,

and the gen.

pi.

abl.,

be the distinction of three stem-forms, then
gen.,

and

loc. sing.,

the gen. and loc. du.,

(all of which take endings beginning with a vowel),

are weakest; and the instr., dat., and abl. du., the instr., dat., abl.,

and

loc. pi.

89.

In

ace. pi.

if

sing,

;

(whose endings begin with consonants), are middle.
the neuter,

are middle,

and the same cases

Otherwise the cases are
90.

Case-ending's.

recognized

the only strong

cases are the nom. and

there be the triple distinction, then the nom. and ace.

by

assumed as the

the

in

the dual are weakest.

classified as in the masculine.

The normal scheme

native grammarians

of case -endings, as

(and conveniently to be

basis of special descriptions), is this:

24

Lesson

I.

Lesson

roots conjugated in this

Inasmuch as

"^ST

a

is its

own guna",

form the present-stem;

The

final

^| a of the stem

g.,

lengthened in the three

Dual.

<f£'f4| vdda/si

cj^VJJ^ vddajthas

o|^\i|

3.

^<?f?l vdddti

c|dr1^ vddakas

'^fnT

of the 3rd plur.

As a heavy

94.

a root like

vddantt

properly ^jf«rT a«#;

the loss of its

makes

^

it

suffers

verbs whose stem

a, in

95

Euphonic rule.

',

3rd sing, ^fffafff jlvati; f«i«d nimi

its

See §

f«i«d (d nindati, etc.

At

the end of a

h; and generally also before

word, or as

[T([

initial

p,

IT

in

s,

^T

the

s],

narration

2.

3

s

word standing
and

k, *§f

Immediate

("historical present").

T

r

in

the

always become

kh, T£ p, VH

p/i,

and

whether these stand in the same

eftf

Force of the present.

Present time.

^

following word;

vadatas punar becomes always
96.

53.

of a sentence, or alone,

before sibilants

1.

vddatha

syllable ending in a consonant cannot be gunated,

^H jiv

final position

visarija

persons.

^ a.

ends in

*>W. v*U»'

is

a

^d\MH^ vdddmas

2.

The ending

^Jf

Plural.

vdddvas

c(rf

abbreviation, however, by

*.

first

«ldlPH vddfcmi

93.

a.

vad, present-stem ?T? vdda.

is

M^

^

these roots merely add an

e.

Sing.



^?

have medial short

class

i*

makes

A

Verbs. Present Indicative active. Unaccented a-class.

92.

number of

to

I.

iff:

The

e.

g.

ef^cTO tj«fT

q*H vadatah punah.
present

futurity.

3.

indicative

signifies

Past time, in

lively

Lesson

25

I.

I.

Vocabulary

Verbs

to be conjugated like

^"^ oar (intr.) go, wander, graz
(ofcattle);(tr.) perform, commit.

Sffa jlv

vad:

^

pat

fall

;

fly.

yaj sacrifice

"STSf

live.

(c. ace. pers. et

instr. rei).

tyqj leave, abandon.

f€T5T

^^

raks protect.

"5TJW

5TB dah burn.

^Z

vad speak, say.

\JT^ dhav

^^

vas dwell.

•p^ nam

run.

(intr.)

self*; (tr.)

TJ^r

bow, bend one's

^^

honor, reverence.

vah

(tr.)

carry, bear; (intr.)

flow, blow, proceed.

5^

pac cook.

<;ans praise.

Adverbs and Conjunctions.

*MTU{ atas

J

hence

TTfT?^ t°t a

thence

whence
therefore

^fff^ yatas

wherefore

thereupon

^T^ atra

^



iha
j

here

in this

X^^ittliam

there

fpl tatra

hither

I

way

f

so

(

whence?
«pra; kutas

where
yatra

way

so

ara kutra

in

Ifzn yalh
I

ere?

t%*4*y

w
which way

as:

katham how?

\

^SSWTT a'ihuna

why?
now

gi kva

whi ther?
Iwhe

r\d\ tada then

^RTf kada when?

Qd\ yadd
...»n

^SRI

whither

y<» titer

in that

TTOT tatha

^m

thither

adya to-day

wl

't

.akes pla*

ORT^ sarvatra everywhere **^1 a
stem, whether

Tr^T^ eram so, thus

^f?T

TP^ eva just, exactly

^

iti

so, thas

ca (postpos.) -que

*T

M

'f

as converted into

vr** instead of

^f*T<^

Lesson

26

I. II.

Exercise

x

15.

*Today
2

protect
20.

We

18.

.

We

they

sacrifice.

burns.

Now

24.

bend 1 ?

1

bow

21.

They

live

2

16.

.

again

2

Lesson
which end

1

17.

.

Always
2

Ye abandon.
26.

He

23.

Why

/

thouJ

2

do ye

2
do ye dwell ?

II.

Unaccented a- class, cont'd. Roots of

Verbs.

97.

22.

Where 1

28.

.

ye go

Ye two praise.

25.

.

they fly

2

1

Whither 1 runnest

19.

.

cook.

ttoo

2

Now

2

1

two

we

There 1

27.

abandon

I.

this

class

a vowel, and consonant- roots not forming heavy

in

their vowels in forming their present-stems;
syllables (§53), gunate

J-* e
~> ^

jft

I

'

faji and «ftni

e. g.,

****

rfro

and

form %c^

^t bho;
cet

and

With

98.

fc>

^ff

^t^

ar with

WSTR!i%«-^; 1 °^

>l

Roots

99.

f^<^

*orf/f;

%

*jq"^

7<e



^

>'

3" dru and *1

smar; f^ft^

oT^ vrs forms

the class- sign tQ a, a final

unites to form ^STO aya

^f ava; ^fT

rm %./e an d

smr forms

Wm

in consonants:

form

wars.

see § 159; so ^ff o with

bkdvati; ^T smr

Mw

and ^\^ budh

of the gunated root

TJ e

a yields ^n; ara.

c#, %rTf?T cetati: efq

^^

cit

Thus,

^

« becomes

f^ ji,

W^m

3rd sing.

smarati.

3rd sing. ^farf?T bodha'i
^ST^ 6wdA,

wrs,

cmfrT

;

vdrsati.

*
The superior figures indicate the position in the Sanskrit
sentence of equivalents for the words so designated. By this indiaiao
s pyojdej tne necessity of applying euphonic rules wh.ch
-

,,

96.
,

Force


l resent

<>

ini (b

en stated.

of words in Sanskrit

meaning of the sentence.

is

very

From

the

.

^r of

narration

The order

influences the

.
i

("histori

words required

Words

/

in Ital

;

M

in the

Sanskrit sentence will

are QOt t0 be trans i ate d.

Lesson

The

100.

The

101.

The

roots IPR^

gdccha and

If^

root

HvQ

^J^

sac/,

'hide',

Several roots in

102.

a.

final

pa f^f?T

pibati

t5U

^^^

Ace.

;

^"?RF^

;

RPH9{ phalanx

jighrati.

a.

v

Plural.

devdu

devas

\^TT^

^^T'l, devdn

Tfffi

Je</«* farr.)

phala, 'fruit'.

n% phale

(a

+ 1)

lMlf«1 phaldni
»

»

r>

—-v

"

t*

phala.

As a

3rd sing, frf8(d

"

deva
b. Neuters:

*

^

sthd,

fayfd



N.

Ttf^f

^fT

1JT ghrd

%^

devam

^

Voc.

a form their present-stem by a
thus,

Dual.

devas

Voc.

Ace.

the present-stem ^fte sida.

Masculines: <*^ deva, 'god'.

Singular.

N.

the present-stems

*I«frl guhati.

Masculines and Neuters in

103.

yam make

makes

'sit',

makes

peculiar process of reduplication
ththati**; TTT

7f1{

ydccha*.

root ^fT
at/A,

gam and

27

II.

-

l

rule, the

<*^

<% a-//

Ae* 1* "*'">** soc^f.'c

grammarians do not allow

^ ch

to stand in

that form after a

vowel, but require it to be doubled, becoming
aspirate is doubled by prefixing the corresponding

An

x§g" cch.

non-aspirate. Cf. § 165.
**
The dental sibilant

immediately
"a k or T t
f/d^lTd
"S th

s is changed to the lingual H «, if
preceded by any vowel save ^Sf a and tJIT a, or by
s be final, or followed by "^ r. Thus,
unless the



^

ti-stha-ti

— a process

becomes

o

own

fjfgffff tisthati (the



<*|ftlM

of ^T

th

s ibii an t.

by anusvdra, does not prevent

thus, ^cHffq havimi.

in the initial

And

ff%^ havu-su or

^Tfa:*|

its

altering effect

its

upon

the alteration takes place

of an ending after the final "8

the iatter be regarded as also changed to
vtso rga; thus,

to

will

nasalization of the alterant vowel, or in other words,

jg followed

havis-su

change

be explained below). So
agnisu; and V*nHT dhanus-d becomes

of assimilation

^rf^TO agni-su becomes
\HMI dhanusd.

The

^

H

s
s

of a stem, whether
or as converted into

havih-su instead of

fftT^J

5-*$

28
Force of

104.

MomAce.

Lesson

2.

The

accusative

cases.

II.

The nominative

1.

casus mbjectivus.

is

casus objectivus, denoting chiefly the nearer or

is

sometimes however the more remote, object; sometimes also

direct,

the terminus

ad

and extent of time and space.

quern,

Euphonic combination of vowels.

105.

or^a+^lor

^f a

1.

=

"31T

^fa

e. g. l[r{J

"^ff-

gata api

= IfTTfa gataJpi.
2.

^or^fl+S;

3.

=

=

=

+

or ^IT

^3>

g.

TOTT +

^

tfTT^ =

ifftfftgateZii.

+ ^r{

e.g. iffU

o.

uta

e.

a,r.

rnaha +

UfT

g.

^-rfa: rsih

e

TJ

or

TJ

a/

=

t[

e.

at.

T[<{\

g.

+

^

ewa

Jfrfa gatdi 'ua.

will

It

+

-

osadhih
106.

e.

S=

+ ^J T = ^TJ

"9HT

^1 or ^TT

6.

o

^

X[e.

*T^"fa. maharsih.

^

5.

at-

+

"?rr

m or

Tfftfl gatoHa.

"% or

4.

CX+ e

or

"^T

ort^i =

*

^

o or -^ft

a« = ^ft au.

be

the

e.

g. 3T7TT

+ ^qfvr.

''sadhih.

Jlfff^f^H gafau
practice

in

everywhere

this

work

to

separate independent words in transliteration, but not in the deva-

nagarl text;

by an
double
%\

and

with

coalesced

if

a



apostrophe
if

it

an

initial

vowel of a following word has

of the preceding,

final

single if the initial

be indicated

will

this

vowel be the shorter,

be the longer, of the two different

initials

To

every case of combination yield the same result.

which

in

aid the be-

at
ginner,

a

point

will

sometimes be placed,

in

the

devanagarl,

under a long vowel formed by two coalescing vowels; thus, ^rfa•nO*!!'IJi agnina 'rtnam.

Vocabulary
Verbs,

1&{ gam
VTT

ghrd

a- class

:

fSfiji (tr.

{gdechati) go.

j|

r^-

II.

and

dru run.

•ft nl lead, guide.

(jighraii) smell.

/

conquer, to

intr.)

'<}******

the

/

'

(

nij/**'

^

Lesson

XH

pet (pibati) drink.

9f

bhu become, be,

Tff^

yam

gTf

vrs

rain,

TfH
e.

fciuix^i

rain;

s th®

stand

Subst.

nrpa king.

•TXf

Neut. :

(fig.)

overwhelm.

(tisthati)

^H"^ kxira milk.
*r^ grha house.

^^ jala

(intr.).

Masc:

he O, ho.

Exercise

^iTf^T

^n fsrarfa i^pr:
7n ^%

*R<!:

1

Two houses

think

2

village

fall

The

21.

.

fruits
1

elephants
*

i

*i

^

2
.

18.

1

live

Final

2

?^

.

*\T*k\*\:

^ttt.

The

25.

m

is

<rt

w*

2

gives
20.

(accus.).
1

i

The king 3

The god 3

The man 3

i

Ri^ra fxRfTf 5^:

smell

3

II

1

commonly

rain

i

i

^

i

<k

i

<*8 n
2

leads the elephant

water

1

19.

.

Ye

1
.

2

1
.

both

The king 3 wins 2

the perfume

reverences" the gods

gods"' give

^fai

ttrt

^tf^fT •pn:

16.

.

two elephants

23.

.

II.

*

*pN ^Mifa

on (?U) the two gods 1
1

cook 2

<=io

i

i

i

The man 1 drinks 3 milk 2

15.
17.

^

I

q

i

present.

city.

Interj.:

^

village.

^rpi

gift,

•TTT nagara

J[9^ gandha odor, perfume.

^t^t

water.

dana

^TT

gaja elephant.

TTW grama

and homo).

(vir

tr^ pnira son.

smr remember, think on.

^rj

3T5J

exist,

give
;

man

•T^ nara
1

(ydechati) furnish, give.

shower down

29

II.

the

22.

.

24.

They
The two

C^T).

written as

anusvdra

if

the fol-

lowing word begins with a consonant; but the Hindus pronounce
it as
m in such cases. At the end of a sentence anusvdra should
<R[
at be written for ?^

m, though

this is

a habit

common

in the

MSS.

Final radical ?^ m, in internal combination, is assimilated to a
following mute or spirant. In the former case it becomes the nasal



class with the mute; in the latter it becomes anusvdra.
n jime
idical «^ n, in internal combination, becomes anusvdra betne



mS6 ibilant.
hav

30

Lesson

III.

Lesson
Accented

Yerbs.

107.

III.
Roots of

a'-class.

H

present-stem by adding an accented

The

gunated.

of these stems

inflection

form

this class

d to the root, which
is

like

precisely

their

is

that

not
of

stems belonging to the preceding class, except as to the position
of the accent

f^p?

thus,

;

present-stem

ksip,

Several roots in

108.

with

The
fit

"3f£

roots
iy

^J

and

^

in

^t

i

^

and

e. g., oR kr,

For

u and ^J u change those vowels into

the root ^[^

Likewise, ^J r makes

its

number of

in the present
f^fijffTT

The

III.

D.
Ab.

^^•T

Masculines

devena

;

always

n

d«!T<i.

G.

2T*3

L.

%%

and

note).

T(T§ prach,

are strengthened
sic,

present ind.

used before palatals, «^ n before

is

and _L n before

^

sibilants

and

jf

h.

a, cont'd,

:

Plural.

»

»

»



devasya d^M\{{^

deve

;

assimilated in class to the

rf^l^jJ^ devdbhydm

devdt

regarded as a

H^fa prcchdti.

Dual.

?<(|{{ devdya

b.

"31

before labials

Singular.

L

is

Masculines and Neuters in
a.

is

present -sfj-^frf rcchdti

nasal

thus, f^J ksi,

icchdti (§ 100,

roots following this class

following consonant; thus

m

ich

by a penultimate nasal; thus, f^ra

siiicdti.

dentals, ?^

«j[^

^$frT

thus,

sometimes given as XJ^ prch, makes

A

;

\J dhu, \sT^HT dhuvdti.

:

'desire',

?.s,

substitute in the present-stem;

HO.

Hindus written

'strew', f^RTTfiT kirdti.

uv, respectively, before the class-sign

f^j^rfTJ ksiydti; Jf su, *raf?f suvdti
109.

etc.

r of this class (by the

f) form stems in ^X[ ?ra >

pres. ind.

fcjlj ksipd,

f^prrf*T ksipdmi, f^PTftl ksipdsi, f^trffT ksipdti,

»

devayos
»

^q^

devais

?c(M]^ devebhyas
»

»

%«U"I|J^ devdndm

%%^

devesu

Neuters follow exactly the declension of masculines in the

above cases

;

thus, Xfi%«T phalena, QtWTtl pbaldya, etc.

Lesson

Force of cases.

112.

1.

The

31

III.

instrumental answers the questions i>*^

wherewith? and whereby? and expresses accompaniment, agent,
or means.
It is also

2.

The

dative denotes the remoter object, and direction. D"?-

used as dativus commodi ; very frequently also to denote

Sometimes (and

end or purpose.

predicative, in the sense of

it is

ablative answers the question
cause.

4.

belonging

The

genitive

oftenest with copula omitted)

'makes

casus adjectivus,

is

or understood,

Greek.

'

as the ablative
e

is
i

>

The

fll>i.

kinds of $*"•

5.

The

lo-

*<><.•

when, an action occurs.

used in Latin and the genitive
nus siH t,i c-0*>r\.

(?*"£?£.

Verbs, a-class:
^TO
^Jff

krs (krsdti) plough.
ksip

(ksipdti)

^T5f

hurl,

sic

srj

drop

let

(srjdti)

go;

create,

connections) wash,

die (diedti)

a-class:

show, point out.

(guhati, § 10I) hide, conceal.

T$Z sad

vie (viedti) enter.

Subst.

drip,

cast, Sjpr (sprcAli) touch; (in certain

Tf^prach (prcchdti) ask, ask about. 1[%guh

f^TT

(sinedti)

moisten.

throw.

fTT\

III.

ffjT^

(icchdti) wish, desire.

is

f%pj

*

r> i

Vocabulary

(sidati,

I0I) sit.

§

^TsT hasta hand.

Masc:

kata mat.

Nent.:

^*ft kunta spear.

%"^

ksetra field.

"^T^f bala> child, boy.

\J«T

dhuna money,

^"PT marga road, way,

%^f megha cloud.
IJ"^

3.

often used absolutely, in agreement with a participle expressed

It is

efi'J

all

denoting

objectivus, partitivus).

(e. g. gen. subjectivus,

cative denotes the place where, or the time

in

tends toward'.

for,

whence ?^ and very frequently denotes

cava arrow.

street.

^fT^H

riches.

langala plough.

f^TO visa poison.

T^sukha fortune

.,„«.*/
'

H csf*

.**»"•

Lesson

32

Exercise

it*

m

i

^nft: ^ir

wftr

i

clouds

4

drop
roads

fa;o
1

men money
3

2

hands

2

2

i

<w

2

i

*nft

-pt frar*:

T*re;

i

n

3

on the

fields

The man's

19.

.

iprf*r^fnT itt:
i

the city
(instr.) into
1

of the clouds

with water
23.

(TO).

^t

i

i

«R

i

i

1
.

22.

The taw boys 3

1

2

sit

21.

.

1
Both men

point out

4

w

\

g^W

it:

4

on mats

We

lead

4

wash 3
their

the road

2

16.

The

The two men 1 go 4

The king4

18.

sons

17.

(loc).

.

I-

i

i

n

2

3

^

^z #^r:

<*8
iTT**[wf7r ^r:
2
1
3
asks the men about the road (ace).

water

the water

give

i

i

The boy4

1

i

III.

\*m i%t *prfa e

^rrft: f^rfar

15.

%

fire<r: I "«

*n^fa <^

*n3f

^

f^rfTT

srer

IV.

III.

3

gives

3

20.

.

(use

sons

the two

The gods4
^JJ\)

2

(dual)

to the city

both

home 3

1

(gen.).

Lesson IV.
Masculines in

113.

^

i.

"3Tfa «</«*> 'fire'.

Plural.

Dual.

Singular.

^T^ agnayas

N. ^rftreL a9nis
A.

^TfrWR^

I.

D.

-4IM'4|

Ah^C^

agnibhydm

agnaye
agues

agnibhis

agnibhyas

r

n

•n

^^rfqf^^

^rfq«I^

1)

^'•fHlH agnlnam
L.

^|M1 agnau

*

**

n

agnisu*

See note

«l
if

to § 102.
dental nasal
n,

a vowel,
turned into the lingual
preceded in the same word by the lingual sibilant or semi[ D xf ?)
abo» s
or ^[ r: and this, not
J,
r, ^J f,

The

or bv
""»

^jf^J

^

n or Jf

in

_

or ^f

y

when immediately followed by

w or

^

y

v.

is

>
v

r v»*i

33

Lesson IV.
Neoters in

114.

^

Dual.

Singular.

N. ^ifT
A.

v<^

«1

D.

f\<l!

I

«|

n

I

vdrind*

»

L.

«dfXfUj vdrini

v.

^nr y<5re
115.

r>



^rfr

y<^

cUf^f^^
n
<<

1

»

0^1*1

warffmm

vdrim

<||P^li

n

Masculine and neuter adjectives

in the dat.,



vdribhis

cflPl^H. vdribhyas

»

»

the substantives above.

may,

»

TTfTTlft^ vdrinos

«

or

»

vdrini

»

»

«TTf^^Tf^ vdribhydm

Ab. cUfiUlH. carinas

G.

^lOHU

w

f\^! vdrine

1

Plural.

vdrini

cUf^uH

d

n

I-

vari, 'water'.

^TTT

?'.

T

in

are declined like

i

t-~*dS'

But neuter adjectives (never substantives)

abl., gen.,

and

loc.

sing.,

and the gen. and

loc.

dual, substitute the corresponding forms of masculines.
116.

Euphonic changes of

^

s

and

These two sounds

"^ r.

stand to each other in the practical relation, in external combination,
of corresponding surd and sonant: in countless cases
"^ r in situations requiring

and, less often, "^ r becomes
internal combination the
is

extremely
117.

A. Final

nant (except



unless,

only
at

if

common

f

r

indeed,

it

^

where

s

two are

1.

becomes

s

a surd

is

required.

far less interchangeable.

as an etymological final,

^C. s.



^

or favoring the occurrence of a sonant;

the r not

In

The

s

common.

Before a sonant, either vowel or conso- $•**

see below),

^

s is

be preceded by

^S(

changed
a or

to the

^STT

sonant

d; thus,

41

Tr

fa^

the altering letter stands immediately before, the nasal, but

whatever distance before the

latter

it

may

be found: unless, in-

deed, there intervene a palatal (except If y), a lingual, or a dental.

Thus,
*

•fJfl'^TJJ'

nagareua,

See preceding note.

Perry,

f{\J^ mdrgena,
c ch

j

'

Sanskrit Primer.

fjt
t

m

>j

a

TjT,q"jfx?r

fh

.V

jt

/V

<h

n

I*

J

puspani.

o

34

Lesson IV.

becomes -^jfai^ agnir atra; -4jfaf^ '^f^T ognis

agnis atra

dahati becomes TMfi^c^f^f agnir dahati.

Final

2.

118.

^

short

initial

;

;

It is

119.

which denotes

4,

comma.
Before any

^

as loses its

"^^

a

is

nrpo Hra.

<S^

dropping of an

this

^JJ

T^f^T

v

icchati; <TrT^

initial

^ a,

vowel other than short

initial

becoming simple

s,

occasioned remains; thus, «(lfH

^^fff nrpa

^

initial

the practice in our system of transliteration to render

the sign

3.

and the

W?rf?T nrpas jayati becomes «pft WTfTT nrpo

inverted
120.



to ^ft o

changed

thus,

•P?^
«PTC ^T^ nrpas atra = •pft

dropped
jayati

^J^

a, is

See also § 95.

any sonant consonant or before

as, before

d<^<*fls

tatos

by an

final

nR a,

a; and the hiatus thus

«/y<M icchati becomes «TH

udakam =

<fff

3?<fi7^ tata

ucfaknt.
121.

Final

4.

^

any sonant, whether vowel or

as before

^H^

consonant, loses its

becoming simply ^JT «;

s,

thus occasioned remains; thus, •nTT^T

X^$ftH nrpa

icchanti ;

S^f^T

ana<

tne hiatus

nrpas icchanti

•JUTO W^ff^T nrpas jayanti =

•fXTT

= •pn
-alilfWl

nrpa jayanti.

ar-

form which

p*£kyj

^

B. Final

122.

^

s

punar standing

ift^

<7«S

maintains

punar

m ht

123.

,

itself

A

2.

r in general

end of a sentence becomes TT*T punah ;

at the

final

original

"^ r,

punar

double

"^

r

is

to

T r,

is

made long by compensation;

JTT

7T*J*

agnl rocate

first

^

r is omitted,

r
puna rdmah; % f*T^
;

after

^J a or ^(7 « 5

^^

OWd

;

thus,

JpTC^

jayati.

nowhere admitted:

occur, either by retention of an original "^ r or
the

shows the same

same conditions: thus

before vowels and sonant consonants

iH^^fd

atra,

^

exhibit under the

But

gih-

Final

1.

would

TFTK,

'JV.

r.

such would

by conversion of

and the preceding vowel,

Tt^%

if

^

s

short,

=
y\^\ TJW. punar rdmah

thus,

a9 nis rocate

dhenus rocate

\

if

-

^pcft

Tfa<T

= $»T <H*<* dhenu

rocate.

Lesson IV.

IV.

Vocabulary

ruh (rdhati) grow,

Verbs:

"^t?

krt (krntdti) cut, cut off.

f^TR^

^f^

muc (muncdti)

?Jx£

deliver,

free,

Up (Umpdti) smear.
lup (lumpdti) break to pieces,

^i^

release.

35

devastate, plunder.

Subst.:

HUfq agni, m.,

^S(fX

TJTfW pant, m., hand.

(as proper

fire;

name) Agni, the god of

Trrq papa,

fire.

^J

tHftf rsi, m., seer.

fjrf'C
oprf

n

m,

'i

i

duhkha,

^*3

m., now. pr.

pie a,

~m$satya,

people.

(pi.)

mis-

misery,

n.,

n., truth,

I

I

|

i

i

*rrc fire*:
(§ 123)

^ft%

93

spears

at the king

truth 3
*

.

2

20.

.

qo

i

18.

in

I

8

of

^*ft

I

(dat.)
1

17.

burns

3

i

(abl.)

^nsfr:

99

I

1

2

Both enemies

16.

.

touches

trees

2
.

happiness

4

19.
3

1

Modifiers generally precede the

I

*pT!

n

Rama
the

Through righteousness

<£.

I

98

n

i

^Rfwt <Hlfa *n^fa
^fiHlO WT pTfll

9*

I

the mountains

3

Fire

i

ffc:

^RTfTT

fir ^flTW ^nr:

i

3
Qiva dwells

hands

i

XWt

1

his

|inTf?T

^ irrrf^f^ f*r*m c y^t t^- ftff%

^fcRft

2

name

1^1^ TOT:

|

irsft <hj

15.

/w.,

IV.

^^rfaf^lr^ T^fa ? f«ft itlRTT:* TTTCft
flT Ui^fni M H{M\ «MMI VT H^fni

i

of

a god.

Exercise

i

name

righteousness.

Aon, m., nom.

^f^

fortune.

^ttHt

of

a god.

mountain.

7«na, m., man;

name

vrksa, m., tree.

ffT^

&ari, m., poet.
S"'

m., nom. pr.,

a hero.

^Hf|f asi, m., sword.

efifcj

n., sin.

^\H rdma,

m., enemy.

c.ri,

two sons

his

Seers

arises

word which

1

4

is

hurl
3

2

1

speak

4

with
the

(^) for manmodified.
3*

36

Lesson IV. V.

kind
22.

2

(^T,

Fruits

Hari

2

are

^J)

{use

Rama

24.

.

3

1

The

21.

gen. pi.).

1

hurls

4

seer's

1

hands

two
2

on

the trees

the

sword 3 from

.

2

4

touch

23.

People

his

hand 2

water 3

.

remember 2

1

(abl.).

Lesson V.
Verbs.

124.

their present-stem

by adding

Thus from

accent.

from

Unaccented ya- class.

<5p|
125.

«fij?

nah

to

^f ya
is

made

Roots of
the root,

this

class

form

which bears tbe

the present-stem

«TfT ndhya;

lubh, <5THT lubhya.

The

inflection of stems of this class follows the

model of

g(& vad.
126.

with

<f

stem,
l| di

i

f^ 2-forms, especially in the

are given by the

or ^ft o

a-class.

the root
^TT

Certain ^rr a-roots, because of their peculiar exchanges

and

Thus

^

§ 132), and by them assigned to the

gT

3f gdi)

N.

(Hindu

hvd (Hindu

makes

For the root

system another root
128.

'suck'

^sTT rfAa,

hu or

gd (Hindu
-127.

(cf.

formation of the present-

Hindu grammarians as ending

^
^

dhe),

in TJ e

V

bhu,

or
or

forms ^T^ffa dhdyati ;

hve) forms

,£<6(ffT

hvdyati;

J||4(f?T gdyati.

^TFT drg, 'see', is substituted in the present-

VfiX

Masculines in ^3

V a 9i which makes M^frT pdgyati.
u.

'sun'.
*ff«j bhdnu,

37

Lesson V.
Masculine adjectives in

^

Euphonic Changes of

^

129.

cont'd.

s,

whether original or representing

sibilant,

surd mutes

•TT^

u are similarly declined.

[^

tj^firl

is

1§ ch],

c,

1.

Final

^

s,

becoming palatal ^T

assimilated,

a lingual surd mute

H

it

~& $]>

in 'ike

manner,

but the case almost never occurs.

s,

surd mutes [?^

them,

[Z U

t,

W

th],

since

it

is

Thus

g.

naras carati becomes •T^rfTf'T narag carati;

3C
3j^«f naras chalena becomes «T^ ^%*f narag chalena.

lingual

the dental

before the palatal

final "^ r t

2.

T^
Before

would become

it

Before the dental

3.

already of the same class with

of course remains unchanged; thus, ^HTOt f*i»fa rdmas

tisthati.

130.

(much

The

preposition

^STT

«

is

sometimes used with the ablative

less often with the accusative), in the sense of 'hither from',

'all the

way from'; but
As a prefix

to', 'until'.

far

more usually

^|
^T^
^|T^

W^jJ

kup (kupyati



w. gen. or

gam

-f

^STT

7T tr (tdrati)

*

TT1

+

rise,

spring up,

"Vl « (drdhati) climb, mount,
ascend.

fay

be angry.

krudh (kriidhyati



a (dgdcchati) come.

cross over.

Mich (likhdti) scratch; write,

w. gen. gpi lubh (lubhyati

or dat.) be angry.
1(J{

ruh (rdhati)

grow.

as (dsyati) throw, hurl.

dat.)

way

'to', 'unto', 'at'.

V.

Vocabulary

Verbs:

to signify 'all the

« means

to verbs, ^TT



w. dat. or

loc.) desire, covet.

in
fj^m

gus (gusyati) dry up.
snih (mihyati

— w.

gen. or

*)**}-!

loc.) feel inclined to, love.

rcap (ndgyati) perish.

XHT V ac (pdfyati)

see.

f[

hu or

JT

hva (hvdyati)

call.

S-*S

Lesson V.

38
Subst.:

|f^[

^r^j anna, n., food, fodder.

fetou, m., sun.
m., jewel

Tfl!!' raani,
i

apya, m., horse.

^pg

"^^ ratna,

jewel.

n.,

M? m

^rffVsJ udadhi, m., oeean.

TTT3T

3T^ guru, m., teacher.

^fTO vayu, m., wind.

in^

f^XJjr visnu, m.,

pattra, n., leaf, letter.

pada^ m.

TJ"P?

foot;

,

quarter

;

j

ray, beam.

^TC

nom. pr. name of

1T3 f a ^", m? enemy
pikhara, m., summit.

f^PUT

6aAu, m., arm.

f^H

\

m., drop.

fcj'rf bindu,

heap.

-5

a god.

parapu, m., axe.

TT^J

r<

^^}

scholar.

gisya, m., pupil,

sukta, n., Vedic

hymn.

Exercise V.

$

i

*jtt. ftr^Tnrf

*rrat

^jf

^r%

i

of water
the

4

i

<w

i

i

3i%: ipfr
2

1

rays

down from
1

^nr^r

climb

5

love

hurls

Icing

bows

3

sons"

4

spears

before his

O

2

2

1

seer,

we

Orthodox Hindus maintain

revealed to their reputed authors,

2

1

3

4

(gen.

(dat. or loc).

to

Tiro

.

ii

i

men 8

4

the poet's

Visnu 3 {ace).

,

The

i

<k

i

<w

i

n

23.

The

24.

The

scholar

1

with their

2

3

jewels
29.

hymns,

thus 'saw' them.

K

qc

m

2

or loc).

25.

i

i

A drop
we see4

20.

men 1 come

that the Vedic

who

1

3

of the 'mountains'.

desire

sacrifice

O

2

26.

(ace).

The two kings

T*i xnsra:

21.

.

poets

at his enemies

teacher

27.

(instr.).

or loc). 28.
*

3

3

3

wind blows (^W) from the summits
1

*rr*f

the mountains

cloud

the

4

1

^rOer

wrr nm\*ri Tnftff^fnT

i

fij-

firef*

1

^rrcrr ipnfr sfarr

i

<*$

Both kings

22.

.

«^>

the sun's

falls

3

city

i

i

1

tnt Rj^fd

Now 4
1

<*

i

fwf^r

£*rfa tt:
19.

•pnr

m^

^^1^: fwrfa wf?f
'srfw fswf^r 8 ^fat^vf*

\pi *j«rfnT

cRcf^ft

tq^t: ^rerrr:

(dat.

The two
etc.,

were

Lesson V. VI.
cook 3 food 1 with
31.

1

In the

city

fire

2

30.

.

the king

2

The

calls

seers

4

39.

praise

enemies

his

Visnu 2 with hymns 3

4

1

.

3
.

Lesson VI.
Verbs,

131.

am

in ^S[^

"retain, rll*4jfd tdmyati;
last

the

The

//a-class, cont'd.

lengthen their ^J a

Vf^

a.

The

— by the

The

present-system

The

134.

root cjra vi/adh
:

is

^T das

abbreviated to

mad

this

has

fzm

final 6)

'<Hf7{

dydti. ketJ-o.S'*-

vidh in the

fclvyfTT vidhyati.

root

sfij^

kram,

by the natives

said

present-stem according to this class, really
to the a-class,

UW

Hindus written with

present-stems with an accented yd; thus,

133.

root

thus,

*n««jf?T mddyati.

132. Certain a-roots (five

make

^

;

— but

bhram, ?JTRrf?T bhrdmyati

makes ,some forms with short
same lengthening:

roots of this class which end

forming their present-stem

in

and the root-vowel

but not in the middle;

forms

it

to

form

its

only according

lengthened in the active voice,

is

$THf?l krdmati, but middle ^fJR%

thus,

krdmate.

The

135.

root xpi^ cam,

used only with the preposition ^rr «>

forms ^rT^TTWin acdmati.
136.

Neuters in

^

u.

?ffc|

Singular.
$T.

madhu, 'honey'.

Dual.

?TO madhu

Plural.

Ttpf) madhuni

^TOf'T madhuni

A
I.

D.

^VTT
*?*J«J

madhuna
madhune

Ab. ?TO«T^ madhunas

G.



L.

^r^ffvf

V.



madhuni

or 3J\Tt
*T\j

?T\WI7^ madhubhydm ^TOTH^ madhubhis
B



T^ft^






madhvnos
M

TT^R^T madhubbyas




fT%PTTI(
***J9

madhundm

ma dhi<?u



40

Lesson VI.

Neuter adjectives (but not substantives)

137.

in xf

u

take

may

the forms proper to the masculine in the dat., abl.-gen., loc. sing.,

and gen. -loc. dual.
Changes of

138.

becomes

•^ n

%HI"t. tdnjandn
th» last case,
TTT

ni

Final «^

nasalized



n,

which

/,

thus,

^ch

fM'b^»4V

n} thus <fT^

44«f

TfTt.

I

j

and

^

f,

dl»^I'^ ,l tan gatrun.

In

s

initial

chatrun.

written ^f
tan lokdn

^t^TTt

91

<n-

*V.

^n P°^n =

before an initial «J
is

initial

tan jandn becomes

almost always substituted for the

is

^

Before

«^ n.

7f[% ^T^l.

however,

p; thus,
139.

;

final

n;

"5J

is

/,

assimilated and becomes

or (what

nl,

becomes

TfT^T

or Tfi Wt BFTTs tan lokdn.

is

same

the

*"Tl<*l«l tdnl

thing)

lokdn

5

*

c
Before the surd palatal, lingual, and dental mutes there

f

140.

inserted

after

final

i^ n a sibilant of each of those classes

is

re-

,K'
spectively, before

tan ca

we

which

if^

n becomes anusvara; thus for

find 7TP5T tdnc ca; for TTTt.

WG\

tan talhd,

cfT5^ ^T

<rNRTT

*aw«

cam + ^Tf d (dcdmati)

sip,

tathd*

Vocabulary
Verbs:

^f

tJJ^

r (rcchdti

— § 109) go

to one's lot, fall
Arra?n

Hf*^

stride

up

VI.

+

^TT

drink, rinse the mouth.

to; fall

<f^

upon.

tarn (tamyati)

a (dkrdmati) 7TO

(tusyati)

be sad.
rejoice,

take

pleasure in (w. instr.).

to, attack.

yfa^
*

£us

dlv (divyatij play.

This rule really involves an historic survival, the large ma-

jority of cases of final

^n

in the

language being for original ns.
c and c^ t, since
n before

Practically, the rule applies only to

^

^

cases involving the other initials are excessively rare.

41

Lesson VI.



1SCH bhram (bhrdmyati

§

131)

^

ejra vyadh (vidhyati) hit, pierce,

<fat|

adharma,

m.,

•T^

rcefra, n., eye.

Jf\%

^ra

agru, n., tear.

-fj^

r£.?a,

TajftT?

%>a,

man

•mfif nrpati, m., king.

injustice,

m., bee.

•*lfrjf all,

ksatriya, m., warrior,

of the second caste.

aksa, m., die, dice.

wrong.

,

steal,

cease..

Subst.:

-4|VJ<$

hr (hdrati) take away,

plunder.

(gamyati) become quiet,

be extinguished, go out,

^f^

become

(gramyati)

weary.

*f^ mad (mkdyati) get drunk,

^i^ gam

gram

TSfT^

wander about.

madhu,

honey.

n.,

JT?5 mukha, n., mouth, face.

m., bear.

??|n mrtyu, m., death.

^W rasu,

m., anger.

n.,

wealth, money.

Exercise VI.

^^

^n

f^rf^r
*tpr:

^>

i

m

i

i

qg

i

<k

^:

i

The warriors 1
5

pierces

become weary
his

2

honey

.

enemy

20.

3

2

5

honey

then

5

the

^gf*r frt^T

ftpsra

i

c

3

play

The water

and

4

2

3
.

2

about

23.

rejoice

.

24.

\

1

i

*rr-

11

17.

1

18.

The

2

king's

The warrior 1

Bees are fond of3 (Tf^
1

moistens

(*J*0- 22

When 1

6

7

3

^ wr *hit

.

if-

^5*^<s e

(instr.).

to-day

f^wrirf

P>tt!miq
i

2

19.

.

i

*rcr

1

^

i

<m

it

4

of his tears

flitting

fruits

scholars

road

8

1

*nft

i

i

for money

on the

$

i

mimm «iE t

with the spear

There 2 bees 1 are

ing

^ifatfy-ii Jrrerra

i

*wr ^frrw ^ $<*f^ *rran:

3

4

3

^trt

16.

horses

21.

i

i

tjtc ^f^n^n:^rr?irRf7f

^r^ft

i

T^t m*!W.
^rf^r

^Nrfar

i

-

4

(1^Q

^w0

the teacher's

Tears

1

stand

4

3
.

meQl are cook-

2

in

)

his feet

3

anger

ceases

4

the warriors'

,

2

42

Lesson VI. VII.

eyes
26.

25.

.

A

The enemies 1 overwhelm 4
3

2

king with arrows

the
(cfTf)
A

V

1

quarter of the injustice falls upon

4

i

3

("^g) the

king (ace).

Lesson VII.
Causative Verbs

141.

(native -'cur-class ").

The Hindu gram-

marians describe a certain present-system which they assign to a
so-called "cwr-class".
at

This

is,

in fact

however,

no present-class

but a causative or secondary conjugation, which

all,

no causative value; and

Hindus
stems

it

in their cur-class,

not con-

these that are grouped by the

is chiefly

which also includes some denominative-

For

with causative accent.

in dya,

is

But many formations of this sort have

fined to tke present-system.

practical purposes

it is

well enough to consider these verbs here.

The causative-stem

142.

root, which

the

is in

1.

Medial or
if

strengthening,
f^fi? v id>
144.

dhr,

VJIT*!

V

formed by adding

"^f^f

dya

to the

main as follows:

143.

\jj

is

usually strengthened; and the strengthening process

is

initial

capable of

^[

it;

^ u,

i,

thus,

and ^g r have the guna-

^"^

cur,

^tTTfa

cordyati ;

c(^ij(7f veddyati ; but iffe pld, lfl\gtjfrT piddyati.
2.

A

\nTTfH

final

vowel

dhdrdyati.

has

the

rreWfa'-strengthening

Before "^S^aya, T£di and

ay and ^TTW dv respectively; thus, *ft

bin,

njn"

;

thus,

au become

HfmZfflf bhaydyati ;

bhu, ^TT^SlfTT bhavdyati.
145.

3.

Medial or

initial

^!J

a

a metrically light syllable

in

sometimes lengthened, and sometimes remains unchanged;

^J^

ksal,

caus.

^M"*lffT

Jcsdldyati;

but

^T^

jan,

caus.

is

thus,

WRjfrf

jandyati.

an

146.

The

147.

Rales of euphonic combination.

initial

inflection is the usual

one of a-stems.
In external combination

sonant of whatever class (even a vowel or semivowel or

nasal) requires the conversion of a preceding final surd to a sonant.

43

Lesson VII.

Final <^

148.

1.

r.

^

Final

becomes

t

W d,

sonant, except the palatals, the nasals,

and

meghat atra becomes

atra;

5R^T7^ meghdd

*f

gT^fffT pdpdd

4^1^

thus,

M M
I

1

"^T^

T^f^T pdpdt

cf^

becomes trrqT-

raksati or >J753|'f?r bhramyati or ^ftHl^fTT gopdyati

raksati or

£~-><x-

before any initial

/:

pdpdd bhramyati or M M IsTt MT~

MIlfl^T+trfrT

I

Vffl pdpdd gopdyati.
149.

or *f
H?

ch,

2.

^

Final c^

^

j before

becomes

t is

+(V1|^f

assimilated to an

word

the next

in

I

j,

thus

;

and

W

meghdc ca;

*jy |T3JHH meghdj jalam;

Before

3.

before ^T

I: e. g.,

^tefc|<^

XJTXn?^

before

*mid

s

^ SSl

x^ c and

^ meghdt

ca

meghat jalam becomes

5f^f*^

"i\i%\<\^

tE^

lingual, y- v

palatal,

c

papdt lokdt

becomes

lokdt.

papal
150

I

initial

becomes

it

T\ c then becomes

initial

^ ch;

^T

c,

thus,

final

<^

t

^

becomes

c,

t*

and the

<*

HMIc^ !£% nrpat catruh becomes

c

C-¥ch
,rch

^1||t^^; nrpdc chatruh.
151.

4.

Before

nasals

initial

becomes «^n:

t
?(_

"Rlf?f gvhat nayati becomes OTTT?Rlf?V gfhan nuyati.
into

7d

is

also permitted,

thus, *J^T?^

But the change

though hardly used; thus, J|^|<j<|fH

grhdd nayati.

Vocabulary

Verbs

rT^T

:

^\"HH kathaya (denom.
kathdyati) relate,

"^f

stem



tell,

ksal (ksdldyati) wash.

Tp^jf ganaya (denom.

— gandyati)

number, count.

f*

VII.

tul (toldyati)

(l^tad (tdddyati)

strike, beat.

da-

+

^HT ni

+ a

(andyati) bring.

Trfe ptd (plddyati) torment, vex.

puj (pujdyati) honor.
,

steal.



nddyati) punish.
•ft

Till

^1^ cur (cordyati)

weigh.

l^Zf dandaya (denom.

devils)

JJpr (pdrdyati) overcome.; prevail.

.

^"^^L

V

44

Lesson VII. VIII.

Subst.:
m., father.

bH3t janaka,

^Xn

rupaka,

«f|cfi

loka,

stick ; punishment.
^Tf5 danda,m.,
trail

n., merit.

punya,

T5^f phala,

ra]^|

n., fruit;

rdmdyana,

3Rn$

a noted

n.,

swyarna,

stena, m., thief.

^

iva as, like (postpos.).

Exercise

VII.

^^

*

^t| w^t prqfrcqfft iqi

wrt Tqf^

m

1

1

^mifui

«nft

ww

i$

1

^^rf^i^iTW^^^^TTJrRiw^Rm:

winfd

^qrff ^far:

wash

Thieves

reward

teacher
them.
ioteers

of sin

2

18.

.

19.
1

1

3

Ye

Merit

strike
5

2

king pierces

4

4

The

16.

.

The

3

protects
the horses

the thief

3

2

3

money

father

scholars

both bring

1

flrqtqrnwrfmi

^^

yrrowri
c f^if
i

iirfor-

i

11

the people's

2

17.

.

9?

11

steal

mouths

their
4

saint.

n., gold.

©•>

Adverb:

3

people

pi.).

~^r\ suta, m., driver, charioteer.

%5f

14.

world,

,

TSV$ sddhu, m.. holy man,
reward.

poem.

%?r.

and

(sing,

gold-piece.

n.,

m.

1

fruits

1

honor

1

with sticks

with a spear

The two boys

15.

.

5

his

sons

3
.

2

(dat.) the
4

and 5 reverence

3

your hands

in

from misfortune
2

3

tells

2

2

20.

(abl).

21.

their

and 5 count

In anger

1

The

4

char-

(abl) the

4
.

Lesson VIII.
152.

Verbs, a- conjugation.

present indicative middle of verbs
as follows:

Present Indicative Middle.

whose stems end

in

a

The

is inflected

45

Lesson VIII.
Dual.

Singular.
1.



2.

^ST% vddase

3.

<Jd"rl

n#

for

vdde

153.

rcFV^

154.

middle

of the 3rd

dropped.

With verbs

pi. is

properly

before the

t|J B):

aw^' in

^^^ ethe

and

XJTf

TJ

ete

*>

^r%

'he sacrifices

ydjate

(cf.

f^T

are hard to explain.

performed for the benefit of the

is

actor himself; thus, ^JWfjf ydjati 'he sacrifices' (for

^J^%

ante

of the 1st sing, the

inflected in both voices, the chief force of the

that the action

is this,

33^q vddadhve
^rf^ vddante

vddete

^^n

The ending

.stem-final is

1^TO% vdddmahe

vdddvahe

^179 vddethe

vddate

Tlrf^fT

Plural.

But

himself.

for

some one

many

else);

verbs

are

conjugated only in the middle, like the Latin and Greek deponents.
155.

The verb

J{ mr, 'die',

makes fjytjd mriydte

in the pres-

ent; and 5T«^ jan, 'give birth', substitutes as present mid. 9TRra
jayate, 'be born'.
156.

Combination of

final

either or both of

vowels,

iti

1.

:

^%

or

\% + ^ %

or

\% — \ ?;

becomes ?T^£r?Vf?T gacchati

= ^i u;

e.

initial

2.

'ti.

e. g.

simple i*~i
?<

§ 105.

^T^f^T ^f?T gacchati

^Mor^M+^Mor^fM

^TTV ^HHWC sddhu uktam becomes

g.

Two

vowels.

For the a-vowels, see above,

the corresponding long vowel.

Thus

and

them short or long, coalesce and form

Q y JRIf^
|

sadhu

''ktam*.
157.

The

/-vowels, the u- vowels, and

^Jr, before a dissimilar

vowel or diphthong, are regularly converted each into
corresponding semivowel,
tisthati

Hl^l madhv
And

atra;

I

«RI^ nady
^JTT

theoretically

no occurrence.

/

^

v or

\r.

own

Thus, KlTTm ^S(%

atra becomes ffRTftPI tisthaty atra (four syllables); •fiJT'^r^

nadl atra becomes

*

or

Jly

its

^^
3.

atra;

kartr iha

^S

r

+

*ra

^SC^ rnadhu atra

becomes

^gr=

Zfff^ug

becomes

kartr iha.

"^f. but probably

this

has

y^^^y
&*-•*
'

46

Lesson VIII.
Final

158.

&oe-z,

*a.''

and

TJ e

comes ^?f $^ wane

By

6/fdno 'Jra.

W Represents

"

7>
,"

^*-*ay
+ h-0

final

The

159.

'fra;

far the

^

final

^T

Thus,

^J^ ^cme

^5^ Marco afra becomes

){|«ft

commonest case of

^1

^

aw, ^1«|

^

or

<

a y, an ^
dv.
-

•f^J«ay/a;

^fif-

^ w-element

Thus,

y

<

*+/ ->>A.+i
-

,

^^.^J

where

of a

orrHp,

diphthong

is

changed

ift'

sM/=

more
161.

fore

^SCt o

ay;

becomes

iti);

*?«««

*TT«ft

frequent.

av

becomes

is in

gen-

^%

^m

Thus,

(through the intermediate stage

to'

Tf^

bhdno

becomes 3JTT Tf?f bhdna

iti

The

iti).

See also §

case of final T£

e is

Such are

WTW W3

sddhu atra; Xfi%

only, vowel of an interjection

;

^1

1.

^l, ^f

phale atra.

f \*%

thus,

far

u,

and

T£ e as

arthaya (denom.

The

he indra, *%

final,

^t

<7*'

r*

or

he ague.

spring up (mother in loc).

:



art/id-

yate) ask for (w. two accus.).
Iks (iksate) see, behold.

W*{ kamp

2.

dual

^

VIII.

Vocabulary

Verbs (deponents)

^

by

164.

Certain final vowels maintain themselves unchanged be-

any following vowel.

"^HN

aQ d
->

bhava ; so •T-^r^I nai-aya yields

endings, both of declension and of conjugation; thus, f^T^"
iha,

TJ e

Thus,

tJT^

bhdu-aya yields VTT^!? bhdv-aya.

^ft-^^pjr

(through *TT«rfaf7T bhdnav

the
j

^SIT?!

in internal combination, ^-"^f ne-a

becomes ^*T ^fTT

<t«rfqf7T vanay

it

before any vowel or

dropped; and the resulting hiatus remains.

vflrne

S^f

is

In external combination, the resulting semivowel

|60.

eral

iti

\ di,

^ bho-a becomes ^^

STRT3 ndy-aya and
cxtcrnd owi).

be-

WTt

^ft o

final

diphthong, except when the rule of § 158 would apply.

becomes

initial

otfra

a* (see §118).

corresponding semivowel T( y

to its

before an

remain unchanged

"^ft o

short "^ a, but the "% a disappears.

(kdmpate) tremble.

^T5^ jan (J ay ate) be born,

arise,

J^f bhas

mr

T(

(bhdsate) speak.

frjrucT)

(mriyate) die.

for (w. dat.).
Ttf{yat(ydtate) strive

^V

yudh

instr.

(yudhyate)

fight

of accompaniment).

(w.

47

Lesson VIII.

^W

+

rabh

5^^ ruc(rocate)

kalydna,

advantage

n.,

dvija, m.,

IJf^f

dcijati, m.,

(homo).

forest.

wave.

pos£ra,n., science; text-book.

man

of the fourth

caste.

Aryan.
;

man

in.,

woods,

n.,

Tjj^ pudra, m.,

Aryan.

;

Aito, n.,

advantage.

dhdirya, n., steadfastness.

Adverb:

beast,
ip*J />apw, m.,

^f

manusya,

fc|«Jif vinaya, m., obedience.

dharma, m., righ' law virtue. f^TT

^p$

(senate) serve, honor.

cfVf^" vici, m.,

taru, m., tree,

f^^TTf^
VJlf

^f^ sev

^TT uana,
;

salvation.

tf^

|

^JyT yajna, m., sacrifice.

^f^f^l udyoga, m., diligence.

f^f

(ciksate) learn.

¥Mm

Subst.:

H*\tl anartha, m., misfortune.

<4i^||(!j

(vdndate) greet, honor.

piles

T£% sah (sdhate) endure.

please (dat., gen.).

fabh (Jdbhate) receive, take.

wfH

^•^ vand
fjr^T

^JJ a (drdbliote) take

hold on, begin.

«T

na, not.

bala, n., strength, might.

Exercise

^rt *rnre *
i

^tto
wtft

^

i

i

i

^n Tnf^fwt^R^fr

t^wt:

t^

^t*t:

(abi.)

qo

i

Tjr^t ^tpsit: %*r#t

W?r

w$

%*r%

II

17.

VIII.

*rra

i

i

i

3

i

i

ht#

^% ^ft *wi ^ ^fWi«f
vfci v*l *m^ ^t?i w
i

<r

<te

&fcrfi

i

^

^#

i

xr%

9$
The two houses4 yonder

i

i

^^
¥^r

*nwtf%scT:

TT^n^r^r

wf%

I

(§ iei)

i

<w

i

i

^fw

i

q

i

«nrt:

^

,

w$t

II

^frf, -thus', is very

tremble

commonly used

following the words quoted.

6

3
by the power

(instr.)

as a particle of quotation,

48

Lesson VIII. IX.
1

of the ocean's
19.

"We

strive
6

speak

(Xf^)
for

food

waves 2
3

the

teachers

here

2
.

money

23.
2

Fruits

? 25.

4
.

22.

1

Now

3

please
1

5

In

21.

(accus.).

5

fighting with bears

father

the advantage

after

3

The

18.

.

.

20.

the

3

beholds

2

The

of

the two seers

2
.

2

2

ask

begin

4

yonder
serve

4

Feminines

elephants

Whence 1 do ye

%TT

4
1

are

two Aryans 1

the

the sacrifice

in ^n" a, declined like

thus

3

receive

8
.

Lesson IX.
162.

face.'

their father

2

24.
4

1

the scholars ;"

1

The two Qudras 3
the children

son's

his

1

children

forest

4

send, 'army.

3

49

Lesson IX.

becomes ^g":

prohibitive particle TOT,

An

166.

initial

^

becomes TO^

thus, TO^l $|<||

of a root generally becomes TO

verbal prefix containing ^, either original or representing
as

^RT?C 'between',

f^,

The following

167.

'after, along,
TO^J 'to,

l?TX

etc.

Thus, jpprf*>

after a

^;

TL^y

">>

such

f*n!!TOfiT.

prefixes are often used before verbs:

TOT

rVefue

toward'; TO^I 'down, off'; ^3^ 'up, up forth or out';

toward'; fsf'down;

in,

into'; f^TTO. 'out, forth';

a distance, away'; tJTT 'round about, around';

TJ

HXj

'to

icef

-

'forward, forth';
,r.S

-

TOTO 'along with, completely.'

pari'
pro.

Vocabulary

Actire Verbs:
3JTO

+

TO^"

f^J

(avagdcchati)

under-

stand.

H+

introduce,

(upandyati)

consecrate.

+

t

T^CT

quered

(pardjdyate)
(rarely

w.

be

act.

consense:

conquer).

TOTO (avatdrati) descend.

+ ^f

*ft

IX.

*->

~

Xf%

+

J(

(prapddyate)

flee for re-

fuge (ace.) to (ace. of person).
f*?q(bhiksate) beg, get by begging.

Tff^(parindyati) lead about;

(denom.

Sra|l|

— mrgdyate)

hunt

for, seek.

marry.
^<^

+

^^

TO^

+

TO?T (avardhati) descend.

W<^ (vdrtate)

(utpdtati) fly up.

exist,

subsist,

be,

become.

Hl'sw«0Myd'

"mi
Deponents:
3TTO.

+

^C

Subst.

X^

t't

(•*•

**

a ^rM

j

ipfj gaiigd

:

m., arrow.

TOTOT

come

(saingdcchate)

together, meet.

(cdbhate) be brilliant, shinej

be eminent.

t-SU.

daughter, maiden.

Perry, Sanskrit Primer.

n^TOT

m

-i

{.,

n.pr., the

householder,

family.

ffdt&ffi&S

Ganges.
head of

50

Lesson IX.
shade.

^"PETT

f.,

1HTP1

m

^"^T![ n., protection.
t-*

nom.

«?

pr.,

Prayaga

(a

Allahabad).

city,

f.,

*fTGrj

f.,

^*{

wife,

woman.

f.,

alms.

^rjTTT

f-)

n.pr.,

heart.

n.,

f.

"spm,

Yamuna

(a river,

©tSTT,

TRTfT-

f-

f^ETT

^f^ together with (postpos.

knowledge, learning.

f-j

m

-

HlfSrT suddenly, quickly.

hunter.

5

Exercise

rqTff^T

I

*

I

<«ii»ui<ul inre^

^T

WW[ Trref t^T^

f^irh-ti

wrf

The two

Yamuna3

.

17.

^TT

TW

$

i

i

f**w*n ttt^t fsr^ft

^^

fT^T

scholars
4
.

16.

I

$

^Pl *TH^

^t Tr^T^faT

the householders

IX.

f^J JpTCTnT ^^?:

*raf

ag^

15.

6

1

beg

t

<^*=i

i

I

fT^

«=
I

*%

I

5*^1^1

much 2 alms 3 from

At Prayaga

1

the

2

Ganges

Bad 1 men 2 do not4 reach 5

(*T*I

)

the wives

*

the kings

4

3

fight

with arrows

2

and 6 conquer

"Birds of a feather flock together".

4

heaven

,

,

i

(§«64)

unites

4

1

*rft-

^

i

^

fwr *ptw Twng

3
Visnu 1 to-day Civa 2 marries 7 Gaiiga 6 Harps daughter

battle

w.

,

insir.).

m., bird.

fa^J
^TTO

Adv.:

street.

f.,

much, abundant;

many.

pl.

n., battle.

m.,

black.

^TT,'

Os.

<*HJ

hrda.y«-

©^jt> bad, wicked.

f.

UTTj,

the Jumna).
"^TJf

tj£»

Adj.:

speech, language.

fir^T

twilight.

f.,

m., heaven.

*cf3J

^T?T n., fear.

ifj^T

WW[

7

5
.

their

5

of

with the
3
.

19.

18.

O

In the

enemies

5
.

51

Lesson IX. X.

Here

'20.

horses

2

5

in the street

fear

3

of the wicked

5

two

of the village

sacrifice

Hari 3

for

2

1

2

hunters

the seers

(loc. du.)

twilight

We

fice

4

The seer's two sons are eminent

24. In the street
25.

two kings 1 dismount 6 from
3

1

At

23.

the
2

21.

.

From

22.

3

1

2

4

2

(§ 13, 3) reverence

the teacher

3

(instr.).
5

fly

up

the gods
4

5
and the scholar meet

1

to the

learning

two birds 4

(abl.)

black

their
1

in

gods for ourselves;

we do

not

4

.

3
.

6
.

sacri-

.

Lesson X.

stem,

inflected

meaning, and
to

make a

A

Passive Inflection.

Verbs.

168.

with middle endings,
is

formed from

all

certain

any reference

roots for which there

is

occasion

an accented Jf yd added

to the classes according to

the active and middle forms are made.

The

which

inflection is precisely
*v

•v

like that of other a-stems.

form of present-

used only with a passive

Its sign is

passive conjugation.

to the root, without

is

*""-

Thus, 7FQ tanye, r\m^( tanydse, rRTrT

tanydte, etc.

Outside the present-system middle forms

169.

a passive sense; but there
the 3rd

The form

in

for the aor. pass, in

of root to which the passive-sign

is

appended

Thus a penultimate nasal is dropped; and
abbreviations which are made in the weak forms of the

usually a

certain

a special form

be used

sing.

170.
is

is

may

perfect,

weak

or in

one.

the past passive participle, are found also in the

passive present-system.

171.

becomes

In the roots

^

u

§ 102), ^pSHJ.

E.

g.

^W. «^.

in the pres.

;

TTCI:

^t^,

^f^

,

q^,

pass. tR^TT; from

^*J,

^"^, and ^1^, the

^

thus, "^^fl, >4U|ri;

Similarly, ^J^T

*TU^ and ^Pffi;

from

makes

^stjfl,

makes f^ffi.

va

^tild (see note to

and 1X\ and TJ^ make ya,

^

u

T tV ^ ¥•

52
\Oo+

channel

Lesson X.

-tot-

p*~ts/ve CenJ.

Final

^

and

Final

^B

is

172.

h-^n
h

-*>Zr

173.

but

in

general changed to fT> thus, ^, f?Rint;

to %"^,
'

iftftfi;

$,

^JfajTT; TT>

The

of roots

"^n"

wWf

other roots in
175.

a labial

if

;

VT,

form

But

is

^.

'

roots <f^ and

their passive

usually form

Hiari^

inflection,

by adding

H

less

transitive

sleeps';

«?T,

'

from

and denominatives

'-c^ifr)

'is

in

"^J,

denominative
stolen';

IfWTl

passive construction, with the logical subject

and intransitive verbs.

VVTO

common

with transitive verbs

so the impersonal passive construction,

reached by the man';

is

thus,

and so some

their passives

to the causative or

in the instrumental, is particularly

and not

^;

'.

The personal

177.

f,

But rTHJd and 1&&1 occur.

dl*H-

Verbs of causative

counted

"^

^TT; thus, H,

MR makes WT*Rh

stem after "^Jf has been dropped; thus,
'

to

letter precede,

usually changed to

is

VW^-

parallel roots in ^n"; thus,
176.

the natives write with

strew', ^t$ft; but 9, xHjft.

Final

'74.

or,

takes guna; thus, ^H, 4£J«H-

it

which

roots in "variable r",

change ^J

fi^Z

of roots are generally lengthened; thus,

preceded by two consonants

if

The

^

'it is

Thus,

-4||J|44|?(

heard',

i.

e.

•f^lJJ'

^W%

'

Heaven

'one comes hither'; WQfQ 'one

'they say'.

instrumental subject of such a construction
strumental; thus, {Jtjqjfi^QJI

(tpff

;

both with

^31% 'Rama

The
is

predicate to the

of course also in-

lives as a seer'.

Vocabulary X.
Verbs, with passives:

W

(p. kriydte)

TfW(p.grhydte)take, receive, seize.

make, do, perform. TTT (ddgati;

p. dagydte) bite.

*sSH[khdnati; p. khaydte,khanydte) 2Z"T (dydti; p. dlydte) cut.

£\<4

dig.

lfl(gdyati;

p. giydte) sing.

(dlvyati; p. dlvydte) play.

l^ff (p. dhiydte) put, place.

53

Lesson X.

<^ (vdpati; p. upydte) sow, scatter.

(dhdyati; p. dhlydte) suck.

2\sTT

SJHJ1 (p. fisydte) rule; punish.

YE[\ (dhyayati ; p. dhydydte) think,

?T (p. qruydte) hear.

ponder.
1TJT (p. plydle) drink.
Ill

(Hindu

^**J

(p.

TJ; p.

^f

purydte)

badhydte) bind

;

entangle

l^T

;

catch.

ITT

(p-

mly ate) measure.

(p.

ucydte) speak.

Subst.
f.,

|

TffTUT

f-,

^ftrT n.,

*T or

+

abandon, give up;

57 (hvdyati;

^TT

HTT m

:

command. &\^&J

;

TilS

ifou* *

TT^rr

song.

f-,

<Ja*J n.,

^J

m., pot, vessel.

^HT

n.,

flTT

melted butter; ghee.

burden. */&*

m., servant.

IffOH

wood.

-5

p. huydte) call.

summon.

call,

m., beggar, ascetic.

f*f^

hope.

efiTH n., fagot

^TRT

supydte) sleep.

(p.

(p. hlydte)

neglect.

^^

3 It]

(p. stuydte) praise.

^T^

fill.

garland.

kingdom.

m., child.

^JH m-, snake.

n-, grain.

Adj.:

XTnj m., noose, cord, snare.

f%^fa,

f.

0,

?rT,

obedient.

Exercise X.

V

^^ ^T
^t ^5^

^Effi

i

^t§t ^wt:

c

i

|

$

|

*n|<rr

fijsRf

^?r%f *rer *fftnt

fafTR Ml^4w(ni

i

i

<\§

f^i

<te
i

i

ijjf^rer

hhji:

**5fiir

|

8

I

^I^TT T«T%

*rHNr f*r^ft ^to%

^T^rri *nft ^TgftgH

tt^t

f^m

^xjj-

i

q^>

i

i

M

I

o.

i

^m

i

|

i

^w

54

Lesson X.

XL

(Use passive constructions throughout.)

Grain

20.

ned

by

3

(use ^5tj

Rama
1

antly
25.

2

3

23.

.

is

scattered

3

by the maidens

)

Visnu

1

drinks

(«^j*t) one sleeps

1
Both seers

27.

(loc).

The

sacrifice

scholar

1

sown

2

26.

.

31.

32.

fields

1

The

king's

The man

1
.

3

1

The

neglects
their

from

so

';
1

sets

2

4

1

is

praised

24. 'Pleas-

.

4

5

the people".

say

2
3
hopes on his child

command 2

2

.

The

28.

Grain

29.

(nom.).

with dice

play

4

1

2

hand

his

2

text-book

5

Hari

Again

the teacher's

are received

in the field

digs

3

Garlands 1 are twi-

21.

.

2

father

They

30.

1

22.

.

water

4

commands 2

2

the shade

3

3

the

in

4

in

two scholars think about
3

for the birds

2

is

1

(impers. pass.).

3
by the obedient servants

4
.

2
.

Lesson XI.
The

Imperfect Active, a- conj ligation.

Verbs.

178.

formed from the pre^nt-stem by prefixing the augment

imperfect

^f,

is

and adding

a set of secondary endings.
If the

179.

_

with
or

to

it

X or
180.

TI

present-stem begin with a vowel, the augment unites

form always the crddhi-vowe\, not the guna: thus^-r^
- ^TTT=
+
+ ^ or ^f = ^jt;
"5;

If

preposition and verb, as in

jgM H,
181.

i.

^T?

e.

The

+

2.

3-

-*H^*i

;

f^Mfc

thus,

from

^JT?-«ft,

Dual.

pm

is?

Plural.

tivac

^SR^T^

dvadhs

dvadLtam
^STW^fTt
WTH dvadatam

The

impf.-stem

impf.-stem ^JVf^r.

inflection in the active is as follows:

^R^.
"SR^ dvadtrt.
182.

Greek

^ + «W5

Sing.
1.

^

^

^

a preposition be prefixed, the augment comes between

imperfect

dfackjm.

*RR[T*T

^R^

is

the tense of narration

dvad

"^R^t
;

it

dv adjhn^

expresses past

time simply, without any further implication.
183.

Polysyllabic Feminines in

$"

i.

_

p,ma_

^R«£cl dvadfita

declined like ?T^L 'river.'

!c(ysy

\\a\tic

^^

,

rJwCr

Dual.

Sing.

N.

•T?\ nadi

A.

*\d\l{ nadtm

I.

«f<j

•T^f

Ab

•T^n^C nadyas

nadijd

•T^l^l

•RJ?^ nadyas

•f3lf^^

nadlbhydm'

1*1.

nadydi

55

,

Plural.

Iran nadydu

D.

(

XL

Lesson

Y*VAiv\yy\es

nadibhis

•Tcffaf^ nadibhyat

T)

•ft

O.

•1^1*1IH nadlndm
•T^JTt n ^dydm

L.

»

r>

•fi^Cf

nadisi
l.SU

V.

Final nasals.

184.

The

q/Yer a sfor£ vowel, are

nasals

^.

HI

,

and

doubled before any

«^,

occurring as finals

initial

vowel: thus,

t£-

"firet ^5R becomes ^rf?r?9%

Vocabulary

qjf^

TJI^f

+

fsfTl

Verbs:

+

XI.

+ ^XJ

(avakrntdti) cut off or

T[

(pravi^dti) enter.

seat oneself.

H + "^TT (dhdrati,

down.

-te) fetch,

bring.

TfS (pdthati) recite, read.

xjj^7

Snbst.:

^TSjm., purpose; meaning; wealth. XT^t
I

^«£

m., worn, pr., the god Indra.
f.,

^•j^JUfj

7*om. j?r., the

^J«SI m., literary

Ql^ln)

^|+J|

f-i

rfcft f,

^TTt
ITT^

£j

work, book.

mother.

f-j

wife.

earth

;

na., priest,

m-j

ground.

Brahman,

fish.

IMl f, cistern.

^T^JT f, council, meeting.

%«n

f-,

^jft^T n.,

city.

woman,

irtjsj
«|

goddess, queen.

f-,

book (manuscript).

n..

^TI|JW

female slave, servant,

f-?

TT^^j

mH!|41

poem.

n.,

daughter.

goddess TJ^ m., flood, high water.

Indranl.

^iT^

wife, consort.

f.,

f.,

army.

song of praise.

7r

n.

}

)

*m
nn

Lesson XI. XII.

56

Exercise XI.

HMfd^JlO *H<JI^«J<t

^q^fguu

:

^

i

itt 4ihi^^

When 1

14.

then

ye were (*HT)

Yamuna 3

and*

it is

a song of praise

3

6

in misfortune

6

(^effi) high- water

Rama

about

5

16.

.

2

anger

(abl.)

20.

The two

21.

Ye

seer

2

O

17.

(gen.).

6

servants

6

praised

and

jewels

teacher

2

5

brought

1

seers

IndranI*, Indra's

5

?

precious

scholar

5

2

why

,

stones*.

with

2

consort

,

with hymns

sang*

do ye

19.

his

the trees with the axe
3

3

The q ueen's 1

18.

water* from the cistern

wood 3 from
2

protection** (ace),

5

struck* the

1

cut off* (imp/.)

1

3

brought

the

I

^rar

i

The two women 1

4

6

1

^

1
In the two rivers Ganga*

15.

.

both sacrifice to the goddesses with melted butter

women-servants

c

i

I

^r far^t f^^ ^TOJnram <t^t§ tt^t-

i

ye besought (ITRT) the kingf for

7

5

WRIT ^i7^H«MM4«l

liTC

I

^tot TWTf wrtoi«mih

i

<n

i

S

I

3

1
.

In

hand 3

in pots
22.

.

2
.

The

5
.

Lesson XII.
185.

Feminine Substantives

the paradigms on the next page.

in

^

i

and

The two

complete parallelism: where the one shows

shows respectively

u,

v,

o,

or av ;

cf.

^3

u are declined as in

series of forms exhibit
t,

§§ 50,

y, e,

or ay, the other

51.

In the D., Ab.-

G., and L. sing., these stems sometimes follow
-yds,

-yam; dhenvdi,
186.

•<<£)

;

thus matydi,

-vds, -vdm.

Feminities in ^[

i

and

^u

:

?rf7T 'opinion'; \I|«T 'cow'.

57

Lesson XII.
Dual.

Sing.

N.

^TfcRi; matte

A.

JTftm. matim

I.

TOT

D.

f?nt mataye

Ab.

fflfl

VT^^

Plural.

?Tfft matt

'F

TrT^R^ matayas





if^lHTRt matibhydm

)

*Tf7W?^ matibhyas



(<«<*ty««')„

i-/* s

mates



»

»



HlffaTt matlnam
L.
V.

-

^fft wwtfaw
jfr[

ty**") s

N.

V*!^. Menus

A.

^1

I.

^J^TT dhenva

D.

VT%

Ab.

V*fftt dfonos

G.

VT

dhenu

\[«fe(f(

VT^

dhenum

jl

\piTOn^ dhenubhydm

dhenave

C-\fti]





(-v^s)





"

»

»

L.

^fM^flau

V.

^f^t
187.

JjfrTM

s

matim

mate

T$*ffi&{^ dhenubhis

\f«pjF^ dhenubhyas
n

n

%j<l*IIH dhenunam

^NfaC. Menvos

(-v*"}

dhenavas

dhenus

VHJ



dhenum

rf/<«MO

Adjectives in ^[

minine like 3Tf?f and

\j«T.

i

and

"^ «

are often inflected in the fe-

But adjectives

in

^

u preceded by one

consonant often form a derivative feminine stem by adding

Thus, ^p" 'much', N. masc. «nn^,
m. 5\H. £ T^T,

u-

T5-

This fem.

Vocabulary

m

Verbs:
(kdlpate)

f.

is

or conduce to

(10.

tfa£.).

n.

^^;

*J?X

then declined like

^

7.

'heavy',
«T«^-

XII.

f^TTT

be in order; tend

^jft,

+

~*&Q (upadicdti) teach, in-

struct.

2fcH* (vinddti, vinddte) acquire.

58

Lesson XII.

«

Subst. :

I^f^iT

cfiT^T n.,

poem.

zrfg

^f?f

glory.

^f^Ff

f-,

cowherd,

m.,

aftTj

f--

VfrT

f«)

birth; caste; kind.

CTfrT

^?T

^fjT

f^J

prudence, intelligence.

f.,

%dfi

f.,

«ffa,

f.

f.

gigr,

9jf7T

f.,

earth, ground, land.

v%& m.,

M

£"

frr:

i

f.,

n.,

3^

1

? ^T^rgt

t ^wrf

^rcr

*nra

Tffm

i

m

irsrMi^<iH.

*rf t

i

f«=

i

n <*8

17.

ground*.

i

^r*nf«N:

*i

II

S

II

i

i

i

o.

i

i

«i$

i

^c^r

fswnffai wrf<p$
Wrf% <r

^f^reft"

i

i

^ot«pwr^-

ii

Visnu 3

and 6 gives
.

~"

i

i

*$*Am wt^wt^

4

mukhu^

light.

srifT

i

i

city

°^^,

^VfS ^srrfa^w^^^f^T% ^XmNm^cjHt: $
^ ^^^srr ^f^^rrwr <*h^>
$

i

y^ri *nn*n *fhn *pti?r%
srr^pjn *j*3rr: noi iwi'^ ^raiB i«n wran

15.

f.

OTTO

^^Tff»?^f^rT ITTf*rTf*r^f*rT

Tnsn

i

mwFl

<rg

or

Exercise XII.

OpiA^ov-

r
8

1

o^TT, low.
o^rr, principal, first,

C ov4

£

^TT:

^%

law book.

jaw.

prosperity, blessing.

c{

holy writ.

m., sleep; dream.

*T"f7T f.,

*1

;

tradition;

Adj.:

*TTT m., part, piece.

1^

repose.

f-,

f.,

devotion, honor.

f.,

^

night.

f-,

^fTT%

tTTf^N' na„ prince.

*Tf^f

t,^*

m., ray; rein.

of character; ^rf?T f> hearing

decision

courage.

^

MiLKUKd.

gnat-

sRT m., wound. tfrA***'

guardian.

inffT

fty,

salvation, deliverance.
stick, staff,

f.,

TTN

shepherd;

f-,

t".,

Jjfrti

7

4

deliverance

The
18.

at the

rejoices

birds

By

the

1

5
.

16.

see

3

Men 3
the

2

power

devotion
of

2

(instr.)

many

hunter

2
,

of intelligence

1

castes

and
1

of the pious
2

dwelt
6

5

fly

up

5

1

(pi),
in the

from the

we overcame*

advers-

(

59

Lesson XII. XIII.
3

ity

19.

.

The cowherd 1 guards
1

and

intelligence

poem

1

tends

we bow

(^W

)

4

to the poet's

before

Civa

to the horse's

(imp/.) holy writ

cows

the

2

in

3

glory

(two datives).

The

23.

(ace).
3

jaws

wood 2

the

much* glory 5

ye acquire

2

2

3

6

diligence

3

4

2

3

reins

1

By
The

For prosperity

22.

1

are being fastened*

24. In the night

(loc).

20.

.

21.

.

we both read 3

1

2

-iN

.

•"
Lesson XIII.
188.

middle of verbs in a

^

as follows:

is

HP
The

Imperfect Middle.

Verbs, (/-conjugation.

r~ff ."?•-•«.

aiijVv

-./
<>(

»*&

f

imperfect
*»*

*iw.:wV|

{

*«*



Clftt^Att' receive- ta.ke^ rjeT
t

Dual.

Sing.

i.

^R

+

•**"

1.

d

2.

TOPTOTTOC dlabh athds

3.

<4H+(r| dlabhata

ff

^

dlabhe (a

°^T^ff

i)

pres. ind. mid.
ft<?V\0<ylM»fc

aU

,

Boot -words in

tsTftC

I.

f^RIT dhiyd

D.

f\J%

Abl.

ftPTSt

q* ^ac^rs}
/ are declined as follows:

«

TSftWYf^ dhlbhydm




»

»

d
J.y» ftRfftt

ft

-yi*

aVu'^'

ft

%

os

«

In the D., Ab. -Gen., and L. sing., and G.

sometimes follow
§ 185.

Observe

the stem -final

i

7

•frf

that

|

;

or>

4hl

the

wvi«ie«rst'<^<^\>

Plural.

f^RC.

dhiyas









d%e (~y5i)
d%«* 0« 3)

f^rf^T

U^f ana THT

f^Rft dhiyau

fSRHl c?%ow?

L.

c *-

Dual.

«*^Js

A.

G.

°H«fl dlabh antg.
"

dual,

f"

Sing.

N. V.

°*TFflf% dlabh amahi

5fsn$^ dlabh etham °lf^R^ dlabha dhvam

°5^<n^ dlabhetam

With Q^TP^ and UrilH °f tne

189.

Plural.

dlabh avahi

MTf^EI. dhlbhis

^^T^.
t^raTR:
^jfal
pi.,

dhlbhyas
»

»

d%aw

f-r«s»i)

^ifM
these stems

thus, dhiyai, dhiyas, dhiydm, dhlnam.

Cf.

where the case- ending begins with a vowel

is split

into iy.

60

Lesson XIII.

190.
<X^V\t _-

The following

a.pf- -

'against' (often with implied violence)

ni
r«.4"i —
pro

'back

<Kv\r\t

used with verbs:

additional prefixes are

'over, above, on'; ^rfq 'unto, close upon'*; ^rf*l 'to, unto',

^Tfa

to, against, in

Both

191.

return

'
;

f%

in verbal forms

f^f

;

and

'down,

nf^

into, in';

away, out'.

'apart,

in derivatives,

the final ^[ or

^

?o~t initial:

of a prefix ordinarily lingualizes the initial

prefixed; and, in a few cases, the

it is

T|

^

of a root to which

remains even after an

interposed ^J of augment or reduplication; thus, from ^J?

faMl^fd; ^TT

192.

The

fore initial

+

"^rfa,

final

^

pres.

^rfasfaffi, impf.

pass.

of prefixes in
thus,

^j, Tj^, T^, TJj;

from

Vocabulary

lim. + ^jfrT (atikr&mati,

-krdmate)

pass beyond or by, transgress.

«P^ + ^33
arise

VT +
•TOT

(ujjdyate)

from

+U

arise,

come

+

keep shut.

(vindcyati)

^H^.

arise

from

be-

XIII.

+ Tf^T (pratibhdsate) answer

(w. ace. of pers.).

m+J(

arise; rule.

-

»* 'chi^T*')

f^TO +T(fr{(pratisedati)hold back;
forbid.

disappear, %«T

+ f*f (nisev ate)

dwell; devote

oneself to; attend.
(

samndhyati)

gird; ^TT

+ ^Tfa

mount, stand above

or over; rule, govern.

equip.

^ + f^

II

(a literary work).
into existence.

perish.

•Tf

fsj,

be born, ^ff (racdyati) arrange, compose

(abl.).

^jflf cover,

+ fW

^^ and ^g^ becomes
V^+ f*TCj;, fatM'ifrt

WJ

Verbs:

+

pass. ^paj-

(nispddyate)

grow; ^«^ + JTf?T hinder

;

injure; offend.

(abl.).

Sometimes, with the verbs *T^ and \rr, abbreviated to "fa;
commonly used as a conjunction: 'also',

but in classical Skt. most
'

too

'.

A*";

pal

M't*c*le

Lesson XIII.

^T^TT

Subst.:

tSTT^T

t^T

f-i

permission, anujrv

m., god; lord.

qiiH m., love, desire.
cft|

^jf

n.,

dwelling.

3RT3

m

j^"

^T'
%<7,

Exercise

*

i

i

^IcM^dl+i

15.

*ftr
I

8

I

g^t f%ro

TO

modesty, bashfulness.

fW

o-^rr,

°"^, beautiful.

•.

°^TT

f-

f.

steadfast, brave.

5

o;

white.

?rr,

XIII.

^r f*f^f#r

i

&«*•) ^RTfa:

|

$
M

*The goddess of fortune was born from

As
WtCT.il

whole.

f.

f.

did ye hold your ears shut? (j)ass. constr.)

SN

creation.

f-j

f.,

^T?[,

^f^f m., sage; ascetic.

wt^tt

ocean.

rn.,

^<^,

(homo).

g reat kin g-

->

as

Adj.:

Tj^f in., n., lotus.

JTfTTTST

luck, fortune, riches;

f.,

^jf5

man

f.,

nom. pr., goddess of fortune.

understanding, insight.

rn.,

o~fc

^qfTI

•TTir m., destruction.

Q^Q

c k<xv-<i

desire, avarice.

reason, cause.

m., anger.

f.,

wagon^

ni.,

^"^T m.,

^ft

9TTCV n., net.

^

girdle.

f-,

*ft^ m., infatuation.

T^l

<*Mt^ m., dove.

^tWT

61

17.

the principal euphonic rules have

i

|

Tnt^^rrwt ir%
f^Rft ^%*T

the ocean.

*JW

16.

Why

"The Qudras spoke

now

been stated and

Lesson XIII. XIV.

62
the language of the

Aryans":

Brahmans.

its

•4

18.

By

19.

The

i

t~

teacher girded"M>oth hoys with the girdle.

^3

Whence

±

I

did ye get (<5W

)

the white

was

ruled by the greafking.
1%
took refuge with the king (JT-T*«f).
earth

posed by Visnu.

25.

The milk

23.

The whole

22.

For prosperity

Two

we

(dat.)

'

*.

24.

law-books were com-

cow

is

drunk by both

children.

Lesson XIV.
193.

Verbs, a- conjugation.

inflection of this

mode

is

Present Imperative Active.

Dual.

Plural.

1>

^d'lfa vdddni

SRTTO vdddva

2.

^»" vdda

c|ddH. vddatam

3.

194.

cj^'fi

vddatu

The

The

as follows:

Sing.

vddama

~^d\*\

vddatdm

<4<2dlH.

e|«^r1

vddata

ej<J«ri

vddantu

three first persons are properly subjunctive forms,

and accordingly often express a wish or future action.
195.

The second and

oftenest a

third persons of the imperative express

command; sometimes

negative used with the imv.
196.
is

A

is J{J-

wish or future action.

a

rare imv. form, either 2nd or 3rd pers. sing, (or plur.),

made with

the ending rfHT.; thus,

VMdlcl-

Its

a posterior or future imv. (like the Latin forms in
197.

Root-words in

exemplified

The

*1

\*

in*

^3? S, inflected

like

value
to

is

and

Mf., 'earth

that of
tote).

1
.

the exercises, no further .indication need be made,

except in special instances, of the position of the words in the
Sanskrit.

\

}

>

cows?

of the black

When

20.

was offended against.

the scholar's modesty disappeared, then the law
21.

pass.) the

(impers.

dove was freed from the

the

4

1

net.

thus answered

cleverness



63

Lesson XIV.

r

.

u
Dual.

Sing.

^^

NV.

^;

A.
I.

}pm. bhuvam
M^T Mwwa

D.

*T%

Ab.

^^^(.

g.
L.

6Afis



9^n^

JAttwe b>*iA<sX;

r>

bhuvas
»

*rf*T 6Aut7

•>





fl

§§

thus,

*p?r^ bhubhyas

TOTTOt bhuvam

hhuvos

are &M.vu



sing.,

bhuvdi,

hhunZ.™

and G.
bhuvas,

pi.,

these stems some-

bhuvam,

bhunam.

inflected

like

Cf.

185, 189.
198.

4

«T<J^;

n

n

*TfHTT bhubkis

bhubhyam



In the D., Ab.-G., and L.
times follow

*T^TT bhuvas





^cm.

bhltvXrn

Plural.

bhuvdu

woman

Polysyllabic
'.

Feminines in

^3T

«*,

^|

f.,

64

Lesson XIV.

^ffH

Subst.:
"^rf?Tf^T m., guest.

^•HT

^jj^T

untruth.

n.,

-4(1

4H
f.

5fgf

-->

command,

spoon,

sacrificial

TTWT

f->

^T*{

l° n g (°f time).

^1*1*^

far, afar.

earth, ground.

ornament.

eyebrow.

f.,

'

s

3^r

f.,

f.,

crooked, bent.

%, beautiful.

creature; subject.

?J

^U

f.

~Mm$

n.,

%f?

highest; other,

°"^rT,

^•^ <,

lower; other.

lecture, lesson.

9TC1Q
f.,

o^SIT,

°tSTT,

f.

^sjf,

esp.

f.

Adv.:

Q3-5

f.,

daughter-in-law.

f.

TJX\

spoon.

VTS

W

f->

^?R^,

prescript on.
i

n., seat, chair.
,

song of praise; praise.

Adj.:

3PSTTO Q1m study; recitation

^T^ST m

f.,

woman,

I

founder, underneath (gen.).

?JT prohibitive particle, like
^t>j,

^T

wife.

Latin

(postpos.) or.

£MH

altar.

Greek

ne.

near by.

mother-in-law.

Exercise XIV.

%?|

'q

cf?

f*T

SS

1

I

fr<HMH

15.

R

I

*p^tf

% ^V TRU ^HTPRI

wftTWlW
constr.).

I

^WTT

The women
16.

II

S8

I

(gen.) ifeft

«R

I

Wgj

^% ^7*

^ct f?TCf?T

I

I

3

S3.

I

I

II

sing the praises (singular) of Indrani (pass,

"Study ye holy writ and

the sciences,

speak the

Lesson XIV. XV.

rite

honor your teachers": thus 1

truth,

2

text-books
jects

for scholars

coachman

is

is

the prescription

Let kings protect

17.

(gen.).

and punish the wicked: thus

O women

18.

4

65

strike or torment the

horses.

us with two spoons drop water on the altar.
dice for
23.

money"
let

"To-day

Brahman.

24.

initiate

19.

my

(imv.)

Let the men dig a

t

Let not the

the queen.

22.

Let

21.

"Let us play with

spoke the two warriors

thus

(instr.):

me

sub-

"Bring the jewels":

20.

commanded by

thus the two maid-servants were

of the

their

the law not offended (fTT pass.).

reverence your mothers-in-law.

,

3

(pass.).

two sons": thus says the

cistern.

Lesson XV.
present imperative middle

The

Present Imperative Middle.

Verbs, a- conjugation.

199.

inflected thus:

is

'

Dual.

Sing.
1.

*W

2.

*W^

3.

H+4dl*i labhatdm

labhdi

The

200.

<^*|

labhasva

first

1

Plural.

'

"5WTT% labhamahai

Idbhavahai

4^

c

*RT^TPF^ Idbhetham

vPfh3(1{ Idbhadhvam

^RtffTIT Idbhetdm

^WrTTt. Idbhantam

persons are really subjunctive forms.

The

in-

flection of the passive imv. is precisely similar; thus, ftfiq, fsfc*|^,

f^fi^rllH' etc

-

Nouns in ^J

201.

These stems,

r.

exhibit

consonant-declension,

in

stem-form: strong, middle, and weak.
etc., see Introd., § 87).

stem-final
to

Tr.

fall

is

^J

r,

which

like

their

many

inflection

belonging to the

a difference of

(For the cases called strong,

In the weak cases (except loc. sing.) the
in the

weakest cases

is

changed naturally

But as regards the strong cases, the stems of

into

two

comprising

classes: in

all the

nomina

vriddhied, becoming
Perry, Sanskrit Primer.

^STf"^

the

one

agentis,



which

is

this declension

much

and a few others

dr; while

in

the larger,



the



is

the other class, containing

5

-'

66

Lesson XV.

most nouns of relationship, the ^|
In both classes, the
is

gen. sing,
in the

loc. sing,

gunated, becoming ^r^

The

of peculiar formation

and the

;

final

^

r

is

Nomina agentis

in

r, like cRrl

^J

karta

"^RcTT

"«*<$

A.

eficfn^ kartaram

I.

cfi^lT

dropped

D.

m^f kartre

Ab.

cR<T^ kartur (or -us)

L.

^ifTf^ kartari

V.

eft<i^

'.

«ftnl<^ kartdras

^R*^



£ar£fn

cfi«i^ITH -trbhyam efirTf*W kartrbhis

1H)^





kartrbhyas

^idUJ}*^ kartrndm

ejnrn^ kartros

203.

doer

Plural.

TVl kartarau



kartra

^5fT^ kartrsu

kariar

Two

'grandson',

'

m.,

Dual.

Sing.

nouns of relationship,

follow this declension:

^^f
but

f'.,

"sister", and •ffT m.,

^^f makes

the ace. pi.

*cj^<^ svasf-s.
204.

>

The nouns

of agency are sometimes

or with adjective value.
in

**r.

abl.-

nominative singular.

202.

N.

is

has ^T^ ox as stem-final.

^t, and declined
205.

The corresponding feminine-stem

?T,

is

made

like «nft; thus, cR^fif kartri.

The grammarians

also for bases in

used participially,

prescribe a complete neuter declension

precisely analogous with that of cfrfT or Ttjs

but such forms are rare.

Vocabulary XV.

Verbs:

TF^ +

~W*\ (ami(jdcchati) follow.

^"^+^^-^7 (samdcdrati)commh,
perform, do.

"SfZ

+ f^ (viv ddate) dispute, argue.

t^T

+ ^TT (dcrdyate) go

tection

(ace).

to.

for pro-

take refuge

with

Lesson XV.

XJ?

Snbst.:

•4JMl4

m

oficT

d

UTZrf^TT

doer, maker, author: as

}f?T m., supporter,

,

adj., doing,

chM

;

aa}'.,

fc^f>*ejr^|T^ m.,

generous.

ra.,

9J[*rl

author (of Vedic SPTOT

m., seer,

books); as adj., seeing.

m-j leader.

MfU^<T

-5

law-suit.

trial,

Vua^ cxhckVO^

punisher. governor.

^^

w. folVg dat.\

.

Adj.:

^fK^>

frie-XTir

cp^,

f.

f- °^rr>

poor.

^TT, best,

&**'<<Lk&-'

most excellent

man panditd^ betterfw. foWg abL)

learned

w

;

1^1^

^irfrT ^rr%^

rTft*

f%T

TT^T ^^f^rT

I

*pro

(da«.)

3^

^

^%

:

:

8

I

T

^^

1

:

.

::

ii

8

^^^|^rr

l^rar**
i

i

ii

e

n

>^R ^TRTSTRfT WRJ ^T^

wrt Tfwrft ^trt ^ Trwrft ^tfnrro; ^
mfiin*! t5r: ^
^rar^r ^wt ^*p*f ^Tm^r
*m:

i

i

%

i

«p«TC:
n

i

m^rer

^^ft

3F%
*r*ft

ii

*

Words are often repeated, to give an intensive, a distributive,
or a repetitional meaning. So here: "at every step". The position of
is very unusual; it would naturally follow 4ll|4g.

^

**

«

JrASf/'

Exercise XV.

*

'^fy-fcjjtt*.

honor, glory (o/ten as

n.,

indecl.,

m., decision^ certainty.

m

;

<*"«*'•.

"VTTf m-, creator.

VH^Q

preserver lord,

master.

m., scamp, rogue. <5fu*jaVm^5n| m., creator.

S^«f

%ff

penance, expiation. pvvi«j*Mj**1fc

n.,

"^f^TH m., protector.

graciousness, pity.

3TTT m., giver; as

5*"g

husband

making.

m., time.

cfitrr f-.

n., step.

m., teacher.

Loc. absol.



supply

"
being''.

si/vsta^

Lesson XV. XVI.

68

Let the wife love her husband.

10.

and

their leaders

meet

is to

the creator.
ascetics.

two

his

14.

sisters (instr.).

3

the

,

16.

thee\

12.

At the

river the

The world was

20.

boy

created by
is

given to
the author

Let servants always be useful to (%cTj

For protection

17.

2

protectors

graciousness of the creator.
before

13.

In the houses of pious givers alms

masters (ace).

to the gods

Let the warriors follow

King Bhoja was (^J^cT) generous toward

15.

(loc.) of the eulogies.

their

11.

fight with the enemy (pi).

(ace.)

of the pious

O

19.

The man

4

leads

1

betake yourselves

18.

.

Men

5

by the

live

generous one, the poor bend
his

sisters

the city (pass,

to

constr.).

Lesson XVI.
206.

formed from the general present-stem by the

is

addition of a mode-sign,
ings (in 3rd pi. act.

^•^

ran).

^^

which

after

means of an interposed euphonic

2.
3-

end-

in 3rd pi. mid.

all

voices,

is

%

T( y.

and the

:

^^,
The

t,

or

maintained

TJ is

-*IMIH) b y

"411^1*^,

inflection in the active

as follows:

Dual.

Sing.
1.

secondary

^ a,

the final a to XT e (accented,

according to the accent of the a)

is

mid.

After an a-stem, this mode-sign, in

unchanged before a vowel-ending (^(^,

voice

used

are

us, in 1st sing.

unaccented, which blends with
not,

The

Present Optative Active.

Verbs, a-conjugation.

present optative

«=(^^H vddeyam

^^C
«T<|f(,

vddes

^HH

vddet

^dl*t

Similarly,

cordyeyam,

cf^

vddeva

etc.

fallt^

vigeyam,

vddetam
vddetam

Plural.

"3%*f

^rf

vddema
vddeta

^T^C

Sfffc?{ ndhyeyam,

vddeyus

^\{^\m^

69

Lesson XVI.

The

207.

entreaty;

optative expresses:

what

3.

can or could be.

The

subject

is

optative are very

f.,

Tr|

It

is

na.

«T

2.

request or

what may or might,

also largely used in conditional sentences.

The

negative used

Both the prescriptive and the prohibitive

common.

The nouns

see § 203) gunate
4-f

desirable or proper; 4.

often indefinite and unexpressed.

is

with the opt.

208.

wish or desire;

1.

is

^J

of relationship in
in

^J (except ^*? and



•TJf

the strong cases; thus, fxjTT m., 'father',

'mother', declined as follows:
Dual.

Sing.

n.

frjTrr

A.

(MHT*i

twf(

Tmrrr

Plural.

*rnrft

*IHKH

1W W[WI

I.

etc.

V.

etc.

etc.

ftr^^TfT^
209.

The stem

Jf\ m.,

f.,

NV. ^ft^
JJ|4^

yam

I.

TTT

oawa

D.

ife gave

G"-

L.

Plural.

gaus

A.

Ab.

'bull' or 'cow', is declined thus:

Dual.

Sing.

^ft^

jfl^H. gobhyas

gos
»

»

iftHTPH gobhydm

*PFPH gavam

T*faj. 0flwo«

*rf^ aar<

T^gosu
Vocabulary XVI.

B

Verbs:
JT"^ (mdnyate) think, suppose.

?T7 (modate)

lf^
in

rejoice.

(pdnsati)

Vocab.

I.).

proclaim (see also

(smdrati;

member;
pass,

'it is

ditional'.

p.

smarydte)

re-

think of; teach, asp.
taught',

t'n

i.e. 'tra-

70

Lesson XVI.
meal and

Sabst.:
ift

m.,

f->

cow

steer,

bull,

f.,

;

speech.

4\\^

VJT4J ™., fodder,

STTTTC
<|fl£<J

"i-j

f.,

~9G.»X«,T[^F

^rfcra?,

son-in-law.

0:

more,

?fT,

f- 0155rT,

«*m^V|,
as

daughter.

greater,

f.,

VT>

sc.

granting wishes;

the fabulous

Won-

der-cow.

fXT?T m., father; du.,

parents;

pi.,

f.

^U^rfti

badly arranged

°^TT,

or used.

manes.

inftW

f-

greatest.

hay.

mud, bog.

n.,

Brah-

Adj.:

ox-nature; stupidity.

n.,

the

to

gifts

maus.

TTmS-

m., user, arranger.

^\f m., wise man,
^TRI

uiv brother.

^TTff

f.,

%¥,

sage.

7TTO m., month.

f-,

%<^

protection.

it.

by

if.

f«lrt|*^

an oblation to the manes,

accomplanied

she,

Adv. and Conj.:

<H**i n., pair.

'-H\$ n.,

°^T, arranged, used.

^TT, best.

Pron.:

OT

mother.

"?T^P![ n.,

f.

f-

a

sacrificial

^

always, daily.

if.

^4^'cfi well,

properly.

Exercise XVI.
*ft*ff:

chi^^yi* ^tr^r

^rgirr
*ffiTt

^N

**<H

ri^T fti%

^rat ^v:

^rfn

11

m

I

ii

fwt *TRT ^ Wt ^Tf^ ^5^ n

w

* Predicate.

wmT

u«iiit^ iRfr^: ffa

f%r%^r

i

$

i

I

TT T%S"-

fxm^t *n% tt% ^rre *rf|^: 8

Play upon words throughout the

1

verse.

1

Lesson XVI. XVII.

rit

f*mft T%*ri ^^TTt vmit\

wi

^

ii

T%*j:

Rsabhadatta, son-in-law of Nabapana,

and much money were

villages

y^na

*tt*:

«

i

many

coachman bring (^T*W) fodder

ment

the horses.

16.

Of

for the horses

be given (imv.) to the eldest of the brothers.

wood and water
mand.

18.

the milk

two

into the house daily"; thus

Let the cows graze

steers.

21.

The

20.

19.

father's

Let both

The wagon

over the pair

seer rejoices

22.Hari andCiva marry two

steers.

tor-

sisters, the

is

to

"Children, bring

was the

in the forest.

of the black cow.

(instr.)

17.

Let

15.

him not

let

;

Thou

14.

a greater part

the father's property

and

cattle

Brahmans.

given to the

shalt give the mother's jewels to the sisters (opt. or imv.).

the

^

i

ii

By

13.

71

is

com-

live

on

drawn by

(instr.)

of white

daughters of Rama.

Lesson XVII.
Verbs, a- conjugation.

210.

Present Optative Middle.

The

formed as shown

in the

optative middle (and passive) of «-stems

preceding lesson,

is

inflected as follows

,

:

Plural.

Dual.

Sing.

*W*lf^ labhemahi

^nTcrf% Idbhevahi

1.

*Rf*T Idbheya

2.

^Rfarret Idbhethas t^ij<J|V2J|j^ lubheyatham

^pf*^

3.

*RTrT Idbheta

^WTI

Similarly

Declension.

211.

ular,

Thus:

^T*HT

<«H4*Jldl*i Idbheyatdm

Idbhedhvam
Idbheran

coryeya. ^j^T^I^T samgaccheya, etc.

The stem ^T

f.,

'ship, boat',

is

entirely reg-

taking throughout the normal endings, as given in
*fpE(,

^f»^,

etc.

TTfH, TRT,

etc; ^TWT,

•H*illH' etc -?

§ 90.

TH^,

72

Lesson XVII.
212.

The stems ending

iwo well-marked

long vowels

in

classes: A.

root-stems

(^STT,

^)

f^,

fall into

— mostly monosyllabic —

and their compounds) with a comparatively small number of others

them

inflected like

B. derivative feminine stems

;

with a few in ^f, inflected like 5TPTT,
of class

A

of the gen.

"411*^

few exceptions

fern.

pi.

fern.,

words

the simple

"^

as adjectives (rare),

;

of a
1.

in

and

The

in ngfT

root

lose

in ^JTT

f^T-tn

hi.,

%

or

or

is

^fi"

that

which

pi.,

f^^ft

fH^m\m\*{

I.

f^rePTT vigvap-a fapjJTJfat vifvap-os

-pam

%

Roots in

vowel-endings, into Jf

^[IJ

and

s£j{^,

^R

ace.

^HM^,

.

like the nominative.

Plural.

fqi^m^

if

is

Dual.

a.

vowel; but

follows:

'all- protecting':

f.,

Sing.

2.

member

final

treated as

vowel before vowel-endings, except in

N.V. fcjjyun^ -pas

214.

§§ 189, 197);

make up a whole

found as

these root -finals are

the strong cases and in the ace.

Thus,

(in

com-

declension of

in actual use.

When any

compound word,

Roots

not possible to

it is

as nouns with

in adjective

and ^f has been given

f^

are so rare that

scheme of forms
213.

and ^,

^jrr

and with «^ inserted

The simple words are

pounds, they coincide in masc. and fem. forms.

those in

in

^J. The stems

and

take the normal endings throughout, with optional ex-

ceptions in dat., abl.-gen., and loc. sing,
before

*T<?^

f^THEC.

-pau



and ^J change

and ^,

if

-pas


f^RTTrf'WC

etc.

their final vowel,

two or more consonants precede, the change
Thus,

^J^-9|ft m.,

TJ^f^W;

ace. *sJHM*i-

^5f-^

before

but one consonant precede the

f.,

m.,

is

final

into

'corn-buying': nom.-voc. JfS[-

f.,

'street-sweeper': nom. sing.

73

Lesson XVII.

Vocabulary XVII.

"^^ (rdmate) amuse

Verbs:

f^T

«p?

^S(fV[

-f

cftfty

f*T^

n., trade.

agriculture.

^Tfarai

n., life.

f^ffV m., rule;

command,

fsfglj m.,

qpflj^l

n., cattle-raising.

Adj.:

as

lain.
^f^pJJ' n., eating.

f.

°^Tf> good, pleasant, dear;

n. subst.,
f.

^Tf^rej,

fortune.

un-

doubtful;

o^TT,

steady.

servant.

ni.,

fate.

^J"*TT m., father-in-law.

tr^tf^TTm., domestic priest, chap- "WZ,

^7T3R

n., friend.
n., battle.

lf%

garden.

n.,

f.,

(abl.)',

accomplish.

Subst.:

sftfarT

from

greet with joy JUT + '^•T (anutisthati) follow out,

(ace).

d<^H

oneself.

f^f (virdmati) cease

cease.

poet.

(abhindndati ,

rejoice in,

-tej

+

(praUkmte) expect.

TTfrT

4-

^T^JI n M death.

Exercise XVII.

^^
p^

f^t ^^t ^T*

ITrft^rT

vn rif t fNn: irrprawu *
$<d< *nvfa:
i

^f?^
%«4

i

^

rT^T

i

WTH

I

*

0.

1

i

tf^T ^itrT

i

m

$

for

and passions.

an

frerr

^ifti^w

^t

tiftct ^Tfrftr fa-

i

^ii-^Mi: ^<£n?*n^
i

WT

ascetic,

II

twN^frft-

^rww^T^t^^ *W*i ^ *r*fM

i

ifa gwn^rt;

Rule

Star

srurrrTT:

i

$

*TO

1

^rf *w«to:

\

i

II

^ ^ ^"^
^ ^rgm^r

*f^ nri ire Trffl^ 8

Yms fwr %^Tn

m <WWt

*

i

i

I

^t^rT

«i0

I

who

*=
I

I

^T^TR^TI <*I^MI*i
is to

i

^fift ^TftfHgWSTTII

<W

II

put aside all earthly desires

Lesson XVII. XVIII.

74

Let fodder be brought

12.

for

(^TT-i|)

fortune

may ye

(pi.)',

(^mj

acquire

may meet with

friends

their

13.

The king with

Tell (opt., imv.) where

15.

brothers.

16.

You may amuse

yourselves in the garden, but cease eating (abl. of

misfortune.

18.

20.

imv.) your parents.

the king's

let

To-day

by the house

imv.)

(opt.,

22.

my

the fruits

we two

May we

receive the

is

reward of

both shall greet

(opt.,

should speak untruth, then

May

21.

king.

brave warriors: thus

two sons be consecrated

Ye

19.

-priest.

It

should be punished by the

with

MMW)

Mayest thou be saved by the all-protector from thy

17.

(gen.).

ye see good

May

14.

glory.

his warriors crossed the sea in a ship.

our

imv.) by the brother

(opt.,

horses of the all-protecting king.

the

we

conquer the enemies

I

king's wish (use ^TJ pass.).

the

virtue.

Lesson XVIII.
215.

The

Causative.

ation of causative- stems

some

;

^J.

Most roots

?n makes

A

X(\).

217.

;

j

^

in

^T

and

"^|

(in Less.

VII);

add T^ before the conjugation-

T^P^fa;

initial

^FC,
,

'drink',

and

^

makes

1TM*lfil;

M'itfilfrl (as
T^,

etc.,

with

^f in a light syllable

is

various

commonly

Thus,

But most roots

TJc^,

in ^JJ^,

with other rarer ones, generally keep the

thus, *nn;, *r*ref<r

some-

though from

^Tf\J-^[.

remains unchanged.

-m 41^(71.

vfarfa from

UW^jf^

take the same

^T^TT^Tf?! from

sometimes

«K*t, ofiliHiJd;

TP5

1XJT,

thus.

Medial or

but

^T

from l^T;

3MM4|(dj "^Tand^T* sometimes

few roots

irregularities

ened,

in

thus, ^"PTOfc!

times IJTTOffT, etc.

^^,

be noticed in the form-

to

additional ones follow.

216.

sign

chief points

have been given already

TJ

lengthi

<i

and
tST

q fcT

;

^,

short

;

75

Lesson XVIII.

218.

Final vowels take vrddhi before ^^', thus, W, *TM*lfd;

219.

Some

nominatives

verbs of causative meaning are by formation de-

thus lJMtlf?T, 'protect', called causative to 2TJT; fit-

;

to
iprfTT, to fit; M^RrfTT, to *JT; ^TrHrfa,

220.

For

The

221.

f^.

the passive of causatives, see Less.

causatives of intransitive

X.

verbs are transitive.

causatives of transitive verbs are construed sometimes (a) with
accusatives, sometimes (b) with an

ace.

The
two

of the object and an in-

Thus, "he causes the birds to eat the

strumental of the agent.

cakes" may be rendered

either (a):

fq^n^

fMU^I«V,

H^'*J Id,

or (b) fcffffc fqo 1T<>.
222.

The general

Participles.

(weak form ^fT) for the
tense -stem

a

after

of the

two

"^T's

in

being

active,

^ST,

lost;

mdna,

etc.

<^"3|«fr

For

endings are

for

"il^Vf

the middle.

^f«rl

But

the active suffix is virtually «fT, one

and the middle

cept ^rrT sometimes in causative

Tl^nT tuddnt,

participial

and

forms).

suffix

is

Thus, ^q«rl

fTVH (exbhdvant,

dlvyant, y^\ <*J«rT^ cordyant; \{d(i\\*[ bhdva-

the declension of the participles in

^fT

see below,

Less. XXIII.
223.
exhibits

Pronoun of the First Person. The pronominal declension

some

The pronoun

striking peculiarities which are not easily explained.

of the

first

person

is

declined thus:

Lesson XVIII.

76
224.

The forms

*?,

*TT,

«ft,

are enclitic, and are never

•TCC.

or before the particles ^,

used at the beginning of a sentence,

225.

In pronouns of the

often used for the singular.

show

first

and second persons the plural

a curious tendency to agree

in Sanskrit

is

Pronouns (and other words as well)
in

form with the

predicate rather than with the subject to which they refer.

Vocabulary XVIII.
ff die; caus. (mdrdyati) kill.

Verbs, with causatives:
caus.

tJP^ eat;

(dcdyati)

make Tf&

+

^[

study, read

^SlTSl

;

caus.

^T+ ^rfH in
make;

greet.

form

5f5^ in caus. (jandyati) beget.

+ ^n

in

I

caus. (dapdyati)

make

give or pay.

+

+ ^SR

load

away

(caus. apa-

in caus. (prathdyati) spread,

The
is

person
latter

priest

said

(who

himself.

;

(dat.).

caus. (var-

make grow; bring up.

caus. (vyathdyati) torment.
;

i.

in caus. (cravdyati)
e.

recite,

make

proclaim (ace.

of pers.).

TUT stand;

in

caus. (sthapdyati)

+

IT

(pratisthate) start off; in

caus. (prasthapdyati) send.

proclaim.
*

inform

put, place; appoint; stop.

ndydyati).

WS[

dhaydti, -te)

hear,

Jmake put on, clothe in(two ace).
•ft

f?f in caus.

H\J (vdrdhate) grow

i& hear

*TfT> i° caus. (-dhdpdyati)

caus. (veddyati) in-

(dat.).

qEPZT in

show.
~%*{ see ; in caus. (darcdyati)
l^TT

+

caus. (ajndpdyati)

command.
l^T give;

caus. (abhivadayati)

f^7 know;

ordain, appoint.

fff

(ydjdyati)

to sacrifice; offer sacrifice

for {ace.*).

(<z-

dhydpdyati) teach,
cfiain caus. (kalpdyati,-te)

caus.

sacrifice;

make

eat; give to eat.

is

who performs
"make that

to

called

sacrifice

for the benefit of another

as though the
<Ja|44M) were celebrating the sacrifice for

person

sacrifice",

77

Lesson XVIII.

dm

Subst.:

W^RV

nectar.

n.,

trunk

hand;

m.,

phant)

ray

;

m

BRTfcfirra

HTZtiPni

('of

nom.

n.,

pr., the city

of Patna.

ele-

toll, tax.

;

nom P r ~> a noted ^<3
-

->

garment.

n.,

f^f\J m., Brahman (the deity).

poet.

«M3fl

groom.

^1[ m., messenger, envoy.

^L|«f «j«f n., initiation, investiture.
eff^

m., slave,

nom.

f.,

the city of ^efi m., wolf.

pr.,

Benares.

ife m., science, knowledge

TTOr m., quality

esp.

;

sacred knowledge, holy writ.

excellent quality,

;

excellence.

Adj.:

nom.

^IJTTf m.,

«n?H

(Rama's

pr.

^,

father).

f.

f.

o^JT, new.

own, one's own.

°^rT,

Exercise XVIII.

*ra

i

mw T?m

^t^rt

w^TT^prcf^:
ti^g:

$

i

fa IT®

«*M<*Jd

^O^K^^

T

I

I

9^
14.

I

food.
21.

have
20.

my

^5^ft
i

ii

99

16.

field

irrcgntr*r^

i

vo

^?*rn:

i

S^?T3i Jj(lllrH^^:

^n»i^«n>

^fwr *j%
W\f% ^ ^RPJi

a

i

i

15.

Show me

and wolves

sacrifice

(ordained) the taxes in his kingdom.

ploughed by slaves.

boy taken

sent envoys to

fra-

II

Let Brahmans teach us both and offer

the

*ti-

^TFrraffaTfa «^ifin qtrvT-

a mat to be made (caus. pass.).

They had

(gen.) cows,

The

^«niiiM*«f5T %^: n *

^l*fl4*R fTTTt S^T^nf

The king determined

The kings
*

^m*H

i

II

(dat.) the books.

18. I

9

^i wr*r fawrfa ttt: ^rwt
^ft ^TWt T31% *F^ TWW %^^TR: 93

I cause

for us. 17.

I

I

frfa ^rrf^tfr^m
f<TI

i

TOiwrt

*=

90

m

i

>rr?rfr

i

i

(led)

Pataliputra.

killed our* flocks.

expression of possession,

etc.,

Give me water and

19.

away from me
22.
23.

(abl.).

Thieves stole our

The king made

the

on the part of pronouns

Lesson XVIII. XIX.

78

of Visnu.
poet recite (use cfciqeiHr) a eulogy
hearts with wishes.

25.

24.

We

torment our

Both scholars greet the teacher.

Lesson XIX.
226.

Pronoun of the Second Person. This pronoun

the natives assume

T^^ and

^T^

as bases)

Dual.

is

(for

which

declined thus:

Lesson XIX.

79

Lesson XIX.

80
Tf^fW

'northern',

'southern',

Occasional forms of the pro-

etc.

nominal declension are met with from numeral adjectives, and from
having somewhat of a numeral character,

other words

as

'few', ^9Sn| 'half,

The

Peculiarities in the use of relative pronouns, etc.

234.

^q

etc.

Sanskrit often puts the relative clause before the antecedent clause,

and inserts the substantive

same clause with

to

which the relative refers into the

the relative, instead of leaving

clause.

In translating into Sanskrit,

placed

either

not

but

English.
"

before

or

the

into

inserted

after

whole

the

antecedent

high

in

Sanskrit either

tfffa

rff:,

or:

*

T^rft tfffa «T#T

^ ^*T

235.

thus,

in the antecedent

clause

clause,

as

is

lift CTWW

*j

V

be

clause;

done in
is

very

^f ift SWPR *Tt
SWT*; but not *

T($Q
ift

English idiom.

etc -> according to the

)

word may stand anywhere in its clause;
MU fifflM T % ^Tr: "the gods whose chief is Qiva".

The

f*Jcf

:

to

is

antecedent

Thus, "the mountain which we saw yesterday

would be

*T^rTt

it

a relative

relative

Sometimes relative or demonstrative adverbs are used as equivalents
of certain case-forms of relative or demonstrative pronouns; thus,

236.

The

repetition of the relative gives

'whosoever, whatever'.
attained

by adding

(or, less usually,

^Tin

The same

result is

an

meaning:

to the relative the interrogative pronoun, with

without) one of the particles

Sometimes the interrogative alone

a similar sense.

indefinite

much more commonly

Thus

;

is

% ^«T, f^[,

^"fa

used with these particles

^T^T ^T^fa

''

whatever

this

woman

relates''; ^ff ZJ^f Vfm: ^TR^ "whatever any one's disposition may
be"; ^TO ^i^ fxf^^fd "he gives to some one or other"; <<<ain*^fHfej fl «3T»ffi

"he takes from no one whatever".

81

Lesson XIX.
Vocabulary XIX.
Verbs:

!

^^

name;

say, speak;

in caus.

I

sit; in cau9. (asdyati) place,

^T^
ltrr

in

drink;

caus.

(pdydyati)

caus. (pdldyati)

in

rejoice;

make

in

other.

gait; refuge.

f^^

n.,

umbrella.

n.,

milk.

f.,

k

f',

*$

n., foot, leg.

73^

TS(\,

"3Rf other.

a god.

gng"

qn4^

companion, helper.

all

m.,

n. pr.,

have

Adj.:

TrTT

f.,

(ghatdyati) have

call; in caus. (Jwaydyati)

n. pr.

^ftaPST

%^ejft

caus.

*inrr?r m.,

^TSJF m., n. pr.,

f.,

57

business, concern.

n.,

kill;

called.

Subst.:

^TTTCjr

read.

killed.

rejoice, please.

yate) terrify, frighten.

irfTf

e.

(sidhyati) succeed; in caus.

f^TW

caus. (jprlndyati)\^\

}ft fear; in caus. (bhisdyate, bhayd-

«4)|tj

i.

(sadhdyati) perform, acquire.

protect.
jft

(vdcdyati)

speak,

(a written leaf)

^T^ (sdhate) endure.

give to drink, water.
2TTT protect;

make

(Vedic)..

all.

^ 14

sweet.

Indecl. :

Krsna's mother.

tJ|04 also,

even.

f^a\\ without (w. instr. or ace;

earth.

as prefix to proper names,

often postpos.).

has the meaning 'famous', 'honorable

'.

Exercise XIX.

fw?r: ni^: ffM¥ mh^Ph * htf*fcr^fti*nrt^%*PftT^*n*i jJ^"^hi^i*i^i8i
*rfa

^fa ^

ftraft

Perry, Sanskrit Primar.

c

82

Lesson XIX.

ir^r

cfimf^Rmr^

^rf>:

The husband 6

15.

(loc.ftm.)
3

Rama 3 was

born

qg

4

is

,

11

5

2

called

8

at thy

so?

Others than

diligence

we

(abl).

17.

those

2

kings
the law

pos.)

who

6

1

protect

3

{ace.)

trees are sweet.

22.

wicked.

May
24.

16.

.

( cft^

|

<^ )

the law-books.

their subjects

be victorious 9

husbands, increase (imv.).
terrifies the

Why

7

The

.

according to

the glory of all
23.

20.

5

21.

The

fruits

teacher

The

19.

May

all

(^rw, post-

of all these

women, who honor

their

Which of

the

cows

two

fruits

to thee,

do ye wish?

to

25.

My

the other brother

nothing.

Lesson XX.
Declension of Stems iu Consonants.

All

noun -stems

in

consonants may well be classed together, since the
peculiarities

shown by some concern only

the stems themselves,

Masculines and feminines of the same

endings.

precisely alike;

final

and neuters are peculiar (as usually

and not the
are inflected
in

the other

1

"Other than thou".
ablative
**

is

With

^pjj, as

used.

"Makes

8

4

In this kingdom the
king's punishment

father had gold given to me,

237.

4

speakest thou

could not endure this
suffering.

teacher teaches** us holy- writ and
7

Dacaratha

whom 1

(loc), of

Kausalya

(gen.)

2

1

rejoices
18.

11

of that

XX.

us read" (^rf^Ho caus.).

with comparatives, the

Lesson

XX.

83

majority of consonantal stems form a special feminine

%

adding

(never

to the

tSTT)

weak form

The endings

or of strong, middle, and weakest.

normal ones

2.

Z; sporadic are ^,

but one

Of

3.

tjJ

OT as

,

the

A

4.

{.,

as follows:

is

X!?

1>

;

is

if

"l,*

<T,5

is

allow-

two or more would etymo-

dropped

and again

,

the

last,



first in

allowed as final; the others

is

are regularly converted into this

very few

,

asp.,

and

wherever they

occur.

^, becomes either ?R

cases (where

it

According to 239. 2, the

^

r

each series, the

— surd

,

or (less often)

^;

represents original \J) be-

c^.

240.
is

^,

finals.

non-nasal mutes, only the

final palatal, or

in a

comes

the last

,

would etymologically

^

consonants

remains.

non-aspirate surd,

both sonants

stems,

are throughout the

In general, only one consonant, of whatever kind,

logically occur there

but

final

usual etymological finals are

ed to stand at the end of a word

until

weak

(Introd., § 90).

The general law concerning

The more

^i, K.5

by

of the masculine.

very general in consonantal steins: either of strong and

1.

stem

Variations, as between stronger and weaker forms, are

238.

239.

But the

of all numbers.

declensions) only in the nom.-acc.-voc.

of the nom. sing., m.

and

always lost; and irregularities of treatment of the stem-final,

in this case, are not infrequent.

Before the pada-vn dings, WTP^.,

241.

final is treated as in

242.

An

f*J^

^^ a "d ^

a stem-

external combination.

aspirate mute

is

changed

to

its

corresponding non-

aspirate before another non- nasal mute or a sibilant;

stands

it

unaltered only before a vowel or semivowel or nasal.

Hence such

own corresponding

non-aspirate.

a mute

is

243.

doubled by prefixing

its

Consonant-stems of one form in

c^,

and
^, \J

H

.

Be-

84

XX.

Lesson

fore suffixal If

,

both

and \J as stem-finals become

<T

becomes^. Examples:

stem -final

'misfortune';

^*R^

i\\c^ m.

*^

a.

*twc

i.

insm

d.

*ro

Ab.

*4M^

g.
l.

i

i

1

srhtt

spnr

i

^rro^i:

i

^rnrf^

surfer u

i



*^flrct

n

^mHsfi

i

tws:

ii

^rnrsra:

i

*<vii*i


i

w\v^

i

i

oHiffiu.

wrsra;

i

11

11

*hm*ui


i

n

i



*^f?r

t^to:

11

^iim^h ^nm;

^rn^

i

snra;

i

-4im<i

i

as

1/t

Plural.

^rre^

i

~Z;

wind'; ^SIT^ £»

'the world'.

n.,

Sing.

n.v.

l
,

^im<ih

i

jt^j ^rrw

^RTfa n

i

i

si'nrro; n

sprraj n

i

Dual.

N.A.V. ^^rfr

For

the

*MH<fl

|

i.D.Ab.

jt^wt^

g.l.

«vft<i

i

|

^f^TTft

w^rm;
4iih<{1h.

i

i

i

II

snnwr^
annfrtc

«^ inserted in nom.-acc. pi. neuter,

u
ii

cf.

phaldni, ma-

dhuni, etc.

244. In a few roots,
also ^, representing

T21 )

when a

loses

its

final

242, the initial sonant consonant (JI
thus, TJ\J, nom.-voc. sing. *jt^;

245.

Agreement of

,

h) becomes

^, or

If the

same

will be used in their

substantives are masculine and feminine

if the

masc.

it

;

but in a combination of masc. or

the adjective will be neuter.

(TET

,

V W
,

;

aspirate;

3T5PE0 ^**J'

adjectives.

two or more substantives,

sonant aspirate

aspiration according to §§ 239. 3,

adjective qualify

combined number;
,

the adj. will be

fern, subjects

with neuter,

Lesson XX.

85

Vocabulary XX.

make

or

rise

,

in caus. (lambkdyati*)

receive or take

caus. (rohdyati or ro-

^i? grow;
pdyati)

,.*,

^fW

Verbs:

;

make

give.

grow;

plant.

Subst.

^MHlMi

f-,

name of

certain Vedic

writings.

^XT^TT n

->

a hundred.

IJTf n.,

:

^"^7

sacred cord (worn by

the three higher castes).

autumn; year.

f.,

^Rfi.

fagot.

f.,

^rf^T^

f- 5

river.

m., friend.

41^7

Adj.:
BTCFZ

f.,

stone.

^TSJ^r,

°^TT> skilled, learned.

f-

firafTTf., contentment, happiness.

f^raW

m.,

supporter, maintainer.

cpfo,

f.

T^ERi

ni.,

VTO<T m., king; mountain.

*<f^

wind; as

m.,

pi.,

reach;

n.

pr.,

*T3f,

the Storm-gods.
^"TfT m.,

wind.

<4|(t|

n.,

threefold, triple.

hard to find or

difficult.
otSTT,

Indecl.

fcJJJjm m., trust, confidence.

^f

f.

f.,

°^S(J,

devoted, true.

:

also; even.

Xjjy |f^

behind (w.

gen.).

m., n. pr., a demon, Vrtra.

Exercise XX.

f ftps

*

*rf*ret

If a nasal

is

^TT^Tfr

ever

i

^

i

^rf«ra<s

*j^h!

^qrf^-

taken in any uf the strong forui8 of a

root, it usually appears in the causal.
**
See § 225 ; ZHT = tffm^l and

^^T^;

see § 235. end.

86

Lesson

^:

$

I

-

^frf^

*nf*i:

:

Wt

t^:

?* sfta

I

*rr^r

XX. XXI.

i

o.

*S

|

I

WrT:

Tnft <if^f^ra

i

cRI-

(gen.) fajT§t

qo

i

i

wm:

Indra, with the Maruts as his companions, killed Vrtra.

14.

15.

Without a companion no one can perform a

16.

One

difficult business.

(express in pi.) should plant trees on all the roads, for the

sake of the shade.

Those

17.

friends

are hard to find in the three worlds.

who
18.

are true

The

girdle

in

misfortune

and the sacred

cord of Aryans are to be made threefold (neut. dual).
this

(JUT caus.)

stone behind the

20.

fire.

The ocean

Put

19.

called

is

by

the poets the husband of rivers. 21. All subjects must be protected
(imv.)

by

their kings.

22.

Some

of these

Brahmans are learned

in

the Upanisads, others in the law-books.

Lesson XXI.
246. Declension
tals, etc.

when

it

is

Final

^

cont'd.

Stems in pala-

of a stem reverts to the original guttural

^j

when

final,

and before, ^T, and

oftenest treated exactly like

ment, see below.
treated in the

*

of Consonant-stems,

conies to stand as word-final, and before the /wda-endings.

becoming
«f

1.

3.

^—

In the roots* fZTT»

same way.

4.

The

In classical Sanskrit not

ff

many

of

If

before 3?

.

2.

Final

for cases of other treat-

^TT a "d

^

^JTCT\ the ^T

becomes

"Ef

after

is

efi

.

root-stems are used as inde-

frequently employed, with
adjective or (present) participial value, as final element of a com-

pendent substantives;

pound word.

but they

are

87

Lesson XXI.

thus.

E.g.

°^.

TF^

f-,

'speech, word';

*Jf"3

f.,

'illness'; f^"*^

f.,

'direction, point of the compass':

Plural.

Sing.

n.v. <tto

^

i

A.

«TN?l

i.

^-rt

L.

wrf^f

f%*

i

^R

I

wr

i

^fw

I

I

^rr^

ii

f^lR

i

f^tn

I

t^ftr

i

^^ro:

^tTt^b:

ii

TTf

||

f^c

i

ii



»

II

^f^ro:

i

^f f^J
I

I

i

f^frwi;

u

II

Dual.

Tnft

^ft

i

ciN«ii*i

Tnfr*;
247.

1.

of roots

and

an ^

3"f

2.

3.

'sacrifice',

^Fr*t

i

ii

f^ron^

i

f^afm:

i

n

11

The

"IT"5r

and when word-final.

"H,

final

with others; and

,

'people', the

pi.,

For

of the root-stems T"T"^

"5T

above.

are treated like 1\

,

"fat, m.

f^fr

Final ft of a stem regularly becomes the lingual mute

(^3 or "£) before

see § 246,

i

^rarm;

i

3.

the final

Thus,

f%$

Vaicya- caste';

f%fi^

f

exceptions,
'rule',

,

"?|<3

,

of a number

m., 'enemy';

'

m.,

f

.

(adj.)

,

'licking'.

Plural.

Sing.

N.V. f^z
A.
i.

l.

fWZ

I

f"^"**.

I

f^TO

II

fa^H

f^n

i

f^rfT

ii

f^-fa

I

fsrff

ii

II

I

f^TO

I

I

f^Tf^

j>

-n

II

r>

fwfftm f^ffa* t^f^:
ftg* fwz* fa^J
i

i

i

i

ii

II

Dual.
ff^ft

i

"f%#t

fl^lT^
f^fta
248. But '"gf^Jt

ni.,

i

I

ii

f^l^TR:

f^rf-ra:

priest*,

II

ii

though containing the root

H^

,

Lesson XXI.

88
makes 3gf^R
i/*!U

,

makes

249.

5^

and ^5T

etc.;

^^

Nouns having

1.

though containing

'garland',

f.,

etc.

the roots

'be hostile', with others, as

(name of a certain metre),

'burn', and

Y^,

final element,

^

change the final

'

granting wishes

£j

loc.

°\T^;

pi.

Ijf^ etc.

2.

In

f*H^

'shoe,

,

the

•fi?,

^

sandal,' nom.-voc. sing.

nom.-voc.-sing.

^

and

<^

ace.

\dMMr^,

;

thus,

°^*^,
f?Hh

where

^g

^MH^

f-,

'bind,' as final element,

becomes

f.

It.

^TTT^RR;

sing.

nom.-voc. sing. ^TW^cti, ace.

'friend-betraying,'

words with

represents original ^T

',

'milk',

and

into ^{

Thus, <#iy<?tf, 'wood -burning', makes nom.-voc.

^TPTCf

T^,

and also ^fuil^'

°«T^*^> instr. du.

loc. pi.
©•fig.

"TgTR,

Vocabulary XXI.

*TW +

Verbs:
in

<*T{

caus.

(damdyati)

tame;

(utsrjdti) let loose or

^T^ +lTfT(P an ^4/a * e *) em brace.

compel.

5^

^?

out; raise (the voice).

(druhyati) be hostile; offend.

V{ (bhdrati, -te) bear,

support

tf

+

3?

(prahdrati)

strike

out

;

smite.

>J in caus. (dhdrdyati) bear.
(lit.

and Jig.).

Subst.:
^Ti^J

m.

^TJ

pi.,

n. pr.,

India.
-^£-e^

pi.,

f.,

look, glance; eye.

^T^q m.,
verse of the Rigveda

the Rigveda.

-slflMViJ n.,
<^Tt «r|«|

f.,

a people in f^TO m., enemy.

medicine.

m., nom. pr.

;

in

tears.

Jreflre m., bee.
VTTOqf
"^51

f.,

GHETTO

n.,

sweetness.

sickness, disease.

™., great king, emperor.

^!3" and a few other roots, whose nasal is not constant
throughout their inflection, lose it in the present-system.

89

Les9on XXI.

CTTTnT m., vassal.
<HM<fi

one

in.,

who

has taken a

certain ceremonial bath.

*37WTT

"!•?

healthy, well.
f.

xnaf,

sacred texts).

^-,

wholesome

°^TT,

private recitation (of ^t^re,

f-

^STT,

o^TT (pass. part, of

f.

besieged, surrounded

Adj.:
^TrsfiTnT,

«FT.+

i^r,

f

°^n

oRT'fr?^ m.

f.

5

rich

n.,

*Tf,

granting wishes

;

^J

),

suffused.

;

part,

(pass.

of

hated, detested.

o^jt (part, of ^\*

old.

),

°^rr, sick, in.

f.

f.

H*TfT,

Wonder-cow.

as f. subst., the

f.

^Tftra,

-

^ST[

f%% + f^),

part, of

attacked, smitten.

"^TT)?
-

f-

f^f^S,
t °^n (pass.

(gen.).

strongest.

^TT,

provided with.

Ad?.:

?f^T!J,f. '^n',rigbt hand; southern.

ever.

3i^T*H. ^Tt^ffT:, ^i^Tfa,

Exercise XXI.

*piwt

*T^ri:

f^ffM«Ns*m

^tr^%r:

i

(abl.)

ere *rr^

^ f^TT^ wri

^t $^?ra
14.

f^raft

^i

1

In

i

ii

<^
the

cfff^

I

«*

I

TOTWt

<*iIh<i* *rrv3

faftrs:

i

o.

i

^<T7r

Tim

$fo
i

3

i

^r

^rftwrrrsri *wn:

ii

private

recitation

of

the

Veda an

ascetic

must

*
f^RJ^ (interrog.), with some other words expressing u9e or
need, take9 with it an instrumental of what is used or needed, and

a genitive of the user.
medicines"?

So here: "of what use

to a well

man

are

Lesson XXI. XXII.

90

raise (opt. or imv.) his voice.

who

called hotr,

shoes and a garland, and
friends

Rama

cans.) the people in all the earth.

Usnih.

pass.) the

Among

21.

Vibhisana.
veda.

betrayers

The

22.

father's
-

with the sword.
"
25.

"Among my

17.

caus.),

fell

glance

me

(loc).

(^nSf^T

pass.)

upon

named

is

enemies

his

(ace, dat.,

Krsna was

the battle

killed

by

our enemies be tormented by diseases

May

(TJT

seer praises Indranl with verses of the Rig-

24. In

spoke the Brahman

Let an

18.

and protect

In the Rigveda occurs (^TT

of - friends

The emperor smote

23.

emies.

The

20.

the

C?J^

19.

priests is

snataka must wear

thus spoke Ravana.

vassals in check

his

A

16.

carry an umbrella.

the strongest":

is

emperor keep

That one among the

15.

the Rigveda.

recites

in

or

loc.)

en-

his
"
:

thus

anger (abl .).

Lesson XXII.
250.

Declension of Stems in

The stems

"J.

and the

^

of the nom.

^

becomes

then

Thus, farj

116).

iftx

A.

f*TT*l

i.

l
251.

tjt;

i

fanj

i

nrfn

i

I

f*nft

ii

ST**

i

voice

X

final

;

J^ f.,

far*; gr*C
i

ii

ifM'R

ii

farta:

^R

i

i

yfrs:

in f?T«^

^tf^ [and

They

*ftf*rarjtf*fci:

ii

^tH

h

and f^(J.
is

h

»

»

»

tjtt

city'.

Plural.

and neut. only; the corresponding feminine
thus, \|f*1*fl*

nom.-sing.,

'

'

*nft h

»

II

jft

Stems in

f-,

Dual.

Singular.

N.v.

^

and

(or visarga) under conditions requiring a surd
'

as final (see § 95.

^

in

In the nom.-sing. the

lost.

is

in

and

lengthen the vowel before consonant- endings,

i

ii

^5

These are masc.

made by adding ^;

lose their final «^ before consonant- endings;

Almost any noun

in ^H

may form

a possessive derivative

with.

9

Lesson XXII.

and also

nom.

the

in

where

sing.,

m

Thus, ^Tf^nt.

compensation.

masc. lengthens the

the

A.

Neuter.

Dual.

Plural.

Singular.

I.

Vf*Ml

^rf^WT^

^f*rf*TCC

l.

\rf^t*i

^nffa;

^fsre

v.

Dual.



»



Vfii«t*i

in

n -> 'rich'.

->

Masculine.
Singular.

^[

1

Plural.



y,

as in the masculine

^rfat

hut there are a few

division are mostly neuter;

Their inflection

feminines.
fore Vf

[and

see § 241

;

nom.-acc.

pi. neut.

nasal (anusvdra).
n.,

for the

stems in

fern.]

VT^

^R^

pi.

,

p.

of this

masculines and

nearly regular (for ^t, ^"^,

is

loc.

27, bottom of page).

^T

be-

Masc.

lengthen the ^f in nom. sing.; and the

^ or

also lengthen

Thus,

Jf*RT

n.,

^

or

^[

before the inserted

^fa^

'mind';

'oblation';

n«,

'bow'.
Dual.

Singular.

N.A.V.

The stems

Derivative stems in tJT^- T^t> ^^C.-

252.

*t-to;

i.

*wr

l.

*r*rfs

^f^ ^r^

i

|

jt^

||

i

ff^Ti

i

^R^r

i

ffafa

i

\i*rfa n

^fcpft

\

*Rt«rro;

u

*wfa;

i

i

\*«pft

\

II

ffwro v^t^

ii

ifafrtc

ii

i

i

^*jtTt^

Plural.

n.a.

jnrifa

i.

T^tt^:

*w

L
<>r

253.
sing-

ff^f

i

*nr:g

I

or

ffeng

vrfcr

i

ff^ra:

i

i

I

^fn^
v^*3

i

or

ii

^«j:j

ii

n
||

nom.
^^rf^f"^^ m. (name of certain mythical characters):

VftHTO,

nom.-acc.
the

f^-rq

i

suffix

pi.

ace.

^rf^^H,,

instr.

^f^^T,

voc.

^P^<^;

^STf^fT^^.-

^•Tj

strength, strong'.

thus,

from

Stems

in

^f
fa^

n.,

and

«jf^«^, 'having
are very rare.

'strength',
fc|«^

92

Lesson XXII.
254. Adjective

member

are very

compounds having nouns of

common.

Thus,

m.

n.

f.

N. «*HI*t

°T^

a.

°*to;

^^rr:
^IVJI^y

A.

Plural,

m.

n.

f.

n.

f.

°#

3*M*H

n

,

n

'long-lived':

Dual.

Singular.

<f|vh*JMH

Plural.

V

°*ra:

^NlTW etc.

I.

this class as final

'favorably-minded.'

Dual,

Singular.

m.

4J*H^

^Kh^R

etc.

<{jv||^f^

etc.

Vocabulary XXII.

:

sajjdte

Subst. :

^WT^C
i^lft

pipe, conduit.

n P r -i an Apsaras, Ur- H^J^

n.,

milk.

-

Y^
voice; song.

^^C

n.,

eye.

loc.

).

bow.

f.,

f^f^TT m., king.
f.,

— w.

«J|<4J

vaci.

f^T^

on (as thoughts

\sl«r^ n.,

heavenly nymph.

f-i

f*j

hang on, be fastened

for sajydte)

Verb:

^J^ (sdjati; but often pass.

city.

f.,

TO»^Rc(, m.,

Snf^PC

ni.,

n. pr.,

Pururavas.

(living) creature.

m., n., pr., India.

H<d*slU^

^Tf^WC m moon.
^tt m s py->

Iffs^*^ m., minister (of state).

W\

bowstring.

3fCTT

->

f-,

sii^fim.

n.,

light; star; heavenly

rf^T^I m., pond.
f.,

door, gate.

n., sacrificial

^Wl
^"^T^

mind.

n.,

formula, text.

n -> g lor y» fame
m., merchant.

^fllRT

body.

^["IT

*H^

n.,

HH*\H

age.

{.,

flower.

-

Lesson XXII.

^pf
Cs

sun.

in.,

^(M

inaw,

stead.

m

JOTftVT,

^f%^

-?

possessor, lord.

f^pT,
°^rr (part, of

f-

ot +^n)-

o

-

^,

first.

°^rT (part, of

*?),

dead,

f.

o^jj

of

^JT),

(part,

standing.

drawn, bent (as a bow).

TPTf^pr

subst., ascetic.

fallen.

Adj.:

^n^re,

f.

f.

f{rf,

oblation.

n.,

asm.

asceticism;

TTSff^^ courageous.

locality;

spot,

place,

n.,

i)3

Indecl.:

suffering, doing acts of!

cf

to

be sure,

in sooth.

Exercise XXII.

r

^

^

-5nr%

w

1

11.

cities
13.

i

m

i

$

i

infxprr +nifa

s*rt:

htwt

wtf^m *r*rf%

i

^

i

1

Raise ye the voice

of India dwell

The

wt

ifnwm v-rft wrjt:

i

q+nqfamfrd

w*''

<rra;

smmri

rich

praise of Pururavas

in

praise (dat.) of Hari.

12.

In the

merchants and courageous warriors.

was sung by Kalidasa.

14.

The king

gave orders (^T-IJT cans.) to have his minister called (use or. recta).
15.

The minds

sing.).

16.

At

of ascetics must not dwell (*JW

night the

moon

should sacrifice to the gods

(cf.

not living creatures.

18.

milk,

warriors fallen in battle.

on riches (^",

)

19.

Tf&

in Voc.

I)

One

flowers, fruits,

and

The Apsarases
In age

(instr.),

loc.

17.

gives light to all creatures.

lead into

not

in

Heaven

knowledge,

94

Lesson XXII.

Civa

the eldest

is

by the oblation.

among
21.

A

his

XXIIL

brothers (loc, gen.).

20.

The gods

live

merchant wishes wealth (^ft% a warrior

fame, an ascetic deliverance.

The woman's eyes

22.

are suffused

with tears.

Lesson XXIIL
Declension.

255.

Comparative Adjectives.

ad-

Comparative

jectives of primary formation have a double form of stem for masculine

and neuter: a stronger

cases,

and a weaker
of middle

distinction

ends in ^«l.

stem-form.

in

in

Tart^ (usually %SjftO' in the strong

ZR^

(usually

|^4|^),

The

and weakest cases.

The feminine-stem

Thus, %STTO\ 'better

is

made with

n. %*ttt;

Plural.

h\h\

%^t*ra:

Sing.

n.v.

%?TOT

^ft^rrn;

^frf^C

l.

^rfa

'^refa:

%*m

made with

Plural.

3<j'ifa

v

r,

like the masculine.

°*i:*r

Fem. stem %inft declined
Stems in ^«tT (or

Dual.

%^^ %wt
n

I.

256.

from the weak

:

*i*mtl

v

%

no

masc.

Neuter.

Dual.
51

A. ^fa-RHP*

being

1

Masculine.
Sing.

there

voc. sing.

nJR^)

like

*\d\.

fall into

two divisions: A. those

the suffix ^f«rT (^SHO^ being, with few exceptions, active

participles, present

and future; and B. those made with the pos-

sessive suffixes *TnT (or
and ^IfT
t{c[J

(or ^cQ.

They

are masc.

and neuter only, the fem. being formed with $\
257.
'

'living.

A. Participles in

^sprf

(or ^ffi).

E.

g.

sJfanT^

m.,

nM

95

Lesson XXIII.
Neuter.

Masculine.
Sing.

N.V.^e^

U

Dnal.

Plural.

Sing.

Dual.

Plural.

^fanT^

^T^

Wfanft

sft^f^T

r

n

^m

aforeft

^\qci«,

v

I.

wfa*TT

sfhntTTH

Whrf^

as in masculine.

l.

^fafw

^t^rffa;

afcng

A.

The strong form

258.

ind. act.

thus

;

•PJnT, weak ?Rl^; fasfnT.

and ^HH^;



^

final

from the

«T^f^rT gives strong

,

.

of these participles

off the

by cutting

chanically,
fut.)



form of

frTC^ and ftBc^J— ffjf^ TIT**

But those verbs which

259.

the usual
in the



*Tf%^jf?tT

fJ?T

(as

e.

in the 3rd. pi. act. lose

the «^ of

g. the verbs following the reduplicating class

present-system), lose

it

participle,

and

Thus, from

j/^",

also in the present

have no distinction of strong and weak stem.
pi. pres. ind. act. 5TJTf?T 5 part,

voc.

(or

pres. act. part.

^H^i|«d and <^l!^^c^;

^T!^srf«tT,

me-

obtained,

3rd. pi. pres.

^f^UJ«r1N and ^ff^T^.

(fut.),

3rd

is

nom.-

(only stem -form) ^T^Tr^:

sing. masc. Wgc^, ace. Sl^rJH

;

nom.-voc.-acc. du.

^,$[ cTt,
*

pl-

«TS7T^.; nom.-voc.-acc. sing. neut. -aj£^, du. ^|[<ft pi. ^JSffa-

Only the present

260.

participles of verbs of the a -class, the

ya-class, and causatives, invariably insert «^ in nom.-voc.-acc. du.

when

neut. Present participles of the a'-class, of the root-class

root ends in

tSTT,

and

all

future

participles,

reject it; thus, neut. -sing. f^?7T.> du. fsfr^cfT or fi*<«<ft;
(fut.),

du.

du.

m£\

stems

in

^fX^J «ft or
<>r

^HT.?

H

|

wrO

.

wf^nft

;

^Tc^

Participles of

all

(pres. part,

from

other verbs, and

leave out the «^ in the du. neut.;

take or

either

may

thus,

the

<*{\ **!<!.

IfJ, 'go'),
all

^JfiJ<^

other

(^R^

'eat', root-class), du. t5T<^ cT^.
261.

The

adj. ?T^«fT

,

'great', takes in strong cases the stem-

The grammarians, however, allow

^

these verbs to insert the

in the nom.-voc.-acc. pl. neuter of the present participle.

96

Lesson XXIII.

form *i^i«n: nom.-sing. masc.
*Tf "R; (see § 239,
voc.
is

da. neut. JTftft,

JTpl;

2), ace.

iffT^n^,

Otherwise the inBection

JTfTf^rT

pi.

like that of participles.

The feminine

262.
~^7[)

of participles and adjectives in ^|nT

always made with

is

and the form

j[,

is

(or

always identical

with the nom. dual neuter.

Vocabulary XXIII.
"Verbs;

1$

f«l«^ (nindati) blame.

Nonns (subst. and

^T

adj.):

Wf«((4| m., sun.

TT^TRC.

(pr. part, of

(apasdrati) go

away;

in

away.

m., calf.

%^rt^.

(comp.) very honorable.

^

"'sSfXf

rule.

JJB(r&jate) shine;

^c^

+

caus. (apasdrdyati) drive

better, best

;

as neut. subst.,

salvation.

^fnT

^T) giving.

(neut. Uftj being, existing;

-

«<flll\i^j

f-

,

as masc. subst., good

bright, glistening;

^rf,

f.

part,

°^TT;

of

become

(past. pass.

as neut.

3J);

man;

as

fern. (*Trft), faithful wife.*

(act.) illuminating.

Adv.:

^J^ to-morrow,

subst.,

being, creature.

\

surely, indeed.

f%

Exercise XXIII.

ifta*:
*

(ace. pi.)

Especially a

pile of her

**

%*r%

husband
in

i

R

i

vf-msmfewt

widow who immolates
;

whence Anglo-Indian

"Even though
"^R

^*k

^ ^r:

herself on the funeralsuttee.

they exist".

composition often conveys the idea of imitation.

Lesson XXIII.

m^mI
*rnt

farnft"

5

i

m

i

<pzra:

^fwr

tott

i

i

*rrfr

^RTfa

XXIV.

(gen.

97

du.)

-?^fr *nr*rr *nct-

^%

*TfTfar

i

We

14.

who
is

good

blame the driver who strikes (part.) the horses.

19.

16.

praised.

The warrior who conquers

are the two great ones.

He who

A

15.

qo

i

The

lives (part.)

In the field I

18.
is

to-day

maiden, making

shall punish a wife

child

was

(gen.)

flying about

saw

dead to-morrow.
21.

birds flying.

who

Dwell among good men.

steals (part.) his

afraid (use subst.

,

The word

20.

garlands, sits on a stone.

(W^ )

band

battle

(part.) in

the heavenly bodies the sun and

Among

17.

of the good must be followed (done).
22.

i

punishes (part.) the bad and gives (part.) food to the

attains great fame.

moon

*rr

^sra

i

i ^*j:

5

firfN N<Tt*lTrn;: f4«K4i trct3*Ri ^nf**ft

king

^

A

23.

hus-

24.

property.

no copula) of the bees

The

(abl.)

in the house.

(*&{)

Lesson XXIV.
Declension.

263.

jp?r

(fjr[)

are possessives.
inflection

nom.

*nft.

In

rich ',

*

IprT

,

'

They

^(^

(or 1R{), cont'd.

B. Stems in

Adjectives formed with these

are declined precisely alike

;

and

suffixes
differ in

from the participles in ypt{ only by lengthening the ^J

in the

'

Stems in

and ^*<^ (^fO-

masc.

sing.

the

celebrated

The two

The feminine

dual neut. «^

is

made

never inserted.

is

in

^;

thus,

^ft-

3

Thus,

if\4{«d

,

'
:

adjectives ^<J«ri

,

'so great', 'so many', and f^-

'how great?' 'how many?' are similarly

Perry, Sanskrit Primer.

declined.
~

Lesson XXIV.

98

Neuter.

Masculine.

Dual.

Singular.

Plural.

nv. ^fta^ ^fonft ^ft*rf^

n.

^fant ^fNnft

5H*Mtt

a.

^fonw*t

«H*i*i^

I.

^ffacTT

*FI*l*mH -sn+ir^t^

l.

^forf*

sftoii^

V.

31>*K

A

264.

»

»

»

»

as in the masculine.

-sfftraj

stem *T^nT* (to be carefully distinguished from *f«Tn^,

pres. part. act.

of

W)

as
frequently used in respectful address

is

a substitute for the pronoun of the second person.
strued with the verb in the third person.

*T3Tt (fem. *T^*ft); and

^^^,

voc.

is

there!"; and

a
is

*p^, and

^rs^,

common

Ht^

^

is

genders.

It

sing.

the contracted form of

5

is

con-

masc.
its

is

older

^^,

"^r5^-

These are made by the

The stem has a

it

is

in

triple

form.

is

In the strong cases

lengthened to ^JT, in the

cases the
general dropped; in the middle

dropped, and
In the neuter,

suffixes

are, with one or two exceptions, masc.

and

of the masc. the vowel of the suffix

final

nom.

often doubled.**

and neut. only.

weakest cases

Its

exclamation of address: "you, sir!", "ho,

Derivative stems in

265.

Plural.

Dual.

Singular.

it

is

also lost in

the nom.

sing,

of all

the nom.-acc. pi., as being strong cases,

the same cases in the dual (as
lengthen the vowel of the suffix;-

weakest cases) lose
or
the

^

of

•*% is

J^

and

^—

but this only optionally.

^^, when

Examples: TT^ffi

'name'; ^||4H m., 'soul, self; sTlF*
*

After the

^

by a consonant,

retained in all the weakest cases, to avoid too great an

accumulation of consonants.
n.,

these are preceded

Probably contracted from

**

^fr^

loses

its final

^

sonants; thus, *ft *ft ^pj(.

*J7R^

n.,

m



'king'; «TT*T*t

'devotion'.

'blessed'.

before all vowels and all sonant con-

Lesson XXIV.

100

Vocabulary XXIV.
Yerbs:
cut

ft^ + ^ra

off.

rub

polish.

off,

ni.,

in geni-

;

n-, birth.

f.,

f^]|*l

f^T

n.,

name

of a metre.

day.

word

f-

gmU!,

(of

(brahman

supreme

devotion;

God)

;

^tT

5
!.

->



°^T, second.

-

kind

-

<4^c(«rlv strong,

mighty.

*TT^«fT shining, brilliant.

a personifi- TTffTRnT

All-Soul, the creator.

l^f,

ashes.

f^*T,

kin g«

n«j hair.

^"Bf n., year.

^TTTTT

(263).

how much?

sacred *f?TcjnI,f.^<f^,honorable; blessed.

Tffft m., ascetic.

<M«t m

much

°^rr, poor; niggardly.

f

m., meeting, encounter.

shrewd, prudent.

how much,

cation of the preceding) m., the zrr^«rT

^^•l. n ">

great?

sociable.
n.,

knowledge; the world-spirit.
9|$r«l

how

fil^qi-e^ saying pleasant things,

pot, vessel.

sacred

so great, so

fH«J«MH

(brahman)

STSPl,

in respectful address).

f%fc(>

m., hell.

n.,

nSJTEWrT long-lived (often used

diq^n so much, so many.

Tjf^}«^ m., bird.

XTT^

border, boundary; oat-

f.,

P**l«d

<f«j<*H n., temple.

«T^i

(udvejdyati)

tpfT m., slayer, killer.

^<M«d

bank, shore.

tft"^ n.,

caus.

Adj.:

deed; ceremony; fate.

Tflf*^ n., hide, skin; leather.

W1F{

in

skirts.

one's own.

tive, his, etc.;
n.,

f^T +^%

^fl^*^

soul, self; often as sim-

ple reflexive pronoun

m$P{

varndyati) de-

terrify.

Subst.:
^JT3I«T.



scribe, portray.

in caus. (mdrjdyati) rub,

jf^l

(denom.

^TJJ^f

as many.

o^RT: harsh, rough.

f.

f.

°*«ft,

pervading,

far-

reaching; omnipresent; mighty.
fcf,

f

01?Srr

-

(pass. part,

killed.

Adv.:
MI^TUI

commonly.

of ^5f)

XXIV.

Lesson

101

Exercise XXIV.

TTTf'TT fcT^l

TTf?

^%^

^* 1^

^

I

MUn^4lU|

^rrf^r

TO^nT <MM**lijmfafTT ^nj R HT^nr^ 3 f^nft ^rreT^TP^T-

Vein

^^
I

|

f^Trro:

i

it^t ^wre^r

fl[5n<pft

*reg:

rf

^

i

^Rxrerni

«r

ii

outskirts

of this

«w

i

^p^fwt

i

^rro

14.

shoes

their

A

made

temple of

village,

(use

blessed

to

your (-4(|(4H
in

the

>

which
§ 234).
earth.

were

omnipresent

is

It

19.

21.
22.

is

18.

20.

the body,

Candragupta was

by

the enemy.

occurs (f^TT pass.) also the Tristubh.
is

by

birth a

*ftof*r

^n%<v-

caws.)

of leather

Qudra;

the ascetic Mitratithi.

let

16.

in the

15.

Let him

The

servants

river.

children (du.)

world-spirit

,

is

tell

me

described

by the seers that the world-

That part of the
is

called

the mighty

All the mighty warriors

killed in battle

The

said

(use or. recta).

encompassed by

efi

(jpL).

O

!?•

XftO-

gen- du.) names.

many Upanisads.

spirit is

ii<fcR*i3i*iir«i

two celebrated poets were

the

that

king

(use or. recta with

coming

i

i

Visnu stands

on the bank of the

rub off the vessels diligently with ashes

announced

*rfa TTfsr

$

ii

or wood.

(instr.)

i

^

i

i

Brahmaus have

13.

?rfa:

f^rrf^

^ar^i ^4i^«j'M0renft f%ftft wnf*\
*t% tjfcwr^r fire 3% itfT**JT*wir wr-

wz\ ^%5 ^f^

5T?ra:

|

i

^fr^r^wt (gen) *

*rf?m<ft

fdBwra ^fwf ^ wri to t
St

f^I^ HNfnl ^^TfW I MT

^t*rrf*T

who
23.

world-spirit,

the soul of

emperor

man

(cf.

of the whole

fought in Krsna's army

In the Rigveda (^Jr[ pi.)

24.

The king

of Pataliputra

him not marry the beautiful daughter of

XXV.

Lesson

102

XXV.

Lesson
268.

which hecomes ^Tt.

suffix is TRiC.?
is

shortened to ^«^ in the voc. sing.

is

contracted into \JU

A

^cT-

and

;

union-vowel ^,

in

in

^

before ^3TJ

JJ before

Radical

formed

%

with

,

from

^,

but

it i3

^[

and

f^,

if

preceded

preceded by more

if

^3

always bef*T-

The feminine stem

stem -form;

weakest

changed to

Thus, f^«Tlqn^,

"^.

^^-

^ITr^i
the

masc, and

and middle cases,

whereas radical

;

and radical ^?,

WJ

sing,

the middle cases

than one consonant, become ^TJ

fU T^"^'

nom.

present in the strong

if

become

one consonant,

comes

In the strong cases the
the

In the weakest cases the suffix

disappears before ^11 in the weakest.

by

The

^t^.

of the perfect tense-system are quite peculiar as

modifications of the stem.

the

regards

Perfect Active Participles in

Declension.

active participles

thus,

is

fa«gqV

Examples:
1.

f^T^

'knowing':
Neuter.

Masculine.
Singular.

n. fa^Tt;

Dual.

f^rcft

f^fwi;

i.

t^^rr

f^srro; f^rf^r

l.

fa^fa

fwf^c f^i

v.

f^r.

f^ra:



wf*H ej i^[

Another form of
as above,

f%^
-n

"fa^fr
y>

Plural.

ft$ UA
\

n

as in the masculine.

'having gone'*

strong and middle stems
is

n.v.

f^ranw^:

a.

'2.

Singular. Dual.

Plural.

KTira

.

pert.

part,

OIJMJ^

of this verb (3TJRQ makes the

and

SRP^;

the weakest form

XXV.

Lesson

103
Neuter.

Masculine.

Dual.

Singular.

Plural.

n.

wft^Tt ^fuHjtO

°^"Rra:

a.

^n^«ii^H

«n{jmi

I.

L.

»

Dual.

Singular.

Plural.

*tft*H<t wro^fr *in*Hifa
»

»

»

as in the masculine

3N*jMT

°«f^I11

°TT^a:

^rmfa

«N*jMt*t

^fr^^r

V. *ffr*TcR

Stems "^«^, ^T^«^.

269.

?m*{

m.,

n.,

'young',

The stems ^5^ m., 'dog', and

have as weakest stems "sp^ and

the strong and middle cases they follow

Fern. *pft and

tj^inj

^jffi;

in

SPPT-

*?f«^,

^fTT.

The stem If^qn.

270.

voc.

m

->

'generous'

(in

the later language

almost exclusively a name of Indra), has as strong stem JJTPfpT,
mid. o^T, weakest

T^ffr

The stem ^^5^

271.

Norn.

n.,

sing.

is

'day',

«|V|c|'|,

used only in the stroug and

weakest cases, the middle, with the nom.
or ^STf^

Thus

^ft or

^f^

L.

^Tft«T or ^rf>

(o^)

\W^

or

^TfW
^T^-

of them have only two stem-forms
in

^

or

^f TO

adjectives formed

:

a strong

in ^SH3

while others distinguish from the middle in
^pr^;
in

(T( ) or

before which the tR
x^,

^

(^)

into $" or ^f.

from the weakest (or weak) stem
stems of

The

with prepositions and other words are quite irregular.

Some

ceding

^^Tf«I

^[f\

weak

weakest stem

^WT

Plural.

H£\*{

Compounds with

this root

coming from

Dual.

Singular.

from

sing.,

:

N.A.V.

272.

Fem.

voc. °^«^.

this sort are as

follows

:

;

is

<4|-d

a

contracted with a pre-

The fem.

thus ,

and a

fefM-41-

is

made with

The

^

principal

104

Lesson

X

Strong.

TTT^ 'forward', 'eastward'

3JT1I

^K^ra 'downward'

^RTTOf

105

XXV. XXVI.

Lesson

Exercise XXV.

^r f^jt

^ft

||

i

r

i

i

i

11

Maruts.
dispute.
16.

17.

«w

f^flr-

3

i

,

n

^r

i

$

i

fs*ifa; «nm**i-

i

i

fa*ra

*<Wi

^fw infNi ^1-

11

13.

Young

15.

Sarama

Great
In

:s

8

Vrtra was killed (TpL, caws.

12.

i

i

:

^ m4fci^ wm v^iri
^raw:

q

^ trt: <tiMm f^n%*r f^cftSr «rtTfa ^if^ c t^NY fa^: ^f wr*t«i

*npif*?T

frnsN grrgia

||

wsf^sfHm vi tim«ii«ik<i^

i

^fwM^SidiH

yrnrafq g^
fsf

q$

^r<f\'^^f^T 3Tdl^m«siJi^rm

^r^fr ^srra^

ir^r

W^

f^TT *pN

flRRTl *T«f?r *pf
iTT^rt f^fir

is

(^J-ftpTT)

must stand by day

the

let

assembly
the law.

14.

by Magbavan and the

Two

called in the Rigveda the

18.

(ace.)

by the young warrior.

learned

dog

(/.)

best

among

the

learned

Those who have committed
and
20.

sit

Brahmans

of the gods.

west (expr. as pred., nom. pi).

forests are found in the

the

/>ass.)

women sang a song.

by

19.

night.

Turned toward

evil

teach

deeds

Glory was attained

the east (nom. sing.) let

(Hm1) is the quarter (t^T() °f
Day by day one must worship (VR) the sun. 22. The

one reverence the gods; the east
the gods.

21.

gazelle has been killed

by dogs.

23.

The

lion is

king of forest-

dwelling animals.

Lesson XXVI.
Some
k

273.

41Jcj|

274.

1.

TOTT,

f.,

Irregular Substantives.

mother': voc.

sing.

^rt^T m., 'friend': sing.

dat. ^(§r, abl.-gen.
^TCfTCt,

^<R.

num.

TOT,

ace.

loc. *Hstf|, voc.

TOI*1R,

*r%

;

inst *

du. «<aicT|,

Lesson XXVI.

106
OTft*U

^r<a**NH>

the rest like ilfain

composition, and

2.

trfff m.,

when meaning

loc.

abl.-gen. M<*|^,

Tfiif,

ace.

275 The neuter stems
.

^r=r1|f^T or 4ffcf>U{, etc.

master'; when meaning

'lord,

276.

^p^ft

1.

'

'

eye

tJ(^J«^

'

bone

-4|*-vy«^

,

;

the rest of the inflection

%ft, ace.

f« ?

f^q*^

or ^fr{,

instr.

f^TT-

fM<IIH; du ft^ft* W\ «J 11

ace.

fijKI^ or

-

1.

W;

^^,

^|T^

instr.

normal ones

,

ace. sing.

^TTTt

pl-

1.

etc.

;

'

"SR^f

,

3"W3C.i

made from

cor-

pl.

its final is

^PHJ.,
2.

nom.

thus,

sing,

f^

nom

-

f^RH>

gen. *$Tl«m*v

i

nstr

f.,*



pl.

3.

f^^,

Stem

"^

-

changed to

^f^^

<*"

be-

dat.-abl.

'sky', makes nom.

or

^ff^^

^Pff m.,

instr.

m. (rarely

TT^TTetc.; du. Tj^ft,

^SRIOT.

Not

^"f^lf.),

:

'wealth':

TTWT^, TTOtl;

pl-

etc.

(from

^R^ + ^Bff

strong stem -4M^li£\ mid. ^5f«f^2

sing. "4T*f^fT«^, voc.
all



f<^1, nom. -ace.

^TCI,

i.e.) 'ox':

makes

curds

but the root becomes ^T before consonant-endings

(nom. and ace),

278.

nom.

^VJ«^

(sometimes) ^TT^^; the endings are the

the cases are found in use.

sing. -*J*[,

ace.

^^TTR;, loc. ^n§-

-

sing, ^ffa^, du.

T^l

,

etc.

f^foU

>

^t^t.,

nom. -4Hm^,

thus,

^T?H> g en

all

'

'

dat.f^ff, abl.-gen. f^qit^,

'water', only pi.;

f.,

VRll,

'goddess of fortune', makes nom. sing. Ht^TI^-

loc.

277.

is

'woman', follows a mixed declension;

2. ^jsftf.,

thus,

inst. sing.

T^ft.

responding stems in X; thus, nom. sing. TjrfW

fore

^rNfij^;

'thigh', form only the weakest cases; thus, -^tI^T?

fl^^T5!



instr.

*«|^,

declined regularly (like ^ifM)

is

follows ^rf^f in the following forms:

it

'husband',
dat.

nom. ^r^T^C.,

pi-





2.

,

'

cart-drawing',

weakest

The stem TJ«SR

•«f«i^|!

;

m., 'road',

the strong cases, with irregular nom. sing. M««Ht^;

the

corresponding middle cases are made from nf%J, and the weakest

from

TJ^;

thus,

ace.

sing.

tJ38n«}^, dat.

XJ%,

In the older language oftener masculine.

ace.

pl.

TO^b

Lesson XXVI.

[The stems

dat. qf^|ttf{^.

m.,

JR^^

an epithet of Indra, are said

The stem

279.

stem
q^rr,

voc.

etc.,

tpr^

du.

;

is

Vft*^

M^l^^l

sing. l|4J|«^,

jj*«rm;, Y^t^c;

iprftfT,

The strong

very irregular.

weakest xj^. Thus,

TJ*^,

and

'stirring-stick',

ra.,

to follow l|d!|«^.]

'man',

m.,

tfaj

MtUt^, mid.

is

107

^Ti^,

pi-

ijftns; etc., ij*.

5^^,

For

280.

the stem

5RJ

f



,

'age',

with vowel -endings forms from

cases

281.

||^

282.

and,
ace.

Mld*^,

xn^,

compounds,

pi.

substituted in the

f. ;

ST^TI or

thus,

nom.-voc.-acc. of any

composition), these being supplied from £<£41 n.

in

The stem T[£

in

make

does not

'heart',

n.,

number (except

may be
<q4<fl

instr.

TJ^T,

f^M<^,

'foot',

m.,

becomes VJ'S

in

strong cases;

middle cases also; thus, nom. sing. XJT?,

in the

From f^'?

etc.

'biped', ace. sing.

[The stem XTT^ m.,

f^nf^-

instr. pi.

f^[-

'foot',

has the complete declension of a-stems.]
283.

becomes
and

its

;

ace.

root ^5^ 'slay', as final

nom.

and loses

sing.,

member

its

of a compound,

«^ in the

^f in the weakest cases (but only optionally

Further,
Tl

The

Iff in

thus,

when

^

^J^«^m.,

°flp^*,

instr.

-

-killing a

WisT^T,

du TOlHlft °f«IT^
284.

^ in

is lost,

The stems UM«^

personifications

the

of

Brahman', makes nom.
loc.

nom.

W^f^

or

make

the

nom.

compound words, an

original

voc.

°f^;

n. pr.

(both

°^^.
na.

,

sing,

otherwise do not lengthen the ^J; thus, nom. VRJ, ace.

In

loc. sing.).
its

sing. 3fi|rC>

°ffl»r,

fTTJ^, ace.

m., n. pr., and 3r$RT*t.

sun),

:

contact with «^ reverts to

etc.,

etc.; pi.

middle cases
i

altering cause in one

in

^tt,

but

TjpEpTJ?^, instr.

member some-

But a
following member.
guttural or labial in direct combination with «^ sometimes prevents
the combination, as in the instr.
S^f^TT.
times

lingualizes

a

«^

of

the

next

108

Lesson

XXVI.

Vocabulary XXVI.

?m

Verbs:

^

move

in caus. (arpdyati)

;

put; hand over,

;

(tfpyatO De pleased or satis-

tied, satisfy

f^

«jTt^ -f

give.

caus.

in

if^ (guhati)

send

or satiate oneself.

(vildpati) complain.

(guhdyati)

hide away, conceal.

ITTT3

Subst.:

"^rWl (^rN)

n.,

eye.

m., faithfulness.

^STsTtta

l»'t|lfll

f- 3

ftp?,

°^n

(part, of

f*!-*nO,

f.

^TJ, beneficent, gracious,

blessed.

protection.

n.,

f-

ordained, fixed, permanent,

foot.

TfZ m.,
M|t«M

saint.

°^TT, one-eyed.

m., biped.

(weakest \$faQm.,w./w\, f^ffi,

a Vedic

(homo).

four-footed, quadruped,

^ff^T^

fl^

divinity, deity.

f.,

THHQ

•qjTW

thought, mind.

n., notice,

man

vow, obligation, duty.

Adj.:

n!|W^ m., demon.

f^rT

m.,

sT?T n.,

Exercise XXVI.

wt *rfw^ft ^HuiHsfti^ *ifcwii
WRf *TT*TC %W f^RIff £^fTi

sTtto;

sTTTO;

hi^H wi <tpr;

«H<4«riicH^i£)

H^r4^HI^|

I

S

I

«*8

II

flTTr%

i

II

tpSJT'TO:

I

^

I

^ 1%bt rpRTFtK WW WRTfa 8 W!W*ri ^FH<f<^ src^snw; q %*r xren wfrwt «gHii*< $ ^t
TRT^n^^T ^) jfoi: *Tf WTTPT+I^isrc *= I g*P*Wi
I

I

I

i

*

^jfa

f^T

I

^

I

i

«m

i

I

i

^rf^":

fqcIT

^f^rf^T
i

Trfr ^w*<5iM ^VKjnz

^TWt ^
|

^*f^t

i

i

I

I

€t:

TR

$<(§$

^W

Q.

i

I

q8

I

*?TrTT

Wt

T^TR

I

i

I

W^^T T WR<T T ^

«io

S?

i

I

wt

iffT

^

$M\M\

rTTTtym^^l-

^prrsrre^T \^wi: vr*ri u\$M<n

cnfa^

XXVI. XXVII.

Lesson

The meeting of the men and women took place on the
In the Veda they call the sun Pusan, Mitra (m.), Aryaman,

18.

road.

19.

and Savitar.
deities in
21.

Be

view
a

20.

,

O

(use

named

HMHQ

ana< in

also

27.

sacrificial
22.

^p^

with a bone of DadhyaSc.

Mother,

food

the

that fire is to be found in the water (use

24.

23.

The Asura was

Who knows

satisfy (fft^ cans.) the

brought (use ^n-«ft,

The Maruts

cans.,

slain

The
,

the

formulas.
seers'

and make

by Maghavan

the wind's path (pass.)

child with
pi.)

among

(*N!J4J, pass.)

Civa, to biped and quadruped.

gracious,

is

is

Water

Rik

the

direct statement with ^ff?f).

25.

109

curds.

from our

26.

friend's

?

Have
house.

are Maghavan's friends.

Lesson XXVII.
285.

are

Demonstrative Pronouns*

made up with

pronouns

-4|i|4^

as $rf|^ and

Two

demonstrative-declensions

particular irregularity: they are those of the

and ^TOT (for which the natives give the stem-forms

^T2^

respectively).

The

first is

a more indefinite de-

monstrative: 'this' or 'that'; the other signifies especially the re-

moter

relation.

Lesson XXVII.

110

Neuter: Nom.-acc. sing.
is

du.

<^H>

^^t

pi.

^**

^raTO*^:):
Feminine.

Masculine.

Dual.

Sing.

Plural.

Dual.

Sing.

TMH

i.

^nprr



^ijjuiih

w^





-^rgfispt

W^

^RHl

wffiro:

^r^n

wM^:

^^m^



accentless,
falls

upon

inj^,

f.)

Tpn'f'I,

HdU,
^

a

IpTl^C; instr

f-

-

n -> TJ%; gen.-loc. m.,
f.

— These

TpTT^-

©•»

©sN»

the rest

pi. ^5TTF*T;
©s

^Sfjf,

©\

unchangeable

defective pronominal stem

The only forms

it.

du.

final $^ of ^l^ft is

is

and hence used only

n. TT«n?>

m. T|^T,
n.

The

There

288.

©v

^nn;

-sufttj

Neuter: Nom.-acc. sing.
like masc.

Plural.

©»

©\

A.

l.

the rest

5

like the masculine.

287.

d.

ff*t

in situations

§

(cf.

1J«T

161).

which

,

are the following: Sing. ace.

m

->

f.,

^T>

n ->
n.,

is

where no emphasis

f-

11*1*1

^«i«Ti^. PI- » cc

m.

Du. acc

1-

-

m

-

-

H.ii«l,>

forms may be used only when the

person or object to which they refer has already been indicated by

a form of

Hm

1

or TJ^.

HM*{

Thus,

^[Sr ^JT^JH^IT^'T

M *| "this one has read the art of poetry

289.

Past Passive Participle in TTor

in a comparatively

small

;

«T.

teach

By

number of verbs,

«T

«MI«h<*U-

him grammar".

the suffix 7f



is

— or,

formed,

di-

with any tenserectly from the root of the verb, and unconnected

stem, a verbal adjective called the past passive participle.
fern,

ends always in

transitive verbs,

it

°^S[J.

qualifies

expressed by the verb; thus,

When made from

When

this

is

participle

The

made from

something as having endured the action

^tT

dattd, 'given';

^5 uktd,

an intransitive or neuter verb

,

the

w

spoken'.

same par-

Lesson XXVII.

Ill

has no passive, but only an indefinite past, sense; thus, JHTt

ticiple

Wf, 'been';

gone',

monly,

TJTffrT, 'fallen'.

This participle

290.

it

also,

often used as an adjective.

is

^

of nfl^, 'be', or

frequently used as a substantive

and also as nomen

Sometimes

actionis.

'

^tH^

thus,

;

'he

*fcf:

was written".

letter

when made from

tion, particularly

^

to be supplied; thus,

is

*niT Wft fcfRsId^ "by me a

a

Very com-

when some form

supplies the place of a finite verb,

is

'

gift

gone";

The neuter
'

^7^1*^

;

is

milk

'

;

has a present significa-

it

neuter verbs

thus, f^gHT (from

;

^gn) often 'standing'.
291.

A. With suffix

Certain roots in

1.

be

ift 'swell,

f^
the

The

A

or

f%

^J

few roots ending

J^

'swell', *T*T;

^;

'break',

^f;

in 5f

number of

(which becomes
'cut',

292.

^

roots,

before

Some few

t^Rd;

f^TCjT

Commonest

*^5

«f:

or

5R.

which before

pres. pass.; thus,

2effi

before the

*J

*TSTV 'sink',

«T)

;

W,

Also one or two others
^ffl

^J;

'attach',

^*J

some

^

«T):

,

them very common,

of

jg^

;

(f?j_^r,

in

W

f^^;) f^r

fa^.*

?nt or

from

«T 'cut',

(which becomes

'fear', f^Cf.

X5fT

'wither', ^TPf;

f-rootsj,

1*J5^ 'bend', *J^;

f%5T

^T

^wm

A

4.

|JT*T;

^ (so-called

which exhibit a guttural before the
'cut up',

taken by a number

and u- vowels; thus,

i

'abandon',

^^ or ^f^\ as in the
<W; 15 (u$ 'fill', iw-

H,

'be sick',

"^5f

in

TfT

roots in variable

(fa$, ^;
3.

suffix «T is

becomes

suffix

thus,

The

and

tSTT,

fat', lft«T;

destroy', ^\U[;
2.

M>

«f

Thus:

of roots.

from

*jfli(rl

^^

verbs

make double forms;

'acquire',

exceptions:

?T^

<=U f«( H

'rejoice';

*

speak';

f^

fcf'f^'cf

from *slT^
from

^f^cT

from

thus,

*3["^

'hasten',

or f^rT-

f^^

'

^

'know'.

e»t

'

j

Trf from

'weep'; ^ff^cl

112

Lesson XXVII.
Vocabulary XXVII.

Verbs:

^? + ^T
+ f^

2eF

3RER1

(upeksate) neglect.

(vikirdti) scatter.

+ ^T^

(den.

+

+

(uttdrati)

caus.

yoke,

(yojdyati)

cling,

adhere.
settle

(sldati) sit,

down; be

overcome, exhausted.

fat.

Snbst.:

f«J<JlU m., wedding, marriage.

nom.

pr.

Acvins (the Indian Aio?

m.

•M\-q\^

,

the

,

xovpoi).

"walk and con-

versation"; conduct of

ob-

life,

I|«(T

^f

n

«

>

life

bed.

i'-,

n.,

-i

*ft*l«l n., meal-time,

(part, of 2f^J) reduced, de-

i.

e.

meal.

rffa

f-

^ST[,

ledge;
student.

na.j

demon.

acquisition, gain.

tft) fat.

5(^^rF<«t studying sacred know-

*^l|e$ m., sweet drink.
JpffT t, pearl,

great, strong, violent.

iffa (part, of

H^Tni., n.pr., a Vedic personage.

na..,

plough.

chain, garland.

cayed ; ruined.
of holiness,

religious studentship.

^l^jtl

illness.

Adj.:

^TJF

hunger.

f.,

ra.,

m.,

debt.

n.,

qrcrH] m., n. pr. a mountain.

^W^Th

^UfV

IT^rj m., car.

^TT m

servance.

mJH

enjoy.

(mdjjati) sink.
in

^T^

"^JpyHt m. du.,

^pj

+ ^R

xrfT (paribhdvati) despise.

^PI Qdgati) attach; bang,

emerge, come

or TEn (pyayate) become stout

^PJ

+

eat.

harness.

(avatdrati) descend.

^Sf^(

^^

or

*f

*{V3\

out.
TJT

break.

\3^ , in cans, (uccardyati) ^pT

pronounce, say.
<?

(bhaksdyati)

2^*r

— avagandyati)

despise.

^^ +

}^T
Vffi

as

m.

subst.,

Brahman

Iffa (part.) abandoned; wanting
in

;

and so sometimes w.

= 'without'.

instr.,

Lesson XXVII. XXVIII.

113

Exercise XXVII.

6

Cs.

5r*Rrf^T *RJ <ftw

gWrT <n

ttt^cW: *wr *f

t: frrar

fN

$

I

ttwf&h

«w

II

<\o

i

"^ WX

M*U<«1<*

I

i

that other world

these jewels.
18.
19.

The

14.

(gen.*)

13.

This

learned

with

*

I

in

on

me

women

(pass, part.) the

on the neck of

queen.

we were

this
in

20.

A

demon.

fortune?

(?f3( caus.).

withered.

are

delighted with
the plough.

the

water.

chain of pearls
21.

22.

What

sin

This garden

is
is

men and women.

XXVIIL

Past Passive Participle, cont'd.

B With

suffix

Much more commonly

<f.

this parti-

"I am so-and-so; N. or M."

Perry,

*=

^^,

praised by us,

Without union-vowel ^.

**

I

that mountain Kailasa,

(use pass. part, of
is

The peasant yoked two fat oxen to
Brahman emerged (pass" part.) from

Lesson
I.

W

In order to attain (5TW, dat.) this and

who was

(pass, part.)

293.

f^wnif

*rci

the priest offered sacrifice for

not committed by persons reduced
filled

^ft

17.

Here comes

hung

i

i

|

flowers in the garlands of these

that king,

By

i

i

II

which Qiva dwells.

16.

8

^

ifw^: r
^ ^r^w

t^I** vrerofimT ^rro ^T^T^rnt *rw$ t^

nom.) to these sick persons.

The

i

II

^ *pWMM*H«t^f:

Have medicine given quickly

12.

15.

I

<N

li

*Rrra*rarftraf?r

g*rre f^rNww^Tnnsrf^r **r:

WECQi

%<t

irar**^* Tf^wrrf^^rot

^ft

i

<*IIVj^l^(TT:

Translate the pronoun-forms by 'here', and
Sanskrit Primer.

cf.

8

§ 225.

114

Lesson XXVIII.

made by adding

ciple is

from ^TT;

"fa?T

1FH from

the suffix

bare root

to the

<l

thus,

;

f^\; ^r{ from

from f^; f^Jf from

^

"%Tr[

(or ^rr);

^c^.

root end in a consonant other than

If the

294.

^

Final

1.

and

become

51

from ^fj Tjffifi from (Zf^.
becomes TJ
2. Final TT
becomes Z;

final "q, ?^

W2

and
to

1.

made from

are

^f

Tfir

makes THJ; and cT^, rfHFinal \r becomes 2", and H

f^J from

and f^r from

,

comes

\J

N

;

^U

thus,

frorry

^

torical value,

treated in

is

a.

q^rs

^

,

Sometimes

various ways, according to

^ combines

^ft(S

from f%f, "^5 from

W% forms W{i£.

bination

is TOJ;

The

*&%.

,

with c^ to form

1.

A

in ifVtT

from

;

where

*n<g from

but

^g

from

TJ

the

com-

^

,

q[rfcf

from

represents

weakest form,

there

weak

usually has

is

^^

from

same abbreviation here;

from ^T^j

,

his-

before

if

^T

5Rf|from^T^, ^f5 from^^;

f^U

«fijj

its

<|,

system a distinction of strong and

rf

Roots which are abbreviated

suffer the

c

penultimate nasal

^j

from

thus,

;

7(JVf.

be-

«HJ.

root before
in the verbal

Thus:

^^5 W3

;

^f Tf% from ?T^;
^ represents original

from ^f; ftTHf from f<r%;

thus, <n*J

makes

The

any where

forms.

Where

root 31^ forms also

original \f

295.

b.

W

.

which short vowels (except ^J) are lengthened

TTf,

2.

*nj

.

contrary

,

and the following

;

from ^fW
^

?:3tT

,

tf

<i

Final

4.

is

f^TJ

Tfvl

Jfi£
3.

"%%•

from f^f^;
^"35

ffjtjfi

from ^*{;

^g
and

:

which, as also after radical

after

,

thus,

thus,

"^;

^,

35, <^, X^,

the ordinary rules of euphonic combination apply as follows

in

the

e. g.,

1[J 'sing', tfttf

from

3.

dropped;
(or

^RO;

e. g.,

^T

weak forms

^STfS

from

from jfo.

of the perfect

^f^i from ^x£> ^f{ from ^T^,

^gfrom"?^

rrg from JH£.

its

(the

Final

same form from ^151

^SR

is

1X(J 'drink'; to

weakened

^

in

to

);

%

f^StH from

1&1> f^fi fr° m ^TT 'put' (with \J also changed to ^), f^T<T from

115

Lesson XXVIII.
and a few others.

?TT 'measure',

A

4.

^

final

after "H in

lost

is

TFT, T?Tj Trf, T<T (from *rj^ etc.); and likewise final
rHT,

^rT, ^rT (from

<HrT,

from ^JTH;

^TcT

More

296.
1.

Some

^»TnT,

TRT,

from

^J«^

sfa

roots in

'play'.

tSUI.

make

participles

Sf^, ^«^, and ^pf^ make WTTT

3.

The

root

from

^TnT, HT«rT- ^TTnT,

clTnT,

The

^TnT>

contracted form

etc.

widely found

is

^f

form \J{,

The

With union- vowel ^.

II.

^T«rT>

thus,

forms ^TtT (from the derivative form

'give',

l^T,

in

cfi^ etc.

especially with prepositions; thus, JfZy\ or TTrf,

297.

in ^J<T,

irregular are the following:

2.

'S'Z)-

^

cases are flJIJ

Isolated

5.

etc.).

suffix

in

composition,
or «?TtT> e tc

f^^TT

with ^, or

in

the

regularly used with the derivative verb-stems in se-

is

condary conjugation, also often with roots of derivative character
(like

fll^

,

f^^), and not infrequently with

When

298.

\t{

^J are

stems the syllables
*I«!!*J,

Tftpf;

*lll\ci;

299.

<F3,

caus.

ft,

added

is

dropped

fTTf^rT;

*nx*Tfa> caus

TI^

'fall',

^\

^t^<T-

^If

300.

makes

the auxiliary
301.

^,

TjfacT;

'thirst',

A

^fer?f

roots taking ^7J

^[fxjcf;

^

f^

f^ff^rT;

;

x

thus, Tf^\

,

makes

iff 'lie'

*j{\t{;

few roots form

\;

-

^tf^tf;

P ass

may

P a,t

-

and

4-1

f<f

^

be noticed the

^f^cf;

'dwell',

t^s

,

from

with or without

?T<*.

as participles of the na-formation

a few derivative adjectives, coming from roots which do not

a regular participle; such are ^T*T 'burnt' (Wl)i
'

ri

Pe

'

O^C);

^1,

tf^rT; ^Tf,

Tjfarf.

this participle either

The grammarians reckon

gard' (|i*0; 1*1?

-

^TfTCfH, ^TfacT

following:

^m;

original roots.

and denominative verb-

thus, rT^, pass. part,

;

caus.

*T,

the original

Among

to causative

T^

ofil[

'

'

dry

(^FQ>

make

'thin', 'hag-

5^

'expanded'

(3*08*

116

Lesson XXVIII.

rH^

302. Past ActiTe Participle in

past

pass. part,

is

«fqvO

-

F ron

suffix

»

^*f^

the
(f.

a secondary derivative having the meaning and construction

•qrfr),

of a perfect active participle

This participle

303.

is

;

^d^t^,

thus,

1

Thus, *TT

with copula, tngtftT^g

or,

into great misery".
intransitives; thus,

i.

with the value of a per-

e.,

S^l^ "no

«*Py£

MIH^^f^f "thou

This participle comes

^T

TTf^JT?^'?^.

almost always used predicatively, and

generally without expressed copula,
sonal perfect-form.

me";

(or

made, by adding the possessive

4|<f4|riV

to

one has seen

(fem.) hast

come

be made even from

"she has gone".

Vocabulary XXVIII.
T{^{muhyati) be confused or dazed

Verbs:
fl + U

de-

caus. {pratardyati)

in

ceive.

+

^£*ls

one*1i$+f!ft{(sa7iindkyati) equip

^^

+

^STO besiege.

JT (prardhati)

f^t, +

self.

TT%+ f^-^lTin

caus. (vydpaddyati)

kill.

Tj^rfjj

(pdldyate)

Snbst.
"^Tfrl in.,

+ Tf

f^TGf

honor.

^jj

+

xhr,

:

end; in loc, at

grow

(pravigdti)

up.

penetrate,

in

caus. (pravartdyati)

continue.

flee.

enjoy, eat.

HH+Wl

II

enter.

3f^
*

23T5T

or stupid.

last.

+

,

3Sf^

remain over, survive.

^JTJ

bestrew.

m

citizen.

->

nmn^ m

->

palace.

^gTJRll n -, n Vr -> Delhi.

^J^»f m., Greek, barbarian.

T^

sjTTT^f m., jackal.

-

5TTfT

m., ass.
f-,

^rfT*T n

cave.
>

Tre<f|"4jyi m.,

A

^Tf^r^i m., soldier.

behavior,

nom.

life.

%f?I

^u<m'-root from

n.,

^f*JTt

pr.

^

'go'

+ H^T

army.

m

->

elephant.

'away'.

Lesson XXVIII.

f%TCT

Adj.:

(comp.)

*{*&£

XXIX.

sing, as adv.:

In

more.

117
from

(part,

f%^)

affectio-

nate.

neut.

mostly.

Exercise XXVIII.

gfrnft

fafifw

(abl.)

TT^: ^*T%TfH: 3ffafafTHTf%

n?n(\d: faw^i jj<i«ii4<hm3<i i*:

faiNrRTRf^M n^*i
f^ft

(abi.)

^rrnr:

>2>

i

i

^ff^t

into the city.

ffonfr

wrt

all finite verbs

of the soldiers were killed;
11.

trg^

*rf

force.

The

*if I5-

survived

tcbo

12.

the palaces

slaves

i

;

fled

13.

The Ya-

Finally the

entered the city by

The young and old men were mostly murdered;

14.

«

i

gates of the city were shut fast (^'ST "^Tfa-

proving victorious {past act. part.),

women made

has

irr^Tftr

by participles.)

some

vanas approached and besieged the city (pass.).
,

I

^t^flfcriN

ft?rn)> the citizens equipped themselves for battle.

Yavanas

^

firarr-

pm

trf^nfr

I

^rrfira: n o. n

irgrwrftRT

Many

8 f3faj

1

^rren*jfwfrwf*r.

i

«Ji^«tff^ft:

(In the following render
10.

m

i

*h3mtji^<*j ^aftTra V£H*gi<CMM
xrf^r

Trf^PTTwr <Kifrd:
*Tfta:

^fa ^«TTf^

the

the great possessions of the citizens plundered,

and houses burnt with

fire.

15.

been described by the Yavanas, and

The end
his

of Prthvlraja

previous

life

sung

by the poet Canda.

Lesson XXIX.
304.

Gerund, or Absolutive.

Sanskrit by one of the suffixes

The gerund

^T

and

Jf.

is

made

in classical

118
A.

305.

To uncompounded

^X

usually added directly to

It is

vowel

^

it,

participle in

or

rf

A

»f.

final

suffix <3T.

and

form

to the

closely agrees with that of the

root-consonant

Roots which make the past pass.

before

added the

is

but sometimes with the

to the use of \,

formation

this

roots

the root,

With regard

interposed.

of root before

7J.

XXIX.

Lesson

treated as before

is

part, in «T generally reject

^

^J.

Examples.

Without inserted ^: -sJMI, fw&H, •ft^T,
^*TT>
'place' (cf. ffTf) and from

1.

H^T; f^f^T from ^n, ffWT from l^T
fT,

from ^T

^WT
from

-g^iT

'find'; cTtdl from

ITT from

1*1'

7{ (cf.

f*

*r*t,

^,
2f^

tffaf), TJ^ft

^

TTT from

i

from

*?^7 from J?^, f%T^T from

?ft^T from

^tT),

(cf.

from
^3fj *I^T

from

TJ (cf. tnjf);

§ 295,

(cf.

^^[

*TT;

2),

"SJH from

^fT from

^Sf

,

*f®«rT from ^f*^, ^Tt^T fr° m ^f2.

TO

306.

f^T

or

307.

Some

308.

make

verbs

^HT;

^

from

Iff^T

from

?^

(cf.

B.

Roots

^J.

in

from Tf^

(cf.

both forms; thus, from T^«^ either 1^either

<rrefa*rr;

fT3,

nftWi

Iff^rT),

>*f*?WT or **T^T-

Causatives and denominatives in

^tTf^^rr;

ttt,

^f^T from

With inserted^: f^f^TTfrom lf^^'know',

'dwell',

^f

make ^jf^I^T

;

thus,

wmf?r, wrfimT.

composition witb prepositions (or some-

times with elements of other kinds, as adverbs or nouns) take the
suffix T(, before

which

a short vowel adds

fwaj, ^f^fw,
309.

form

this

^

is

never inserted.

before

Tf.

wta (*rf%r-t)

Roots

^J^ and

in

gerund

(not aw-roots)

able

<T

in

may

^g becomes

A

root which ends in

Thus, MpLUp*^ ^R*nT;

^T3I; thus,

whose
7f^i,

pass.

°^3J.

or ^5JT; thus, °t?V^ °9h«

unaltered; thus, flJT3"RT-

f%-

*fa?w-

^J»^

part,

Some

roots

ends

in

"^Jrf

But such cm-roots

preserve the nasal; thus, °*r*Sr

^T



Final change-

Final ^TT remains

show a weak form before

XXIX.

Lesson
this suffix;

*Rr from

thus,

^-^f

;

"flt^I (T?-"^^l)

3jW

WPS;

HtfU^fH,

O^TT-'ft).

liWWi-

But

tf-cjxT

^~

;

tJRI reject those syllables;

the root ends in a single consonant

and

not lengthened in the causative, then

is

of the caus.

in

itwto; ^r^TT^r; qrprrerefa

ttpttsj;

if

encloses short ^f which
the gerund

from

from f^-^f.

Causals and denominatives

310.

thus,

^^^5

H*JfJ,

119

ends in ^rgr, to distinguish

gerund of the simple verb; thus,

^^-*n^,

ger.

it

"31^7^;

from the
caus. tJT^-

aprerfo g er ^r^w^r.
-

311.

The gerund

or absolutive

junct to the subject of a clause.

denotes an action accompanying

or (usually) preceding that which
clause.

(In

the

later

it

language

used generally as logical ad-

is

It

is signified

by the verb of the

not always confined to the

is

grammatical subject of the clause as an adjunct.)

It

has thus vir-

tually the value of an indeclinable participle, present or past, qual-

ifying the actor

whose action

Thus, cT^ ^TTcfi^
this,

it

describes.

^HT (U^iT ^H^T ^Tf ^TcH

having abandoned the goat,

"

having heard

having bathed, he went to his

own house".*
312.

The gerunds

of

some verbs have not much more than

prepositional value; thus, <4||<^|i| 'having taken',

Greek

Xafiwv, tfuw, 3J^TT

313.

Before

all

'having released',

gerunds

may be

i.e.

i.

e.

'with', like

'without', 'except'.

used the privative

thus, TsjrjjoTwfX" without having received"; -4Mle£tf

~^S[\

or ^J;

"without having

summoned. "
Vocabulary XXIX.

Verbs:
tST^

+

~%n\ acquire,

f^T (nydsyati)

entrust

(to

^

+

U

attain, reach.

go forth

;

die.

one's care).

Of course

the absolutives are often best rendered
by relative

clauses, or even by clauses coordinate with the principal clause.

120
35

Lesson

+ ^rfV

put at the head,

ap- gf!J m., victory.

point as ruler over (Zoc).

^T

+

1?

(pracdlati)

move

XXIX.

f.,

rf^^TT
on,

march.

misfortune.

Tp5r m., wing,' side; party.

5fa m.,

frog.
w. p*-j

consider.
fxf«Sr^ (cintdyati)

^raHT

^

(cydvate) totter,

^rr^ m., hero.

3[T

+

^TT take.

VT + TO^-^TT
•ft

+ f*!^

fall.

Cf. § 312.

•H

sf5|

vvauder forth ;

leave one's

home

wandering

ascetic.

to

n.pr., a

become a

Adj.:

^"HpT

disagreeable.

^!ITH responsible, trustworthy.

W$T,

^TT, little, small.

f.

^f^TSTRT m., plan, design.

(TO,

f.

^TfT^

n.,

THif^r

on tbe head.

qfflj m.,

monkey.

ra, j

fire.

t$V( du., both.

Safest.:

"SRfT'C

monkey-king.

3»7T3J^ (nom. °V^) m.,

(vibhdjati, -redistribute.

+ H(pravrdjati)

means, device.

an f«np^ni.,

end, determine, settle.

*HI + f%

V4«f n.,

Ceylon.

Tfrf m., bridge, dike.

lay or place on.

(nirndyati) bring to

1

f-,

bringing.

o^STT,

daily, regular.

Prepos.:
TTfri (postpos., with ace.) against.

elephant.

Exercise XXIX.

sr^psft

^t^T?c

i

<*

i

^j^rr Tft^T %tt

fn=mimiwi yif*i3 f^^r *pft

%g ^»fxrf*i:

*rorfr

^n

*refr %<j

tth

*pn:

f*nsi»T«T:

i

3

i

i

R

i

>ft*mt *-

*n§rr

f^mr-

^t w^i Trfm ^ Tr*fr TT-

Lesson XXIX.

XXX.

121

After the king had conquered the vassals of the western

11.

kinds he marched (pass, part.) against the eastern vassals.

money and gave

merchants, in joy (pass, part.), took the
to the king (use ger.,
at twilight,

and pass,

13.

constr.).

and placing fagots on the

12.

The

the jewels

"After adoring the gods

fire,

bring water from the

cistern": thus having spoken, the teacher seated himself (pass, part.)

on the mat.

14.

The hero fought

(part.) great glory

(ger.)

with his enemies and gained

by the victory over them

man, abandoning hisown(pZ-), became an
16.

When

pass. part.).

,

his plan to
the merchant had imparted
(f^T-'fa^, caus:)

him

the servant, he sent

into

house had money brought
18.

The Brah-

15.

(gen.).

ascetic (if- sf^f

the village.

(ger.)

17.

The master

and distributed

it

to

of the

the poor.

Let not kings decide law-suits without hearing the arguments

(e||xQ of both

sides.

19.

Whoever

despises powerful foes, and

the means to victory (gen.),
fights with them without considering
20.

perishes.

Whoever becomes an

ascetic without having studied

the Veda, attains (ger.) not salvation, but falls into hell (loc).

Lesson
The

Infinitive.

314.

ending of which

is

later

XXX.

language has a single

7Rf£ (or <rj*0-

The

infinitive, the

when

root takes guna,

possible.
315.
1.

The ending THT

To

almost

and changeable

2.

To

a

all

^.

is

added directly:

roots ending in vowels,

except those in ^R

Thus,

^MH;

tfT,

VWRf{

number of roots ending

;

3[T,

in

consonants.

f^J>

3<JH5

As

root-

XXX.

Lesson

122
g», c^, t^

finals,

and

'curse', TTH**.; 3
the

to

according

^

^C

remain unchanged before

'dwell',

rules

^p^.

nw*; m\, anp;; Tl* ^I*t*;

Final

becomes

«*

'know',

%rpt

316.

roots in

and

<^,

\;

final J{,

The ending

with

cj^;

(in the

^

^,

long ^» and the root

final

thus,

the con-

Thus,

7f.

^fl*5 f\>

n5T|[,

-*tj+U

f^Tcf

T^-

%f\<J*0; T^,

(also

^'

^R,

are changed
for

of final consonants before the participial suffix

version

tt^,

finals

Lesson XXVIII

in

given

— Other

thus,

<TJ^;

form *TJ*0 is taken by
with a few other vowel-

roots; by the majority of roots in consonants; and by verbs of the

Thus,

secondary conjugations.

»?fW7fF{;

ift,

root being treated as iu the present; thus, ^"^,

318.

TO

thus,

319.

Some
,

JJlf^rJH.

The

^V<f*M+iJ

roots in consonants insert or reject

or

TT^**- The

rules for the use of

with those governing

X^v

^farj*U

>

denominatives in "^J have ^rftirj*^ the

Causatives and

317.

*f,

its

use

^

root

^

5^

»

at pleasure;

makes ^J^rT^.

in the infinitive agree

in the

^W

closely

formation of the s-future and

of the vomen agentis in H.
320.

Uses of the infinitive.

The

chief use of the infinitive

is

as equivalent to an accusative, as the object of a verb, especially
of the verbs

*
tR"^
is

^5

'be able', and tJI^

The increments

of

^

are

and ^JT^; especially where a

be worthy', 'have the right

sometimes

^

and

"^

instead of

difficult

combination of consonants

and

derivation, the root

thu9 avoided.
**

In all the tense-systems,

in

exhibits often the vrddhi instead of the ^wna-strengthening.

3J^

Lesson

XXX.

123

or power'; thus, cfiUjfad IJ^ftfrT "he

is

efi^TT* *'the prince ought to hear it".

n!f^ is often thus

able to tell";
sftrj+lffrT

the infinitive to express a respectful request or entreaty,
last

The

example.

infinitive is

also often

used with
as in the

found with verbs of

motion, and with those meaning 'desire', 'hope', 'notice', 'know',

and the

like.

But often the

321.

infinitive

Thus, a dative value: IT^frT

has a case-value not accusative.

"there

^ftWTW^

is

food to eat"

i.

e.

"for eating"; a genitive value: ^f5|^rr TfHJ, "capable of going".

Even a construction

as nominative

force.

Thus, ofm*J|^dej:

not

to

fit

not unknown.

is

In certain connections the infinitive has a ^uasi-passive
"
" it is
to be made "

322.

begun

This

be heard."

passive forms of ^r^i; thus,
but <5J#

»f

^^r^ "he

is

;

^TfT

T

4jWd

especially frequent along

mJR

«f

with the

"he cannot abandon",

IJdiYfil

cannot be abandoned"; «nft

1[Wf^T^<p^

"the two men can be brought hither."
Future Passive Participle, or Gerundive. Certain deriv-

323.

ative adjectives,

mostly secondary, have

like that of the Latin gerundive; thus,

suffixes are three:

A. Suffix

324.
X[;

^3f,

a.

^f.

thus, from

and

Tf^r,

The

be done',
ordinary

Other

b.

final

vowels some-

sometimes have the guna or even the
always, are treated before

~^st[

as before a vowel; thus, from fgj, 5f?J and 5T5I; from *ft, *J^J

and HftS; from
3?T^T



c.

^r, Tsjgj

The
TJ to

and ^TtcB; from

^J(^),

^2T(fJ (^f),

^R2T

original value of this suffix

^J

q?,

^TRI; from

In a few iustances, a short

the suffix; thus,

of

qj) 'to

Before this suffix final radical ^TT be-

vrcWfo'-strengthening; andTJ often, and

*T»

(from

'^vflif.

3"[\ 2"^T; J^\, if^T.

times remain unchanged,

H

cfc|{j

They may be made from every verb.

faciendus.

comes

acquired a value quite

and of

^jft to

^Rf before

(3R).

is ia.
it.

*J, \jRI;

vowel adds
d.

<T

from

before

Medial 1Q remains

Hence

the conversion

124

Lesson

class;
e.

one class of words, and

in

unchanged

thus,

Initial or

XXX.

^3T,

^K(,
medial

but

is

TT^T (^)-

(*T^)>

sometimes have the (/Una-strengthening; thus, f^J, T?T,

^^TST ^THf-

/•

The

the defective root

and -4IM+33T-

g. Causatives

from the

Suffix

infinitival

root and

This

ffolf.

noun

in

<f.

is

^J;

in

thus,

%3T,

makes ^TRP9

3TT-<qTO

and denominatives

*T^T;

form ^8f (from

<

assigned to ^«^.

is

in the present, but omit the syllables

325. B.

A

root ^JT^C makes f^TSJ.

^J )

another

in

lengthened

TTlZf

and r- vowels are sometimes unchanged,

u,

i,

^RT,

^r are treated as
^T, ^Y^-

a secondary adjective derivative

Hence, both as regards the form of

the use or omission of

the rules are the

^,

same

as for

the formation of the infinitive; thus, ^3)^1, ^faq^r, cJi^rfH^T
^f'??F*t (ift).

326.

-^m

C. Suffix

[^Hlfter]-

radical

Generally

atives

in

syllables

327.

^STO are treated as in the present- system,

^T;

thus,

^\ + \i\

The gerundives

common

in "Jf^f are

without the

^TWfa

(^T), J|l«fl*J (*TT),

in the

vowels

and denomin-

will be found gunated before this suffix; causatives

(^),

*ft-

impersonal pas-

sive construction described in Lesson X, and not seldom have a

purely future sense

;

thus,

H«J

^TT

^jf^sRT

Hf^W^

" with that

thou shalt be happy".

Vocabulary XXX.

TTf + ^5^ (avagahate)

Yerbs:

have the
^3J^ (drhati)
(cf.

right, etc.

§ 320.)

^TR^ +

+

^ITf*f

attend.

(abhigdcchati)

(tdpati,

intr.);

-te)

pain;

burn

(tr.

in pass.,

and

suffer,

do penance.

|l+^PMSrT pay.

1H

(ace).
cfx^

*J*t finish, attain.

dive under

visit,

\JT

+ fW

arrange, ordain, order.

•T?^ (nftyati)

dance.

Lesson

» + TJ

be mighty, able

+

^c^

Tf

(pravdrtate)

;

valere.

continue,

^f-sj?!

apffall m., husbandman.

»PtT

heat;

f.,

*^^W

self-existent; as m. subst.,

epithet of

Adv.:

->

convention, company.

n.,

Vedic melody, song;

Brahma.

enough,

"^JJ^H

enough

very;

iv.

away with;

of,

instr.,

w.

dat.,

suitable for.

Samaveda.

pi., the

at pleasure.

*<^H

Adj.:

°t, young, delicate.

f.

Tppr,

o^|T, capable, able.

^Tr^f,

body, figure.

m

3J"TO«^

(part, of f%-\TT) ordained.

dance, dancing.

n.,

CTTT3I

self-torture.

drama, play.

»•>

n.,

^TJ^

fruitful.

destined or suitable for

sacrifice.

f^ffcf

^ftcf n., song, singing.
n.,

fat.

fM^cj|f^«^ acceptably speaking.
Ifi^rq^

Snbst.:

•TTZ«R

125

XTg stout,

go on.

r\m^

XXX.

Exercise XXX.

f^t mwwi ^g
??»

w:

*nf*r

i

r

i

^

i

i

^mft **r^ Tfn

fJrenrrf^fr

tnm^n^rrf^^t f^mrt- i3^rn
cfVsf

^f?NfcrR? jrf^w.
<re^i7j

i

8

i

wr

^ref^nw^ Tfa Tr^rf^ira c iwrr tt^^rj ^i^m (§ 322) e g^T^^rrt" mat ^\w
i

1

(Sentences with must
gerundives).
to

12.

A

may

works

after or.

6e rendered either with

to

hear

i

1

Brahmacarin must not

see (Tr-t^j) dancing or

that

tt %-

WTOPCtf*r§*n

*tt ^trg ^f^nft rat

w

<nh*j-

*rr*rrf*r

singing.

visit
13.

^fif

or

««$

any companies

Remembering

will be fruitful in the other life (use "thus thinking",

recta), a

man must

strive to

perform what

is

ordained.

126
14.

Lesson

The maidens

bind wreaths.

XXX. XXXI.

seated themselves (pass, part.) in

True

15.

bow

garden to

the

friends are able to save from

misfortune.

16.

The daughters came

(pass, part.)

17.

How

body of this fair one capable of enduring

the delicate

is

You must

19.

§ 177).

You must become

18.

penance?

before their parents.

a scholar

H^«rT

(use

are to read this letter.

22.

21.

The gentlemen

20.

cf.

Who

3^«rT

(use

finished the Veda, he

Having

end

,

bring a boat to cross the river.

able to stop the mighty wind?

is

to

)

went on

to study the other sciences.

XXXI.

Lesson
328.

^

Numerals. Cardinals:

*??

6,

^

7,

^Pt^ST 13, ^rf^

fWt

3 0,

frT 80,

^fa 90,

Um
,

10.

**

329.

^Wlft^l

or

1

^

^

2, fs| 3,

^7T$

-



40,

100.

^% 2000,

WTCT3:

^<%

50, trfE

W

Utffa 70, ^nft-

the even

tens are

made by

11-

etc.;
nCU|ct, or^T^
48—78. and 98, either
,

330.

52, 62, 72 and 92, either f^tj^l-

^re<> or

WT^WT

96

etc.

is

etc.;

XfT^fTT.

There are other ways of expressing the numbers between

the tens.
position;

not

42,

pre-

But note:

43—73, and 93, either fao or ^"jr^^T

-0



— f^ or \ lf% 200. — *f^ 1000,
nmw* or *n^ J00 ooo.

The numbers between

not

tR| 5,

3[Tf<nif?T 22, etc.

TJcRf^rcifa 21,

fixing the unit -number to the ten; thus, XJ^"fBf^jf<f 25.

U.«*"T^,

4,

*fcf 9, ^t
Trqrr^jr 11, ^t^t 12,
TJ^r 15, ^t^H M, *TF^IT *?, WT^ 18,

8,

14,

19, fSftjfa 20.

•pr^r

TJ^5 1,

Thus:
e. g.

common

^STTf^nrfTI,

By

the use of the adj.

T|cfft»jf^jfrT '20 less

except for the nines.
etc.,

^tR[ 'more',

^lETfW

1.

1',

'Pffa) 98.

composition;

e.

TJejj is

By

2.

g.

'deficient', in

19.

e.

Sometimes

have the same value.

also in

^Tf
i.

,

com-

This usage
left

off,

is

and

the adj. ^srfV«G or

^HntVofi'T^f?! (also

Lesson

100.

§231
TJ^j

'certain

'some',

(pi.:

the odd

numbers

J^f^T^lOl, TOnpff('0#< ugTfSRi 71^105,

Thus,

Inflection of cardinals.

332.

127

are used to form

The same methods

331.

above

XXXI.

1.

is

T^}

The

ones').

declined like

dual

sometimes means 'a certain'; or even 'an,

vT^T,

at

does not occur.

an indefinite

a', as

article.
2.
f.

n.

\

(dual only)

\, 3T*rR,
3.

stem

f^

is in

masc. and neut. nearly regular; the

Thus, nom. m. ^i|{^,

"ffTO.

instr.

^frrf;

quite regular; thus, nom.-acc.-voc. m.,

is

fV*i^,

dat.-abl.

Fem.: nom.-acc. ffT^t-

instr.

^^TT

has

4. xj«i<

Thus, nom. m.

(5

— 19.)

fw^,

fern,

^TnWT^,

gen.

dat.-abl.

ace.

loc.

^rT^^

n.

f^TJ.

frT^Wl^, gen.

m. ^TTT^.; nom.-acc.

Fem.: nom.-acc.

has the

nom.-acc.

"^ft"!,

strong cases; the fem. stem

in

is

u.

instr., etc.,

^7T*T.

^STTfT;

^rRTfH^,

G™

w

These numbers have no

are inflected with
5. 7, 9, 10.

m.

ace.

instr. t^T^f*ra^-

^cTn^,

^7lfifo[ etc.

A

^\

3*fr*:-

some

distinction of gender.

irregularity as plurals.

Thus:

V^, H^f^ra:, °«ra\ -q^T^T^. tfWf

They

^^



and compounds of <^r, are similarly declined.
^Jl,
as follows:

6.
t5jt^
"

8.

!

?rS

may

20, 30,

etc.

follow

T^ffa^, ^wrac,

T3c$,

TRj|\

f^ljfTT,

wr*k

^Zf-

or be declined thus: ^Tlft

f^^,

etc -> are declined

^T2TfK^»

regularly

as

fem. stems, in all numbers.

100,

1000.

stems, in all
333.

1J7?

and ^J^f are declined

regularly

as neut.

numbers.

Construction of numerals.

1.

The words from

are used as adjectives, agreeing in case (and in gender,

if

1

to

19

possible)

128

XXXI.

Lesson

with the nouns.

2.

The numerals above 19

are usually treated as

nouns, either taking the numbered noun as a dependent genitive,
or standing in the sing, in apposition with
or ^Jff SUffc

"a hundred

it;

thus, ^T?t ^(tJlii*!.

H&U

female slaves";

"in sixty

3|<rt4

autumns".
Ordinals.

334.

TO,

"J^TR*

f^TT or f^TJrra 30th

etc

i

(to

U«M<^U|

but declined like <ra,

cardinals,

f^ftn, <pfta> ^<f«h

'first',

^TT, ^5TT,

^7T*J, ^TS*T,

iM,

f^J

etc.);

or

f^jfTRTT 20th;

^fa^

Note also U«*l'lt^5r or

-

W*>

same as the

the

U«J^RS{ffldRor^vrpij«j{f?TCT*T, 19th. The shorter forms (fchx etc.)
are by far the commoner.
335.
in

rest,

f^cffa and

STO7T,

Occasional

$\

met with from the
is

first

make

rTcfT^I

forms of the

their fem.

in

°"31T;

the

pronominal declension are

three; but the usual declension of nouns

the normal one for ordinals also.
336.

'thrice';

Numeral adverbs.

^di^

and so on, with

f^TT

or

or^T^TT,

^n
etc

3.

<Q^K^ 'once'; fl[^. 'twice';

TJ^4i<«i^ or



or °<ll<^.

°^i^^

'in



1.

'four times';

fWT

two ways';

or

2.

m^TT*^
T£ofi\TT

'fi

'in

f^^

ye times';

one way';

^TT, ^cpiT, ^^fJ, VtZI

U4)3{^ 'one by one'; ^JTUT^ 'by hundreds',

etc.

Vocabulary XXXI.

W5T

Terbs:
^5«5I -f

^i^

(sarhkaldyati)

put

to-

^ssrfTJ

pass (of time).

^^J(jdlpati)

^^rfH (abhisincdti) anoint

^+^<*-'^n'

cite,

mention.

speak, chat.

Subst.:
the fourth Veda.
<4|\!|c(^|^ m.,

*

f%^. +

as king.

gether, add.

«Ft +

in caus. (bhojdyati) feed.

XRI forms no ordinal.

^Rf^MId**

n.,

n. pr.

a

city.

XXXI.

Lesson
the "Iron
qrflRjra n.,

of

Age"

129
Scythian.

JTefi ra.,

the world.

wheel.

^fsfi n.,

5?fYfrTO n -i

^^nSTT

qrrQS^r

«?

-

sometimes

fflf^Tf^

one of a class of works

f^sfPRTf^W



often post-

(in altern.).

namely, to wit.

rT^r^TT

*HHJdH

on the creation of the world.
ni., n. pr.,

(w. abl.

pos.) after, immediately after.

n P r -> descendant of

Pandu.
TJ<J(!J n.,

re-

edition,

m., year.

^'InlXt

lunar mansion.

m

branch,

Adv.:

?«j|«f n., philosophical system.
n.,

,

daction.

mical text-book.

•f^f

f.

TJT^T

astronomy; astrono-

at present.

a famous

king.

Exercise XXXI.

H<*Mi<u\

:

n<(\*jnl

qHHI ^M hM

<Mftnf*i

*m wpt

ii

<^

ii

irfKTfW f^fW TraTRTf^ JW%*

^^Tft %^T 1%3I% SBT^II JTTWTf^T *C^f^r5[rTC *Ff
'ftfrT

f^rt

<ra*rr

i

jtcto;

i

s

^jqfi %^nri

i

^<^i vs in^T ^f^^i

*r#%^ ^r%frT

1

i

II

^"nRT^^H^%^ WTfiPJNt
susiuiMTOHtaun.
11. The wagon of
ii

i.

e.,

*n*^«g

^i^aftfTT:

:

1

i

*

^TT*

*if^: irn=rT ^rf#r

8 *nrf s^rarai ^Htrlt ^rf TITWPTT ^£J%

*HdA tt^ttt Tr^rrf^f^ai: ^ ^
^ TpfTRf TT^ft ^^Iftr Trnf^I «=

three wheels.

<j

12.

w

^TTTf^T

I

II

<>

i

3

i

*tttII

M

II

wst^i wrfa ^rrfr

^VfW *RTfW ITT *ft^T
I

* nw

*f?

^ iptoi^

ii

the Acvins

The Acvins

is

fitted

(^pj

,

part, pass.) with

are praised by the seer with four

in the seven stars of the

Perry, Sanskrit Primer.

w

9 U

II

Great Bear.

1

30

Rik-verses.
the

is

XXXI. XXXII.

Lesson

Krsna

13.

third

among

the

is

the

five

eldest of six brothers.

Pandavas.

are eight sorts of marriage (pi.);

mansions are mentioned

astronomy.

in

his

in his

twelfth.

teacher,

17.

eighth year, a Ksatriya

18.

having

in

Two

(model

14.

taught

2nd

after

One should

consecrate

a Vaicya

in his eleventh,

great lights shine in the sky.
the

Arjuna

think there

Twenty-seven or twenty-eight lunar

16.

Brahman

six

others,

sentence in Sanskrit above).

a

Some

15.

Rik- verse,

fifth

20.

Qakyamuni Buddha

21.

Sometimes 33 gods are reckoned

recited

19.

died in the eightieth year of his age
in the

The

the sixth.
(life).

Veda, sometimes

3333.

Lesson XXXII.
337.

Comparison of Adjectives.

Derivative adjectives having

comparative and superlative

— or
meaning

ally, a merely intensive value

— are made

often,

and more origin-

either (A.) directly

from

roots (by primary derivation), or (B.) from other derivative or com-

pound stems (by secondary
338.

A. The

comparative, and

suffixes

^J

derivation).

of primary derivation are

for the superlative.

The

accented, and usually strengthened by guna

sometimes by nasalization or prolongation.
few such formations are

meaning
to

in

use; and

mostly to other adjectives

(if

capable of

— In

for the
is

or

it),

classical Sanskrit

these attach themselves in

from the same

be their corresponding positives.

^J^

root before them

root,

which seem

In part, however, they are

connected with words unrelated to them in derivation.
339.

Thus %tffajW and ^fTO (j/f^PO

f^n? 'quick';
'broad';

^0*1*1.

and

attac ^

themselves to

«rf<8 (V^t 'encompass'),

to

"^

(TptY^Rit an(* TTpTOj 'worse' and 'worst', to the subst.

^TO; M«il*J^ and Tjfe^,

to

q^

skilful';

ITffta^ and jffgg

to

LessoD XXXII.

TffTj qJqHqH, and ^f^TO,
340.

The

following are examples of

%^t*r^, %T^¥

•^rf^^fi'near',

(but also

^t^jt

«|fa^ or

to

;

^T^T^

and

KTV

to

*?Tfa¥

131

^

^^f| i\^, ^rf^i^);

;

artificial

^F3I

connections:

^fTO

'

little',

^sfaTCt,

T^

^"O^C. ifT*;

heavy',

^ivfttj^ ^TfaS; "H^I^ 'praiseworthy', 'good', fr^
'better', %^ 'best'; fTRf 'dear', ifaw, jftj; ^1T 'much', *RIH
'long',

g^:

**f*re;
fa^J.

Sl|

in

^Sf,

to

^-

^flfaret,

1T9P3T or ^TT^'

to ^njJ.
in

Jj% are inflected like ordinary adjectives

with the fem. in 1R;

with

those in

The

ha\e a peculiar de-

f"ST3[.

and fem. %^RTt,

a strong stem in l^jf^,

for

So also 5STTTH an d WTO.«

see § 255.

342. B.

They

ra 'ow,

*rf?re;

-

The stems

clension,

which

*xft^,

ano ^HJ correspond sometimes

l^fff

sometimes
341.

'young',

suffixes of

secondary derivation are cfT and <\H,

are of almost unrestricted use.

That form of stem

is

usually

taken which appears before an initial consonant of a case-ending.

Stems

in

^^

^BF and ^'q'

,

are always unchanged; final
after

which the

of the suffix becomes ^.

c^

°wt;

Thus, firenrr^, frrsnrnsT

343.

Some stems which

^-^ and ^-^ become

^rf*f*t,

^Trn;, °cw; fa-

are substantives rather than adjectives

are found to form derivatives of comparison; thus, JTTfTrffl 'most
'

motherly

',

ipfR

most manly

'

*HfrT*T

,

'

most

344. Comparison of Adverbs. Adverbs are
the suffixes in the forms

345.

Construction.

and r|4{|^;

cHT^

to

him

than

lH|r+«4JT

a son";

an elephant.

'

compared by adding

thus,

^

'well', *TcT-

With a comparative (and sometimes with

other words used in a similar
construction; thus,

like

way)

the

rT^T TTEI?ft

*rfa^

ablative is the regular

"a daughter

«?<?fls?0*J*n

"intellect

9*

is

dearer

alone

is

Lesson XXXII.

132

stronger than force". After the superlative either genitive or locative

may be

The comparative

used.

ened superlative; thus,

J|

*J

I

often has the force of a strength-

*l

'most honorable'.

Vocabulary XXXII.
fljsq m., n. pr., the Indus.

Subst.:
Jptjcfm., one of a band of celes-

n. pr.

^5J m.,

^CT^T

Adj.:

running, course.

n.,

MMHcH^
m deliverance,
-j

OR*lH
^"^ n.,

salvation.

H"PJ

ipTO

subst.,

f

-

f.

t?*ft> such.
o^rr and o^, old.

^ffl«^ abiding, being.

^^T«ff m., a system of philosophy

Indecl.:

.

^

n. pr.

f.,

n.

swift.

tfl'

metal; iron.

eH'tJH m., crow.

TT<5«fl<!H

as

atom.

n. pr.

f-,

small;

little,

^JI!T

the world-spirit.

n) ->

jft^J

m., drunkard.

WfJH

%7T«tT m., winter.

a Gandharva.

tial singers,

sometimes in sense of

if.

Exercise XXXII.

#ft WTT

*t^to^

i

*TR1T 3if^re:

$

fUcTT

TTfa

^ThroY w*if

i

3ft

5rr%<T cf^T

^ f^T

^trw^er.

* TpT

i

ITO^fTT

8

f^rmfM^fH: *f

f%^%T^n ^fa

^:

^^

^rt TnmFra

«R

ii

99

i

^

i

ff?<T<jy«5?.*<*H

i

90

i

ir^ft

n

* Translate
as though genitive.

$

i

*rr-

^Ham

^Ht^r

I

M

I

tr^-

i

T^ftrpf isra

trfwtawi^ri

fm*n f<jm: mimWr:

wot

#bhtt

*r#ten^<wg ^wr

sf<?

*rct:

^

^ ^^J *TR *TO^^t

^T^idiiuTtiuiuD^i^^dl

*n ^aifa^fa^^r

i

I

i

^

i

TtffJSft
i

o.

i

*£t^zr^R

m*r-

Lesson XXXII. XXXIII.

Of

12.

than Kaikey! and Sumitra.

morehonortd(*p§, comp

)

nights are very long.

14.

Not very many

jewels are found on earth.

15.

Among

mightiest.

sweeter than the works of Bana.

merchants

all the

among

Kausalya was older and

the three wives of Dacaratha,

Prthvlraja was the

but heavier than wood.
of quadrupeds.

133

in

those kings of the North
of Kalidasa are

Anathapindika was the richest
18.

Rajagrha.

19.

In winter the

(express as pred.) such

The poems

16.

17.

13.

Iron

is lighter

In running the horse

is

the swiftest

Qakuntala was more beautiful than

20.

than gold,

all

other

women

of that time, and became the wife of the mightiest monarch

(^PEJT^T

)

of the whole earth.

21.

The crow

is

called the shrewdest

of birds.

Lesson XXXIII.
(Part
346.

Compounds. In

all

I.)

periods of the language the combination

of stems of declension with one another, forming

compounds which

are treated in accent, inflection and construction as
is

if

simple words,

one of the most striking peculiarities of the Sanskrit tongue.

In

the

compounds of more than two elements are

the Vedic period
In the later

rare.

later

this

moderation

the period, and especially the

of composition,

become.

language

To

the

more unwieldy and

such an extent

is

is

abandoned;

more elaborate

difficult

this carried

and

the style

do the compounds

that the advantages

of an inflective language are often deliberately thrown away, and

a clumsy

aggregation

of elements

replaces the due

syntactical

union of inflected words into sentences.
347.
I.

are

93

Sanskrit compounds

fall

into three principal classes:

Copnlative or Aggregative compounds, of which the

members

ntaciically coordinate: a joining together of woids which in

Lesson

134
an uncompounded

state

XXXin.

would be connected by 'and'.

E.

g. ^5-

'gods and Gan-

<*dH 'done and undone'; ^Tn^^TT^TT:
dharvas and men'. The members of such a compound may
ctl

obvi-

more.
ously be of any number, two or
II.

Determinative compounds, of which the former member

on the
syntactically dependent

latter, as

a noun limiting
fying adjunct: being either
or an adjective or an adverb describing

it.

is

determining or quali-

its

it

in

a case-relation,

Thus may be

distin-

and B. Descriptive, comguished two sub-classes: A. Dependent,
pounds; their difference

Examples

is

not absolute.

?rf*R%Tr 'army

1

are: of dependents,

M <ft<<* 'water
l

for the feet';

descriptives, HfTTT^'g reat king';
^^EfifT

of enemies';

^cJiH 'made with hands';
fJWEPH



of

(§353, 2) 'dear friend';

'badly done'.

348.

The

character of

parts of speech,

is

compounds of

determined by

capable of being resolved into

their final

classes

I.

and

II.,

as

member, and they are

equivalent phrases by giving the

of connection to each
proper independent form and formal means
the
third
of
not
true
member. But this is
class, which accordingly
is

more fundamentally

distinct

from them than they from each

other.

349. III. Secondary Adjective compounds, the value of which
is

not given by a simple resolution into their component parts, but

which, though having as

final

member a noun,

These again are of two sub-classes:

jectives.

are themselves ad-

A. Possessive com-

pounds, which are noun-compounds of the preceding class
or B.),

(II.

A.

with the idea of 'having' added, turning them from nouns

into adjectives
*

;

and B. compounds

in

which the second member

is

This class of compounds is of comparatively recent development; only the other two are common in others of the related
tongues.

Lesson XXXIII.

135

a noun syntactically dependent on the

first:

compounds (only Vedic), of a present

participle with

object; and

B

This whole sub-class

Examples

Participial

its

following

Prepositional compounds, of a preposition and fol-

2.

lowing noun.

1.

namely,

T^%«T

:

'

comparatively small.

is

possessing a hero-army

'

TTSTRTRT

;

'

having

desire of progeny'; 'JfffTRTPI 'excessive'.

350.

times

The

adjective

used, especially

nouns; and

by

classes of

351.

A

done

copulatives),

the dependent

a previous existence

',

is first

the descriptive Tj^rgjtjrw, then this into

its

combined with the

initial

compound

(jqb|«41-

^kT and

two elements.

Final

^^

The

final

of a stem

of another stem in composition according

to the general rules for external combination.
1.

analysis of a

must be made

divisible into

352. Euphonic combination in compounds.
is

The

indefinitely.

of whatever length,

Thus

of bisections.
in

word, become a member

like a simple

compound, and so on

series
'

collective

Out of these uses have

compounds, reckoned and named as such

compound may,

compound (except
by a

simple adjectives, some-

as abstract and

Hindu grammarians.

in another

Vif,

are, like

the neuter,

in

the accusative as adverbs.

in

grown apparent
the

compounds

But:

and ^T^ of a prior member become ^TO and ^tf

before surd gutturals, dentals, and labials; thus,
otHfdMic^.
2.

Final

of a prior

^J^

member

often remains

unchanged under

similar circumstances.

^

3.

After final 7» ^> ^&, an

4.

Pronouns generally take the stem-form of the neuter;

the personal

^T9?^ an d
5. For

A

often

becomes

pronouns are oftenest used Zfe and t^f

^P*^
Tj|f»rT

ive compounds,
6.

initial

,

is

lingual.

for

in the
sing.,

in the pi.

in the prior

member

of descriptive and possess-

used J(^\.

case-form in the prior

member

is

not very rare.

Lesson XXXIII.

136
353. In

classes of compounds, certain changes of finals are

all

liable to appear in the concluding
effect of transferring the

Thus:

1.

A

stem
2.

°T*t, °TT5T3.

•TTSJ.

^

An

is

or

f

is

drops the

final

*^,

to ^J, as in

changed

added after a

final

as in °^TW,

"^l^

©Wf, °TT% °^RT,

consonant, sometimes even

after an w-vowel or a diphthong, as in
°^T|f (^HpO,

The

the

as a whole to the a-declension.

compound

in ^pr^ often

An ?

member; generally they have

now

separate classes of compounds will

T^

be

(^ft)-

taken

up.

(Part II.)
354.
less

I.

Two

Copulative compounds.

often adjectives, and

ordinate construction, as though joined by

'



or more nouns

once or twice adverbs

and

',

much

— having a co-

are sometimes com-

bined into a compound.*
355.
into

two
A.

The noun-compounds

fall,

as regards their inflective form,

classes:

The compound has

member, and

is

in

the gender and declension of its final

number a dual or

logical value as denoting either two,

Examples

things.

XU^"

are:

'Rama and Krsna';

sTtf^TO^"
-3|3||c('<q:

plural,

or more
'rice

according

to

its

than two, individual

and

barley';

"^TT«R-

m
'goats and sheep'; Wfi|P!r^rfa

^pt^PTsTH 'Brahmans, Ksatriyas, Vaicyas and Qudras'; ftjfTPJ^t
(§ 352, 6) 'father

B.

and son'.

The compound, without regard

to the gender of its constituents,

(so-called samahara-dvandva).

QvPniW{
brella

to the

number denoted or

becomes a neuter singular

'snake and ichneumon'; ^"-cftUM^H (§353,3) 'um-

and shoe'; '^nftTT^'^ (§353,2) 'day and

356.

collective

Thus, TITfTUMId*^ 'hand and foot';

The

later

night'.

language preserves several dual combinations

This class is called by the Hindus dvaudva, 'couple'; but a
dvandva of adjectives thev do not recognize.

137

Lesson XXXIII.
of the name9 of divinities,

'STRWfa^ft and

thus,

which retain

etc.,

^^Uft 'Mitra and Varuna

'

;

are:

Examples

forms;
f*fTT-

'Agni and Soma'.

^SJ^fftftTT

Adjective copulative compounds are

357.

are rare.

their earlier

'Heaven and Earth';

<£|l«M*T7ft

made

likewise,

but

and dark'; cpfpftl round
'

*pffcP*»T 'light

^TrTrTf^ffT 'bathed and anointed'.

and plump';*

358. Determinative compounds.

A noun

or adjective

often

is

combined into a compound with a preceding determining or qual-

word

ifying



B. Descriptive, compounds.

according as the final
is

noun or

Each

class falls into

but

is

compounds.

1.

*JW

;

^sNpTTf^

(="<n^r ^<<**l) 'water

member may be of any

tained) by science';



to the city';
2.

'





Thus,

Ml<\<«*

f^rn*T 'money

(ob-

^n^WTf^ (= ^Srn3J«n SHf 331*1)

'likeness with

'fear of a thief;

qorshlTT

^fa^TC (=^CK 1^*1*0

(= «f% 3^°)

360.

'hundreds of fools';

for the feet';

The

Noun -compounds.

oftenest genitive, and least often accusative.

=
<T7*J^ cT^I

self;

two subdivisions,

adjective.

case-relation of the prior to the second

kind,

principal

A. Dependent, and

member, and therefore the whole compound,

A. Dependent

359.

The two

a noun or adjective or adverb.

divisions of this class are, as indicated above,

sport in the water

'

;



«HKWR?T

^l^^rfff 'lord of speech',

n. pr.

(=



WC 1°)

(§352,

'

going

6.).

Only a very small

Dependent adjective compounds.

proportion of the compounds of this class have an ordinary adjective
as final
rivative

member

member

a

participle, or

a de-

of agency with the value of a participle (§ 204).

The

;

usually the final

is

*

The Hindus reckon these as kormadharayas (see next note).
The whole class of determinatives is called by the natives
tatpurusa (the name is a specimen of the class, meaning 'his man');
the second division, the descriptives, bears the special name karma**

dhdraya, a word of obscure meaning and application.

138

Lesson XXXIII.

member

prior

stands in any possible case-relation.

the

to

'gone

village';

^Tf^T

Thus,



'Veda-knowing';

^TTTTTfcf

ftpjTf^RJ

'protected by Civa'; ^ftf^W (= 3jif f^rlO 'good for the cow';

M^Mfdd

'fallen



waves';



from the sky'; rT^^^U^TcTT 'more mobile than

f^<jTtii*l (=

fl^WTTRl.

^3tW)

'best of

Brahmans';



4g|l<dlM€h 'cooked in a pot'.

Compounds of

361.



root
in

having as

this sort

sometimes modified

in

form,

final

a short vowel, generally with an added f^

%^f%T

thus,

simply

'in the

cHtH



k

fj-TSf

352

born

362.

6)

(i. e.

in the

wagon' (or

member

relation, but qualifies
is

it

noun or

ZiA^

^T-

'love').

In this division of tbe deter-

B. Descriptive compounds.

'well-done';

originally

forest-dwelling'; *lf%lfST 'firm in battle';

in the heart'

member

the bare

end

it

wagon'); *T\J1 'on the head'; TToRH 'only-born';

minatives, the prior

final

member

— are very numerous:

above (§360); "^*§I 'standing

'
>

if

and,

stands to the other in no distinct case-

adjectively or adverbially, according as the

Thus, fl|4KI<sl (§ 353,

adjective.

2); ^f^irl

'evil-doing' (adj.).

The compounds

of noun-value cannot well be separated in

treatment from those of adjective-value.
363.
is

The

simplest case

is

that in

which a noun as

final

preceded by a qualifying adjective as prior member.

H!j|jy (=

«ftmH <f^0 'black horse'; tfifnTCq 'great man'.

of an adjective, the prior

member

is in

member

Thus, mInstead

a few cases a noun used

appositionally or with a gwasz-adjective value; thus, 3^|fM 'priest-

sage';

^TWf^

364.
thus,

'king-sage'.

Sometimes compounds of

this sort

VHSiJUT 'black as a thunder -cloud'

Reversed, TJ^'q'^lTEf 'man-tiger',
Literally,

a tiger which

Or, perhaps better,

'

i.

is

tiger of (or

e.,

'a

express a comparison;
(cf.

man

'coal-black',
fierce

not a tiger after

among) men

etc.).

as a tiger';*

all,

but a man.

'

(so Whitney).

Lesson XXXIII.

•TCftr^ 'man-lion';

M|^M<|

139

'foot-lotus',

i.

'a foot lovely as a

e.

lotus'.

The adverbial

365.

members of

descriptive

words

most commonly used

as

prior

compounds, qualifying the other member,

are the verbal prefixes ("prepositions"), and the words of direction
related to them; likewise the inseparable prefixes tJP^ or ^r priva-

These are combined with nouns

'well', ^TW 'ill', etc.

tive, ^f

^uasf-adjectival value) as well as with adjectives.

^mftS^rT 'not a scholar';

done';

'more than a god

^I'fd'^T 'exceedingly far'; ^ffTPTO

;

<4|cftd

'misfortune';

TR^TBf

'

KfrlM^ 'opposing

fear';

Thus,

'

(in

'not

"^rfw^^
excessive

side.'

Vocabulary XXXIII.

Verbs:
411 H^

+

^*l +

devoted

^T*^ complete.

f*J station, place,

appoint

Subst.:

m

TJ^
air »

-'

sk y-

(anurdjyati,

step; place.

n.,

TJ^ m., n. pr.
*lf^«=n f- queen.

^j*!3 m., n. pr.

ZpHTI

^TTT

TT^T

m., boy, prince.
f-,

TfTSf n.,

ornament

(often Jig.).

b,athing-place;

place

n.,

o^t

march, journey; support.
race, family.

f-,

female friend.

*Jc=Mi! m., hospitality.
f.,

world.

$*N41

<-'hase.

<^TTl«rl m., state of affairs;

of CTgrT

pilgrimage.

f^^cfi

f»5

1"-*

^^r m.,

game, sport.

fcT^feR m.,

the threefold

Adj.:

^•HEl?,
m., n. pr.

^|fM«j^ m., panther.

be

home.

f^f return

^"P^TST m., hermitage.

"5RT^T

-te)

to, inclined to (loc).

go away (on a journey).

^^4 -IT
^<^ +

^t^tst

^T

+

T*T

3ifW,

f.

f.

o-sjrr,

suitable.

o^TT, adopted.

news.

Lesson XXXIII.

140
^T7«tr^

f-

5

manner

°%, in the

'^M\

of,

or suitable for, tbe Gandharvas.
f.

f«raf,

4JMM,

heavenly, divine.

°T!rr,

f-

f-

°^IT, near; as neut.subst.,

Adv.:

human.

°t",

%

vicinity, nearness, presence.

TT^T earlier, formerly.

Exercise XXXIII.

c

««<l«H TTf^n

*TR

I

R

I

crf^% f^nfT

4*1 <* I

«^u y f*M$l fa <t

TWt i^T^T *T^<ffT f^TSTO^ l^TR

jrraTrrf^hrr u $

When

vine-beauty,

I

^re?

of words joined by hyphens).

he had seen her,

brilliant (JJ^i pres. part.)

as though ($$) more-than-human,

was

king-sage

8

n

(Form compounds
7.

I

inclined

(pass, part.)

having learned that she (ace.) was

the

toward

with di-

the heart of the

her.

8.

Thereupon,

dayghter-of-an-Apsaras (ace),

he married her by the gandharva-ceremony (f«H|^) snitable-for9.

Ksatriyas.
in the

10.

city.

Dussanta, after dwelling very many days-and-nights

hermitage, abandoned Cakuntala and returned to his-own-

Afterwards,

when Kanva had

finished

his

pilgrimage,

and returned to the hermitage, learning (f%«T) the news^of-his 1 2

3

daughter's -marriage
11.

The royal-sage

she

her

,

he sent her into-the-presence-of-Dussanla.

disowned (THSTT-^sST^r.) Cakuntala when

at first

was come^to-the-city 1 but
;

3

at last he put (fsT-'3I5T

1

in-the-place -of-the-first -queen

*

"To

engage

in the sport of

2
.

12.

In

hunting";

the

cf.

,

part, in °^trT

course

)

of time

below, §375,

3.

XXXIV.

Lesson XXXIII.

141

named Bharata, was born

(3RT*Ff T^f>rTT) a beautiful-prince,

to

her (loc).

XXXIV.

Lesson
366.
a

III.

noun as

A

Secondary Adjective Compounds.

member very

final

compound with

often wins secondarily the value of

an adjective, being inflected in the three genders to agree with the

noun which
adjective.

it

and used in

qualifies,

The two

the constructions of an

all

divisions of this class have been given

above

(§ 349).

367. Certain changes are

the final

member

to

make

Masc. and neut. stems in
thus,

hands

from
',

nom.

Tf

+

^T

sing.

faf*!£f*,, °£T,

The same holds good
and stems
368.

and fem.

^f,

in

"^Sfj,

comes the compound

;

the stem of

in

possible the inflection in different genders.

4j^H-

°^

sometimes necessary

°^T, °^R.

and (from
for

masc,

*J

+

fem.,

;

generally interchange;

'with excellent

tftftgl

f^ + f^JTT)

so also (from

"qj^r n.)

and

°^T, o*nR\

Sp?t^,

neut. stems in

^ and

^,

in consonants.

But often a fem.

in

f^ is

used by the side of a masc. and

-

neut. in ^f; thus,
f^tnjj 'two-leaved',

369.

Very frequently the

of indefinite value)

is

suffix

c?;

f.

f^THlfT.

(attenuated into an element

added to a pure possessive compound

help the conversion of the compounded stem
especially tojfem. stems in %" and

^Jf,

general, where the final of the stem
in adjective inflection.

'whose husband

is

i.

e.

an

,

to

adjective;

in

^J; and in

less usual or

manageable

and to stems
is

Thus, ^^fe^cfi 'rich

dead',

into

in rivers'; ;RrT*n^JTf.,

'widow'; H^I^Jir^ (nom. masc.

and fem. °?fTQQ or *T^Rrer^ff.
370.

Sometimes the possessive-making

secondary adjective compounds, without
thus,

'

J|^*Hlf^«t (= °«TR£)

suffix

effect

^^

is

added to

upon the meaning;

having an ass's voice.

'

142

Lesson

The

A. Possessive compounds.

37!.

ative

XXXI V.

shown)

(as just

defined by adding 'having'

^^^TJ

the descriptive

^"^T^Tjf m.

?|^ 131

n

372.

,

f.

,

of a god', becomes the

'beauty

n.,

n.,

'having the beauty of a god';

'long arm', becomes the possessive

'having long arms'.*

Dependent compounds

turned into

meaning of the determinative.

to the

possessive Y^?|JJ, °^TT, m.

f.

inflection

and also an adjective meaning of a kind best

,

Thus, the dependent

m.

possessives are determin-

which are given both an adjective

to

compounds

are,

by comparison, not often thus

But possessively used descriptives are

possessives.

extremely frequent and various; and some kinds of combination

which are rare

in

proper descriptives are very

common

as pos-

sessives.

An

373.

adjective as prior

member

takes the masculine stem-

form, even though referring to a feminine noun in the final
thus,

^M ^ M
<=l

As

374.
1.

I

thus,

prior

members are found:
'

Adjectives proper; thus, <3|«iq^»q

ciples; thus,

^cW!

member;

(from ^TT^T) 'possessing a beautiful wife'.

^r|J4H<ft 'whose
'four-faced';

mother

of other form'.
is

slain'.



3.



2.

Parti-

Numerals;

fa^xM 'three -eyed'. — 4. Nouns
f^^W^T 'gold-handed'. Es-

with quasi- adjectival value; thus,
pecially

the

common

is

the use of a

other appositionally

,

or by

noun as prior member

way

well be called appositional possessives.

"Krsua"

as

name';

^T^TJ^TiJ

the





5.

to qualify

These may

Thus, cfiuyMT^*^

'having

^TT!^"W^. 'using spies as eyes';
senger'.

of equivalence.

'

having

men who are heroes';

^T<TfT 'having thee as

mes-

Adverbial elements (especially inseparable prefixes);

This ehiss of compounds is called by the natives bahuvrihi;
name is an example of the class, meaning 'having much rice'.
The possessive may generally, in accented texts, be distinguished

from the original determinative by a difference of accent.

XXXIV.

Lesson

'endless';

-4H«r1

thus,

'ill

sons'; 35rf5q
is

^f^)

WTl

33fT*rai*t (^T

+

thus,

v

The

3TO§

'of

wide



fame';

1.

'of like form

';

have

in part

Thus with

won a

f^Nf

'limbless';

^J^f



Ordinary adverbs;

7.

'.

375. Certain words, very frequent in the
at § 374, 4,

3%JJ

Ordinary verbal pre-

6.

'with uplifted face'.

with mind directed hither

'

excellent

associative prefix ^f (less often

'^•TeR^T n.) 'favorable'.

^frj-rf

'with

with a son', or 'having one's son along with one';

TTSf^^

'powerless';
thus,

Wi^

'childless';

-*|IH

-savored'.

treated like an adjective element; thus,

or 3fTCnf

fixes;

143

compounds mentioned

peculiar application.
the derivatives

TSrrf^ 'beginning' (or

or

-H\<H

^nf^^i) are made compounds signifying the person or thing de-



signated along with others

Thus,

^TT

gods Indra, etc'

Often

used in the same

virbially.



the

qualifying

'food, drink, etc'

^dMMI^Tfa
are

such a person or thing

'the gods having Indra as first',
^«£|<^*j:

way,

The noun "^J

3.



Words

2.

to denote

noun

like Tf$ (TT^NO etc, »

'purpose',

is

end of a compound, oftenest as a neut. subst. (ace or

Damayantrs sake';
^nT"^

%^fT5rTT
region

ITSIT^T 'for a bed'.

(as neut. subst.) often
"•>

or loc),

instr.

'another region'

(lit.



(See below, § 379).

means 'other'

in possessives; thus,

'that which has a difference of

').

376.

In appositional possessives

,

signate a part of the body, sometimes

belongs what

which

chiefly ad-

used at the

sake of, and the like; thus, ?7fi|nil^ 'for

to signify 'for the

4.

'the

e.

omitted; thus,

is

accompaniment;

'object',

et cetera.
i.

it is.

is

the final

designated by the prior

Thus

2TfTT}^ffa

member,

member

pounds are commonest with words meaning hand
'with sword in hand';
377.

The

:

that

with necklace on neck'.

^T3^I

'with club

in

;

de-

if it

signifies the part to

which

on or

in

Such com-

thus, ^f f4j

M

|

fUJ

hand'.

possessives are not always used with the

simple

144

Lesson

value of qualifying adjective.

XXXIV.

Often they have a pregnant sense,

and become the equivalents of dependent clauses; or the 'having'
implied in them becomes about equivalent to our 'having' as a
sign of past action.
e.

i.

lescence',

Thus, JJIH^JT^R 'possessing attained ado-

'having reached

'with unstudied books', i.e. 'one

'whose breath
is

come

is

gone',

i.

e.

^MfcHM9i IfcJ

adolescence';

who

has neglected study'; JTrTTTTCT

whom

death

Thus may conveniently be

called

'lifeless';

^TRTWT(2J

'to

near'.

378. B.

Compounds with governed

final

member.

1.

Participial compounds, exclusively Vedic.

2.

Prepositional compounds.

those compounds in which the prior
prepositional value, and the final

member

is

a particle with true

member a noun governed by

it.

Thus, ,?rf?RT^ 'lasting over night'; ^STf^WT"^ 'beyond measure',
'excessive';

379.

3|flJcfiT!J

'next the ear'.

Adjective compounds as nouns and adverbs.

adjectives, like simple

and

stracts

collectives,

the feminine

;

ones, are

Compound

freely used substantively as ab-

especially in the neuter,

and

less often

in

and they are also much used adverbially, particularly

in the ace. sing, neuter.

380.

The

substantively

used possessive compounds having a

numeral as prior member, with some of the

strictly adjective

com-

pounds, are treated by the Hindus as a separate class, and called

Examples

dvigu*.

f^pi

of such numeral abstracts and

n., 'the three

ages';

f^ft^PT

n.,

Feminines of like use occur in the later language
(by the side of °^i
381.

n.,)

collectives

;

thus fatsfteft

'the three worlds'.

Those adverbially used accusatives of secondary

The name

are:

'space of three leagues'.

adjective

a sample of the class, and means 'of two cows'
(said to be used in the sense of 'worth two cows').
is

XXXIV.

Lesson

compounds which have an

145

indeclinable or particle as prior

member

are considered by the Hindus a separate class of compounds,
called avyayibhdra

The

1.

.

'

frequent in this use; thus, TTfa«(tM*^

^njpr^ (=^^7^

sight';

'on the G.
bhdvas

is

one

'as



Hfd^MH. 'every year'.
made up of words having
Thus,

evening'; CTTOTT 'in

A

2.

^W§^

large class of avyayi-

a relative adverb, especially

^rt^r^, ^^ToRTW;,

And, with

chooses'.

at

and

especially

"3R) 'along the Ganges';

';

*reT, as prior member.

compounds are

prepositional

other

^I«j^*i'

adverbs: ^TN^D'ciT^ 'as

long as one lives'; ^T^3il*IH 'whitbor one will'.
Occasionally quite anomalous compounds will be met

382.

For such,

with.

cf.

Whitney, §

1314.

Vocabulary XXXIV.
Verbs:

^T

|

+ f'TO

f^f

+

determine, decide.

2cf (vardyate) choose, select.

^T^T

+ ^T

+

l$Wl

f^( in caus. (viddrdyati) tear

try (pdtdyati) split open.

+

caus.

(samdsdddyati)

meet with, encounter.

open.

*T

(dsidati) approach.
in

H"ET

^?f*T overpower.

<fT5f n., palate.

Sobst.:
limb,

"3J"3? n.,

4II4K m

(hdrsati; hfsyati) rejoice, be

delighted.

member, body.

form >

S ure

fltigT

thirst, desire.

f-»

^y>\

f.,

tooth.

^=ar m., moon.

3lfrT

f-,

brilliancy.

^7;

Tjrq'ff

m., mountain.

ififT

>

fi

-

n., belly.

uRi«d

m., banner.

cR^tZ

f-

5

^gT

f..

^fT«T

n.,

On.

*

peak; point,

tip.

top-knot, scalp.

knowledge;

insight.

TTTW

«,

ni.,

mni

The word means 'conversion

Perry, Sanskrit Primer.

m., a tribe in India.

U^TT m

n.,

stroke, shot;

breath,

life

head.

to an indeclinable'.
.n

wound.

(often pi.).

146

Lesson

*fi«! m., fish.

ZT^CT

n., chest,

^TTf

™~> boar.

breast.

XXXIV.

XXXIV. XXXV.

Lesson
six-days, or three-days.

147

Pururavas, Iudra's-friend, married the

17.

moon-faced*, faultless-limbed* Apsaras Urvaci.
is

(epfj on the Narmada.

situated

armed, broad-chested king-of-the- Angas
path-of-knowledge

(cpd

opinion-of-the-ancient-seers

band-is-dead

may

in

lotus-eyed.

childless.

is

many-wived,

arrived with-his-scholars.

2G.

25.

20.

The

21. In-the-

or instr.) one-whose-hus-

loc.

so say the poets.

;

is

daughter, Sita-by-name*,
(''IffM)

sword-in-hand.

,

choose a second at-pleasure.

and tears-a-fish-in-his-banner

Bhrgukaccha

than the path-of-works.

better

is

18.

There stands the lorg-

19.

24.

22.

Love

is

bodiless,

23.

TbeBrahman's-

The

king, although

The eloquent**

pandit has

(v3«JT'(3')

Cataka

Present System.***

In this

With-upturned-face

prays for rain-water.

Lesson
383.

First Conjugation of Verbs.

conjugation the optative
pi.

act.,

the 2nd sing. iniv. act., and the 3rd

formed otherwise than

mid., are

384.

XXXV.

Strong forms.

strong form are these
impf. indie,

all

act.,

the 3rd sing.

:

The forms
the

first

imv. act.

in the a-conjugation.
in

which the stem assumes

persons of the imv.,

All other forms of

its

of the pres. and

three persons sing,

act.

the

and mid., and
present

system

are weak.
385.

Endings.

are substituted

For the middle endings

^frf, ^Tff,

(and a few others)

Secondary

^SffH,

^ffi,

and

adj. cpds., fem. in

Dep. cpd, "skilled

W^,

,

3TnT>

and -*MIH.

and -4MIHJ and after reduplicated stems

^^

are

substituted for the

%.

in

speech".
For a comprehensive view of the ways of forming the presentstems of verbs following this general conjugation, see Introduction,

§78.
10*

148

XXXV.

Lesson

active

endings

"4|f«ri>

same

and

^|«n,

often takes the ending

f^

The

Optative mode-sign.



with secondary endings; but
3STT is

dropped before

387.

sign of the opt. act.

is

in

made with

In the

the suffix -4JM

the root the

[^t

?d].

The

syllable

J^ of the 1st du. and 1st

,

if

and the

according as

The ending f^

[W

it is

pi.

^

nu\

may

,

I.

conjugation this

pi. pres. ind.

The

in

is

fem.

made by adding

strong forms

be dropped before

endings, except

when

no

«ft

^

and

the root ends

before a vowel-ending becomes

^f

or

preceded by one or by two consonants.

of the 2nd. sing. imv.

is

in a vowel.

389.

first

[^TTWL before which the

The present-stem

nu

^3 of the class-sign

in a consonant;
1T3"

yd,

and

^J.

388. Class IV. A: nw-class.
to

JR
pi.,

thus, °TH{.

it;

stem takes the same form as before the 3rd

always

is

the ending in the 3rd

Present participle middle.

participle is

is

sing. imv.

Otherwise the endings are the

as in the a-conjugation.

386.

,

The 2nd

"^Sf^ (impf.).

or f^.

Roots in vowels.

JS 'press'.

Indicative.

dropped

if

the root end

XXXV.

Lesson

149

'""W

QUOAAr^

2.

^ijpfta:

Imperfect.

w^tw; ^HJ<r ^J^TO ^prrwi °-p*R

^^

^l*MMI*i °^fT
*IU«iH ^5-H^ldlH
^J-Jr*
The briefer forms ^W^f, ^f^p^ ^'SP^ff *J«»^ff, are al-

3.

,

lowed and more

usual.

Imperative.

*R3


sundvdni sundvdva
2.

*R

sunavdi

wtg

sundvdmahdi

sundvdvahdi

*MiqiH

s»\»

sunutdm

sunu*
3.

sunavdma

sunutd

I

sunusvd

sunvdthdm

sunudhvdm

sunvatdm

sunvatdm

i^ttr:
sunutdm

sunota

sunutdm

sunvdntu

Optative.
1.

°^TR

*H*JIH *pJ*TR
sunuydm sunuydva

sunuydma

*pffa

f^fff

?pft<Rff

sunvlyd

sunvtvdhi

sunvimdhi

Participle.

390.

II.

Roots in consonants.

,

?JTTt 'acquire'.

Indicative.

Middle.

Active.
1.

^rrstf*T

^IH«l*t

TTSW5.

^^STT^

'TTSpt

3.

^TTftfrT

ITSpm.

^TRI

^TJpT

^TS*n7t

is

the accented element in the verbal form of which it
**
The rare imv. in rTTcf^ (cf. § 196) would be

The augment, without any exception

in verbal conjugation,

makes a

part.

formed thus:

Lesson

150

XXXV.

Imperative.
*rr5nrrfa

^rraTre ^rrcnrR

^ts%

^Hifld

*MMdlH W*r*J

WrTTR; ^imqicim.

,

1.

3.

^rra^T^f

°^m%
°^nn*t

Participle.

The

other forms of this tense follow the model of

391.

1.

2.

root

*J.

contracts to *J before the class-g, 'hear',

and weak stem;
forming *njft ^rno and 3qm crnu as strong

sign,

2nd

The

sing. imv. act. "stm;

The

root

"«[

shortens

2nd du. ind.
its

act.

*U!|cm or "*F5P^,

etc.



vowt-1 in the present-system.

Vocabulary XXXV.
i^J (dhundti, dhunute) shake.

y er K S .
(acnute) acquire, obtain.

^p^
^TR^

(apnoti

,

rarely apnute) ac-

"R,

or

^,

reach.

f^" (cindti, cinute) gather.
JJ

f^
+

Tf

+ ^fH
•jrgj

open.

explain, manifest.
shut.

(cakndti) be able.

TS(

(crnoti, crnute) hear.

w

(strnoti, strnute) scatter, strew.

(pracoddyati) urge on.

f^

+

clude.

^T

+ ^JUT

or 'faf«rHj decide, con-

or ^TR;, gather.

+

+

cover, etc..

"^Tr

+ f^

quire, reach.

+ ^R,

l^(rr«o7/, vr«ute')coYer,surround.

+

obtain
(BWfl
»

+

«[ (dundti),

intr.,

or distress;

tr.,

burn, feel pain

^XJ scatter.
(hindti) send.

back.
W+Jf^E[t(jpratyaJidratt) bring

pain or distress

(ace.)

Subst.:

^rrf TT

f^^cT

m., food.
m., day.

^r:^T m., doorkeeper.
trflTrm. pi., n. pr., certain

TT3TTW m., might, power.

demons.

XXXV.

Lesson

HR

m., enjoyment.

"^J m.,

ni ->

°^T*I

a Brahman in the

third period of his

1(5^

sharing.
f- 0-^lT,

JRtfT>

entrancing, agree-

able.

life.

f^TT m., Brahman.

T?ER«fl

sound; noise; word.

m.,

holy,

auspicious.

taste, feeling.

TTfH^

°^n, meritorious,

f.

TJTgi,

<R^T n., root.

151

^7J,

,

f.

f.

^tft, tasteful.

•%, similar; worthy.

Adj.:

o^T, new.

f.

•TO,

Exercise XXXV.

^rRTTTf^Tt RTTT ^ ^tR*|*npf

TOir: JTOTf§

*Rci:

1

i

m

i

^iT^^jpn

Tj&fa-

^rw^^-r^j ^r«fr: ^^ tot** *r£*ttrTO^wftrw ^it>(5r *rt: ^*f ^^nnrr ^ f%3rr^n-

f^fT^: irofa 8
•jto

*TfT*rR7^R ^n^TT

I

^TCrRTTRR

I

1

$ ^f%^ ftrp^f^fTT
I

^^m

*ftlj

^^"R

I

9

1

W^R TTTR lifter ^$f^?TO WBHJ RTTflT^T*RTOq en

c

i

11.

**p?i*nf^

to ^twttto irf^MK^MfeR:

entered

Having

the

i

Q.

i

*jf^cf:

temple of the worshipful(H*R<^)-

Visnu we heard the ear-entrancing 03Tf?T*Rt^T) song-of-the-young-

women

(use *r*T at end of cpd).

voted (f%^, pass, part.) friend.

who are always gathering
*

**

Infin. of

The

12.

13.

riches,

Listen to this

The greedy

word of a de-

(wT*T

,

pass, part.),

never attain the enjoyment of

<J.

instr. is

sometimes used

or distance or road, traversed.

to express the

medium, or space

152

Lesson

them.

By

14.

XXXV. XXXVI.

well-composed poems ye

tasteful,

in the ten regions of the world

mined

to travel to

Benares.

17.

May

attain glory

15,

Cakuntala, mayest thou

16.

My-ftoo-brothers deter-

(f^Q.

get (imv.) a husband worthy-of-thee.

may

the king's-sword bring grief to

imv. or opt.) the hearts-of-the-wives-of-his-enemies.

(«[,

cover the sky.

Lesson

of this sub -class end already in
erable irregularity



^—

The few

^J as class-sign.

the

^

strong forms,

and dropped (optionally, but

before ^f and

^

rf;^

(or

cTfT%, etc.

3^;
du.

all like

The

394.

root

1st pi.,

in-

in

the

being gunated
in fact

^

makes

<fftf*T,

1st pi. 71*3?^ (or
7f«J*T*0;

nearly always)

rfftfa, etc.;

1st

mid. TT^T, cT^%.

a vowel-root of the raj-class.

lcfi,

the class-sign

and

'stretch',

d«J«NO>



The

of 1st dual and plural.

Thus rf^,

393.

roots (only six)

except one, ^J, of consid-

and so add only

flection is quite that of the rm-class,

du.

Clouds

XXXVI.

Class IV. B. wclass.

Verbs.

392.

18.

19. Let the doorkeeper close the door.

'make', makes the strong stem

is

always dropped before

and also before

^T

^

of the opt. active.

weak

cjf^t,

and ?^

Thus

in

1st

:

Indicative.

Middle.

Active.

*b^

44|V!|^

«5^
^^r

$M«i

^NT

l-

^iftfa

^pf*c

2.

^RTtfci

3.

^iftffT

i.

^ran^m;

2.

^«*0h.

^r%

f^

$$%
^#t§

3g^

^^TH

^frf

^ra^ff

*$tfff

^^

Imperfect.

^^f

^$*

^^

^gVR

^<*M

^<*W*l ^*4l«ll^ ^f^^R*

XXXVI.

Lesson

153

Imperative.
1.

3

<*TTTftr sfiTTR

*RTWT*

*fiT%

^T^N% W^T^Tf

<«Wl

^4lHI*i

<$4dl*l

3rfT<J

$MT*l

^j3*T

splm

^i^

^fa

^^t*r

^^Nrff

<pf?*frr

etc.

etc.

etc.

etc.

etc.

etc.

Optative.
i.

Participle.

395. This root sometimes assumes (or retains from

^

original condition) an initial

The

396.
'in

view';

adverbial prefixes

f?R3J.

after the prefix ?J7{*;

^Jlf%^ and *n<p*,>
'out

'through',

'forth to sight',

XR^

of sight';

'in

forward'; and the purely adverbial "^^T^ 'enough,
are often used with

^r^

'be' and

H

and with one or two other verbs, oftcnest

or adjective-stem

to be

is liable

with verbal forms or derivatives of the roots

manner of a verbal
or an e-vowel,

it

is

prefix.

changed

to f";

if



to

his

^S^ change

an w-vowel, to

those letters to

own', 'appropriates';

ashes',

compounded

and W,

^

the

Conso-

consonant-

before

i.

e.

'burns':

Thus, ^T«fiO fd

f^.

^^chOfa

O

(*PHi

The

'

ne

he CDan g es

'

^roft^frT 'becomes a post' 05RT);

^r^jf^ffi 'becomes pure' ("Tf^); ^TT^r^ttfT 'makes
398.

in

of course with observance of the usual euphonic rules;

but stems in

makes

cfj

of the stem be an a- vowel

If the final

nantal stems take the form which they have

endings

front,

sufficient',

'become'.

Any noun

397.

cG,

a more

thus, ^P^i-

suffixes TfT (f.)

and

^

(n.)

are very

holy'.

extensively

used to form abstract nouns, denoting 'the quality of being so-

*

Also sometimes after XJT\ and

"^t|.

154

Lesson
from

and-so',

^ff^SI^

XXXVI.

both adjectives and noons.

Thus, ^rf^WTI

^i

'the rank of a Ksatriya'.

D->

Vocabulary XXXVI.

+ MI4H. make known, or

Verbs:

make.

^R (karoti, kurute) do,

+

do

nJIXJ

evil

to

,

harm

+ WC

(gen.,

loc, or ace).

(dviskardti)

do good

xJTJ

^•^
make

to,

tend
benefit (gen.,

loc).

+

(ksanoti, ksanute)

with (ace).

*n^

+

T?fFT

(tr.);

+

tJJT

+

jj

f^T^T. hide; blame, find fault T^f

+

adorn

;

wound.

tanute) stretch, ex-

cT«^ (tanoti,

exhibit.

known,

+

(§ 395) prepare,

consecrate.

+ ^F5TH P re pare. adorn

+ "^Tf^^

visi-

ble.

perform (a

sacrifice).

cause, bring about.

spread abroad

(tr.).

be defiled.

(diisyati)

T\*{ (manute) think, consider.

put at the head.

pay, recompense; punish

(ace. ret, gen., dat.orloc. pers.).

Subst.:
priest of a cer-

rn.,

•ftfW

tain kind.

^jfHlTmni-5 plan; view; opinion.

cRf%^
oRTf^cT

n.,

breast.

name

m.,
f-,

^It^FFT
^T«J*H«$|

^nfra m

conduct of

f..

politics.

^Ttf^J m., progeny, descendant.

<3^^

fault.

'»••

^ffa

^fvTjftf^

!

VTWH

HTfH
of a tribe.

m., king.

*T*TT«T^r n-» kitchen.
n.,

flesh.

^f^TJT n., salt.

charm, grace.

<*l3H

m., astonishment.

3J^TT m

n.,
->

a certain sacrifice.

name of a

fHT^rftTjft

f-,

veil.

tribe.

n., spice.
->

trade.

TiT^Ef m., doubt.

JfS

m--,

cook.

life;

ethics;

Lesson

XXXVI.
^WT,

Adj.:
f.

^}*1,

^TCTO,
°ir,

f-

°^,

f-

=5^5,

«^IT, blind.
f.

155

*T*f.

necessary.

f.

dear.

°^JT,

o^,

f.

^l^T.

°^n^ knowing.

°1f.

false.

wrong,

good, proper.

o^STT,

ready.

°"H^ enjoying.

Exercise XXXVI.

^wft

3j*ftarT"fa tj: firsr: fr?^r to*

i

tt^r: ^fttlwrf ?rf^jrr*rfwrRt "sj*n ^rf^r

*?r

f^fWT ^rfaT^J^T ifa-sjMUM
8.
9.

w.

friends

O

thy friends even now.

done me a

service.

four princes

13.

15.

What

11.
12.

By

May

the

according

Caulukyas held sway

the

^

II

II

Great-King, protect thy kingdom, benefitting

and harming thy enemies.

with the trade-in-salt.

the

*4H«IIHM|J|^f^T

Every-year an Agnihotrin must perform the Caturmasya (pi.)-

Mayest thou,

thy

fTc^f^M 131

I

recompense him

command
to the

(TJ*$

Brahmans

10.

fault

find

thou didst (mid.), that distresses

^d)

law (f^TO,
in

(dat.)

who

has

of the great-king consecrate
14.

instrS).

Anahilapataka

247

The

years.

By-the-charm-of-her-face the lotus-eyed eclipses (fflTTfO even

moon.
*

16. If

Poss. cpd,

one consecrates a scholar
cf.

§ 374,

5.

,

teaches him

,

makes

156

XXXVI. XXXVII.

Lesson

him holy, then

one becomes his child (H^l).

this

of-the-Kalingas wounded

his

enemy

in the

17.

The

king-

breast with an arrow.

Lesson XXXVII.
399.

Verbs,

rca-class.

the syllable «TT ^a

[TJJT

?a],

weak forms

it is

«ft

in the

of an ending the

^

l

The

class-sign

m

[TJ^ nt]

of «ft nt

[Tjft nl]

in

the strong forms

but before an initial vowel

;

disappears altogether.

400. Thus, ^ft 'buy': strong stem
krtni (before a vowel, sffan

is

accented, which is added to the root;

sflUJJ

krind,

weak

shl^jfl

krln).

Indicative.

Middle.

Active.

«fW^i

«tIHu^

Imperfect.

°Wfaff
2.

wftrra:

^to;

3-

WfarTri;

4|shl<in<TTR: -41shl<!H

1-

sfluufa

^RTCT^

2-

^Wff ^WfT^ ^Wf?

3.

^T<5Tfl[

i-

^teftaro; sflufl^r^

^sflufld

°wt«ito:

°'U!MIH

°TlfTfr

WrI

Imperative.

shKHd'R;

sRtcm

«RT%
shYufr^

WfrT«rT

W\W\t\TH

sfH <!T I

<T 1T«=C

sfl«!!ril*i

Optative.

etc.

etc.

^NfNrr*
etc.

^NfNj

^VnfNff

etc.

etc.

aifcffrTfi
etc.

Participle.

401.

The ending

of the 2nd sing. imv. act.

and there are no examples of

its

omission.

is

f^, never f%f;

But roots of

this class

Lesson

XXXVII.

157

ending in a consonant substitute for both class-sign and ending in

person the peculiar ending tSJTT and; thus, ^\fT»T ^JIJT'T' 5T-

this

,

TR,

§§ 402, 403).
^fTTIT (see

The

402.
class-sign

*Jf

roots

thus,

;

in

ending

The root TCZ

UfTivJ.

TJ«nf?I,

TJ,

^f shorten that vowel before the
is

weakened

to

thus, J|^,|fa-

;

A

403.

few roots which have a nasal

the present-system, lose

^ifa;

^TffT; «!**,

404.
itself is

W

Root-class.

in the present;

it

v

or

^n»,

it

some forms outside

thus,

is

U7t or

1J7VI

^T

Similarly,

^T^rrf^T-

In this class there

present-stem, and to

also

in

,

^T-

makes

no class-sign; the root

are added directly the per-

sonal-endings; in the opt. (and subj.: §60, end) of course combined

with
it,

the

in the

mode-sign.

Roots ending in vowels.

405.
inflected

The root-vowel

if

capable of

Roots

in

^T

of this class are

In the 3rd pi. impf. act.

only in the active.

optionally take as ending

before

takes guna,

strong forms.

^3^

they

it.*

406.

Thus,

*n

3 .

'go

Indicative.

Imperfect.

i.

*nf?r

*trs:

*rre^

^^tr:

*wi4

3.

^nt>i

^rrcra:

*nf*?r

^?n<i

^^rRrm;

^rrt
^rcn^
or

The same ending
roots

may

instead of ,?J^, the ^JT being lost

ending

in

is

consonants;

also allowed
viz.

and met with

lf^^ 'know',

"^H^EC

in

^f, f?^

a few
,

Spg,

158

Lesson

]

XXXVII.

Lesson

TTT^

m.,

demon.

^PJ^kT

•TTT m., snake.

f-i

height, elevation

;

high

position.

^T^f n., leading-rope, cord.

*W^

159

Adj.:

(§ 278) m., stirring-stick.

of to-day.

55«<S|rl«1*

*l«rfT m., n. pr., a mountain.

\nf^R

IJTJ m., sacrificial post.

"JT^W (P art °f "T-^T^) kindly dis-

rjf^li

forehead.

n.,

1^"^ [yard)

m.

,

posed.
bride-

suitor,

°f^S knowing.

2~^X (vara) m., choice, privilege,
favor.

who

shrewd.

fd|cjf«ti ,l.

groom.

^JH m.,

right, just.

Adv.:

^RHJH
a snake -demon

n. pr.,

in

before,

the presence

of (w. gen.).

supports the earth.

Exercise XXXVII.

fefTf

TffRWfff ^T^iTf^nfrf^^

II

*M

II

^feraTHfa^*l*!*fH: n^iT %^fa^ ^lf^> |#rTT^I
^%^ M^?l«ijdg ^53 T^WNfsrT * ^"PTT «*lMlfM
<\

II

w

2^*J

1TT

**m3 ^Tt^RTT^:

ii

m

ii

n^vjsra

^T^rr^f
II

$

«

?^IHWf5f5iWT!rT
9. Allow me to go now.

With

the suffix

viM

*raT

TTMMM^rtJ JI^UNI^ffT TTT fwf'rT
II

^

f?rr \^V~
H^ ^^ HTfa cTOT
^ ^fcT*T^P^f JJ^<II-

WT"nrr
||

I

II

II

II

II

cT«T

10.

Take

these jewels which I have

(sometimes «^) are made adjectives from

adverbs, especially of time; thus,
'
1}4$M of the morrow'.

Tfijf

'ancient',

HIHt^M

'early',

1

60

XXXVII. XXXVIII.

Lesson

given

you

^«tj

a

)

(pass,

11.

constr.).

Let the great poet weave

verse-wreath of word-pearls

thieves robbed the king's treasury.
gifts

from every one

the world by his will

is

salvation to the gods' protection.

by

en's

We

17.

punishments.

(pres. part.) of the

house.

hand before the

other's leavings

saw

fire.

(^^-fspi

-

Betake thyself

15-

two

receives (pari.)

The Creator formed

34.

).

("?T»2J,

E very-day

(^fT) for

Let kings restrain the wicked

Rama's

coming out

daughter

Let the bridegroom grasp the maid-

18.

,

16.

He who

13.

polluted (H'q

Oft^^TT) a l° De

12.

(instr.).

19.

An Aryan

pass, part.,

bathe daily in unconfined (part, from
three-eyed god, the great-lord

neut.
-

f^T-

(f^nO

must not
20.

sing.).

?^)

water.

eat

an-

One must

21.

the

May

whose-forehead-is-adorned-

with-the-crescent, protect yon.

Lesson XXXVIII.
Root -class, cont'd.*

Verbs.

407.

Roots ending

or an w-vowel (except \/^ 'go') change these into
before vowel-endings in
408.

Root

^

'go'

'go over for oneself,

comes ^Tf

,

weak forms, when

(act.,
i.

e.

an i-vowel

in

^f

and

^a

not gunated.

but used in mid. with the prep. ^rfVT :
'repeat, learn, read'; the

^

then be-

as above).

Indicative.

Active.
i-

irf*J

t^c.

A number

Middle.

T*ret

^ft%

"wfa%

"wN%

of roots belonging to this class accent the rootin weak as well as in
strong forms except

syllable throughout,

of course in the imperfect.



Lesson XXXVIII.

161

Imperfect.

augment

(for

3-

%t

§ 179.)

^TW<T

^STR^

^<Tm:

cf.

^JW^TrTm:

^T^HT

^rsj*rre%

^rw^TRt

Imperative.
i.

wrfa

wmv

-4j4iici

^ji?

Optative.
<i,q\*{ etc., 3rd pi.

^J^

^^fftfftr

etc.

Participle.

^TnT,
409.
?!%, ijfr
part.

f.

The

t[T7T, imv.

^

root

SNf etc

-

5

(mid.), 'lie', has

impf. ^TClf*?,

f-

°^IT

guna throughout; thus,

^^T^

etc.

;

^fTR;,

The

^J^Sf,

opt. VJ*fl±I etc.,

Other irregularities are the 3rd persons

Tr^nT-

410.

^farR,

^nffr

indie.

pi.:

impf. ^TCp;?T-

roots of this class ending in

^

have

in their

strong

forms the vrddhi instead of the ^wna-strengthening before an ending
beginning with a consonant.
411.

Thus,

**?

'praise':

Indicative.

Active.

Middle.

i.

^Tfa

^rar,

2.

^frfa

^nm

^

3.

^PrfTT

^?ra:

^^fr

Act.:

Imperfect.

^^^^.

Mid.:

1.

Imperative.

^jR^T

Mid.:

Optative,

1.

4|*d4*t,
3rd

^THr,
Act.

:

^J^TT^

pi.

^efTR,

^f, ^p^,

Perry, Sauskrit Primer.

^ ^f*
^% wr%
^ ^^

^F*C

^rfTT*C,

etc.

2.

3.

^^ffar^,

^f
^^

^%

^ra^,

3rd

pi.

3rd

pi.

^TcTcr

^ff

,

^ffa,

^TWT^f

*3TR

etc.,

3rd

etc.

pi.

,

^pTcTT?{-

fejcH'tf etc.
.

.

162

XXXVIII

Lesson
Act.: t^ct *T

Participle.

The

412.

.

f.

%HH

Mid.:

°^rft

-

root ^, 'say', takes the union-vowel Rafter the root

when strengthened,

before the initial consonant of an ending.* Thus:
Indicative.

Middle.

Active.

W^

sT^frfa

1.

Imperative.

Mid.

:

sT%,

Act.

Optative.

sj^
:

it

'own

Mid.

etc.

JC^ift

.

Mid.

:

The

Emphatic Pronoun.

along with

seldom

:

pi.

etc.

$H\t{

«S«4*^ signifies 'self,
ative,

3rd

1-

Act.

Participle.
413.

^<R%

^sffl^ ^TW^t^; ^5T^ etc.;
^fa, ^5T^ etc -5 3rd P *W^TAct.: sHnfrf,
ff$> snfftj; sfTR etc.; 3rd

Mid.:

^Tsf^l.-

5pT*J.

^5f

Act.: ^rsre^,

Imperfect.
pi.

3%

5W*C

self.

words of

all

:

Wcffa

etc.

WTI«Tuninflected

It is oftenest

persons

pronominal

word

used as a nomin-

and numbers; bnt not

represents other cases also.

Vocabulary XXXVIII.

+

Verbs:

Tf explain,

+ fa
+ ^TTV

+ Um

(adhUe) repeat, read.

(apditi)

go away,

depart.

'^rf^ approach.

+

^1 *sm set (of heavenly bodies).

+

^^

+ ^TJ

rise (of

+ fa

+

scream.

(fete) lie, sleep.
^lf\sl lie

+

speak, say, state.

TJ

sj[f*T

inflected like

asleep on (ace).

bring forth.

*jl (stautt)

W^fa- Some

praise.

verb are occasionally met with,
of the verbs in ^J are allowed to be

Special irregularities in this

such as

announce.

heavenly bodies). ?J (sute) bring forth, bear.

approach.

^f (braviti, brute)

;

explain, etc.

"^ (rduti) cry, scream.

^

+

teach

3\ but forms so made are rare.

Lesson XXXVIII.

Subst.:

f^^T

f.,

of Buddha.

m

^TT^I

tongue.

flower.

oR^TJT,

n- 5 sense,

f-

°^,

ready.

f.

°"^n, lamentable.

°W\ fX*i, making,
understanding.

doing.

Adv.:

m., killing, murder.

"^•rfpT m.,

witness.

crane.

3^ftf«T5^ diligent, energetic.

JT*r m., question.

^V

»

7

^(TJf m., logic.

*TPfrcr

->

Adj.:

^<T,

tjtti n.,

m

^nf^T'l.

name

f^i«Tm., n.pr., a

1G3

on

down,

below,

^^T^.

n. pr.

the

ground.

companion

>ft

f.,

wife.

Exercise XXXVIII.

^rtt^



264)

Xf <T

II

^

II

wmi* Jfajwfa

^lf5T

^TT^TlW ^5WT

wmmi

FR^Nm

^n«fiHci,i^MfTr^fT^i */% ifJTOfa

*nf ^*rrf*T

n *.%

^Frf^fr^f^T^tf^^TSWt ^

$

I

ii

8

f^f^:
f^M
$
j^rfai ^^*pf?r
*rf55i% t^i n ^ n ^T^rHh: fwr*re u^m n c
*r<3ft:

*nwn
11.

and
13.

^w

The

n

n o. n

*t fm^i

m

*rRT^tf%

I

^frft*rr-

11

m

ii

^3ftf*re

^ftfir fff^Ti
n

^ ct*f^tt:

$\*\£\ TrafHTT^rn: ^fr^crr:

three wives of Dacaratha bore four sons.

Laksmana,

Women

f^rNr

ii

II

ii

followed-by-Slta,

went

(^)

12.

the

into

Rama
forest.

whose-husbands-are-dead must sleep six months

the ground.

seen-or-heard

on

14.

A

witness stating anything other-than-what-was-

is

to

be punished (Jut. pass. part.).

departs from one-who-has-done-penance.

16.

15.

One must
11*

All

guilt

not look

Lesson XXXVIII.

164
at

(1?-%^

)

XXXIX.

the rising or the setting sun.

Why

17.

hast thou

to-my-house with-wife and with-children?

(^rfjJ-T)

Varuna'':

Cunahcepa who was bound

thus the gods addressed

the sacrificial post.

19.

Always

come

"Praise

18.

speak the truth.

to

In a kingless

20.

land the rich do not sleep in peace 0FR§«T).

Lesson
414. Verbs.

XXXIX.

Root-class, cont'd.

The endings of the 2nd and 3rd

Roots ending in consonants.

sing. impf. act. are generally

and the resulting root-final treated according
Cf. §§ 239, 242.

finals.

But a root ending

in

a dental mute some-

times drops this final mute instead of the added

W

^

in

either case

instead of the added <^

in

^ some-

in

the third person:

the ordinary relation of

establishing

the second

in

person; and, on the other hand, a root or stem ending
times drops this

dropped,

to the usual rules for

^

and

fT

in

the second and third persons.
415.
c^, ^f

^^

Roots

and

^

in

^ and

'speak': ^f^T, ^TW>
416.

5?

substitute ^j for those letters before

(which then becomes
*(flfi

Root lf^^ 'know,

^

);

(act.

%fa

Imv.: %^Tf5T,
f%rt,
*

f^J-



before

V



Thus,

Imperfect.

f^ret

fa^e;

31

only):

Indicative.
i.

and

(only these three forms used).

f%rfe,

^3

w§%*t

%^j;

Opt.: f%3TPR;,

%^R,

f^rTR;,

^if%?r

f^TR*; %^T*,

etc.

In the inflection of roots with final consonant, of this class and

the reduplicating and nasal classes, euphonic rules find very frequent application. The student is therefore advised at this point
to read carefully the chief rules of euphonic change in Whitney's

Grammar, §§

139

— 232

(the

two larger

sizes of print).

XXXIX.

Lesson

165

This root also makes a perfect without reduplication (but

417.

otherwise regular) which has always the value of a present.
indie, are:

forms of the

fro

1.

pi.

^f, 3.%^; du. 1. f%^, 2. f^J^, 3. f^fT^;
f^, 3. f^^. The participle is f^^T^, faf^

1.%^,

Sing.

2.

2.

f.

§268).

(cf.

The

418.

root tJT?, 'eat' (act.), inserts If before the endings

of the 2nd and 3rd sing. impf.

The

419.

root ||^,

thus,

;

'kill'

-41

1

<^,

is

(act.),

^TT^fl.-

treated

Indicative.

ffa

2.
3.

ff^rT



f^RC

f^

frTO:

^Tf*rT

Opt.: i<H\l{

Roots

420.

becomes W),
before

^

in%

as are

Imperfect.

Imv.: f^TTfa, *rff*,
^ffT.

somewhat

Thus:

noun-stems in ^f^ in declension (§ 283).

^

The

,

^

substitute

,

Wx

before ?^ and

^cH*

^frT

^ffTm;

^^
fTR,

f^T^, fcP*, fcTO*;

f^s

— Part.: ^«a

etc.

^

^WK
^1^

becomes £)•
\^ (which

^

before

(which become

Thus,

f<f,

Wt

f.

,

f^

^

(which then

and ^), and
'hate' (act. and
"Z

mid.):

Indicative

2.

3.

if^
Its

f^*;
firs*:

Act.

Imperfect

^
^z

f^
f^rfa

Imv. Act.: %crrfr!\ flFff%>
421.

^nrra,

*

^,

'see' (mid.):

^T?h TOf, ^ff.

Anomalous

3f %^T^
5

Pres. Ind.:

dissimilation.

^W —

Act.

^rf^i

^f^H

^sro; ^fs^
etc.

^%, ^%, ^TJ; ^T^f%,
Im P f *Wfa> w*»k«u
- :

166

XXXIX.

Lesson
422.

1.

'

$"*^,

^ and \r

with

weak forms
423.

;

rule

contracted to xj*^

*T5f

,

^

(mid.), inserts

thus, 2nd sing,



ffipt
;

before endings beginning
2.

wish

'

^*^,

roots in *T.

(act.), is in

thus, 3rd. pi. ^Sjf^J.

weak forms when

in

the endings begin with a

the treatment of the root-final this verb

In

'

'rub', 'clean' (act.), has vrddhi in the strong forms,

and optionally also
vowel.

'

Thus,

ind. 3rd sing.

du.

JTrfSj

3TH^,

follows
pi.

the

4J?|f*f or

Vocabulary XXXIX.

+

Verbs:

own ( w

%t

(*>'?

^5T

(ca'.ste)+^TTrelate

+

e)

ru ' e 5

;

-

gen.).

call,

name

+ TI

hate extremely.

+ ^m

wipe away,

~^H

3JT3iTW

n -s

grammar.

CQ1J3 m.j n. pr., a Rishi.

m., decay, destruction.
n.,

smite.

kill.

off.

m., lip.

^^

^IWT
^Tq

eye.

f-,

hesitation.

m., n. pr.,

a

%7f m., conqueror.

^Tc! n., learning.

^€TT £ } compassion, pity.

JfT[ m., creation.

vmif

m., destruction.

*f«T ni., n. pr.,

f^lfff

a name of

(piva.

7T«ftm., sacred text; spell, charm.

^HU
^TtT
*.

m.,
d-i

do

(aparadhnoti)

(vdsti) wish.

+ fif

Subst.:

^t^

off.

"^PJ

Tpt+^rfH

(mdrsti) rub, wipe.

ff^t

+

lf^(Z (vetti; veda) know, consider.

(dvesti, dviste) hate.

f$^(

wipe

wrong.

^*^

explain.

cf(\

TT

^TTO

watch (of the

conduct.

night).

f.,

name

of Qiva.

condition, existence.

Adj.:

^r^T,

f.

pable.

°^n, blameworthy,

cul-

XXXIX.

Lesson

167

Exercise XXXIX.

n%fH ^rrwwrrrg

TtrWgT-pT fT>T
*HI ^TTTnT

w

^^

*r

'NM3

*^T ^MHd*
q

^TT| -d^N^g*i
%
xrf^qcft"

II

t<*K3:

^

ii

11

I

**=

II

II

irf Tt^ THW> fipRT-

II

*rretf

ii

ii

«i^dTH

^i^nif^r

TO*ra ffsR TIT ff*W

tjw

f^j^rerot%fd « h m

f^

*ri %^T<?jsNTf*r-

^t*t *tr%

*it
8
grwg
*tpr
mi
^
^t
*rt
-mR^i
^iT^fs
W3R$
f^rerefw^f
^^t^^i WTrTO t^: $
^WT^trTtfr ^TTf^f^ ^TOl
*mm<i^' fT^r^^ruf ^f *ft: *J"nrra^ *rf if* ^ n ^t>-

f^«

3

ii

n

i

*j

1

i

ii

<T

II

II

11

wen' ^t# *nwta u qo u ^*fa

fa*rn

ii

fa^JT

(§ 374, 6)

zr^TT

Hear

words of the learned man who explains

12.

g.

it

n

the

^TWI^
13.

part.) the-scienee-of-grammar.

son, famous

in the-three-worlds,

of Ravana,

lord-of-Lanka.

thrice,

one wipes the

lips twice;

warriors smote (^rf^-IpO

had murdered

their

("^(m) a teacher
17.

you.

of-Pandu.
greatly,

w

tn

my

19.

tears

Rama

Having sipped

(ace.)

(pres.
is

the

and the conqueror

(^TT-^*0 water
15.

Two

arrows the king-of-the-Angas, who
16.

companions.

The women

that

of Dacaratba,

Kill without-hesitation even

(past. pass, part.) in order to kill

learning-and-conduct?

wiped the

tpftrn*

II

according to others, once.**

who approaches

me a £udra,
18.

Do

though

know-

not hate the sons-

w^ose-sons-u:ere-dead, having lamented

from their eyes.

over bipeds and quadrupeds
*

i

Know

dost thou consider (f%^)

Why

ing (iCT ger.)

14.

<M

II

20.

Thou,

O

Lord, rulest

(gen.).

Refers to false witness before a court.

An

untruth where

small beasts (sheep, etc.) are concerned, involves the destruction
of five ancestors ; where cattle are concerned, of ten, etc.

Lesson XL.

108

Lesson XL.
424.

Verbs.

Root-class, cont'd.

^STl^

^rr%> ^rrir, ^rr%; ^rrefetc.; ^rr^ff,
^rrf^, "^rr^rT^,

^rx^r

'sit'

^n^*,

im?. ^rr%, ^rre^r,

etc.

(mid.):

Indie.

wm%

impf.

^i^ih

etc.

Part.

irrafcT (unique).

The

425.

forms

with

indie,

sing.

weak

2nd sing. imv.
in

weakened stem fj^f

f^risg^ etc.;

but 3rd

WRT^ W^**; ^rf^

The extremely common

426.
in

du.

etc.;

in the
(act.), substitutes

the

Imv. 2nd sing. ^TfV; 3rd

Wrercrvowel

mf^I

^ntTOt,

Iinpf.:

'command'

root 3Jf^,

consonant- endings

forms, except

etc.;

the 2nd and 3rd

sing.

root l^f^, 'be'

when protected by

impf.

^

but

weak
thus,

U}iqfif.
3rd pi.

pi. STTOrT-

(act.),

loses its

The

the augment.

TjfV; in the 2nd sing, iudic. one

is

pi.

;

^

is

omitted;

inserted before the ending.

is

Thus:
Indicative.

^ W^

1-

"?fW

2.

'STfa

1.

^WTf^T

^T*t

Imperative.

2

ITfa

3.

wm

^W[

wm.

427.

^
^,

^TCTR

Roots

and >J into
|f

in

^TCTR

Opt.:

^TR

^1

Part.:

^nT

becomes ^B;

^fT^f.

f.

^\

^rft.

*r*r

^

(except

in

f^^

and ^^) combine

2nd and 3rd

endings are dropped) the

Or

,

^

with

<^,

and then lengthen preceding "% ^, ^; before

<g,

and mid.): Impf.

etc.; 3rd pi.

act.:

sing. impf.

becomes ^.

^
^%f^,

"3T%Z,

So ^ITin^ or "30"*^

act.

Thus, f^Jf

^Z;

(where the
'lick' (act.

^f^5, wte**,

(imv., impf.).

Lesson XL.

In the two roots

428.

'smear'

(act.),

'milk' (act. and mid.), and fs^,

^^",

^

the final

169

an earlier guttural which

represents

Thus, from

reappears in the inflection.

«gt|:

Indicative.

2.

^jtrV

fierce

3.

^TfHf**

^l^

Ind. mid.:

^^TRC,

^r

wn«

^1^1

^ti^

^f*fT

^TV^R

^f^TOR;

1*$$^

^|, T*%, ^3$;

The

roots

^^,

°^ftr>

insert either

frf^fa

f^f*T,

^

,

Impf. mid.:

^Tfff,

1

'weep',

^

with a consonant, except

where they

etc.

Wf^ff etc.; ^^frff, ^TW^, ^TffcT^^, ^Tm;; ^tfT^f etc.; ^lW|, V* ^,

'breathe' (all act.), insert

g^,

o[£f

"^f^T;

Imv. mid.: ^tf,

429.

Imperfect.

or

^lf% ^[f%,

etc.,

3rd

°^rT;

Ttf^

^Sf

pi.

and

'breathe',

?^

of 2nd and 3rd sing, impf.,

Thus,

etc.;

3rd

^jft^,
pi. ^q[^\

^n^Cetc.

-

^-

Pres. indie:

?£<?:

Impf.:

^firT.

Opt.:

^Ft,

'sleep',

before all endings beginning

or %.

^^f^
etc.

5<^tJ,

^

^ft^

or

Imv.: ^t-

(^TT being mode-sign).

Vocabulary XL.

Verbs:
^St% (dniti) breathe.

+

TT (prdniti) live.

^R^

^m.
-f

(aste)

^TJ

sit

sit.

by

;

wait upon

;

at-

tend; reverence.

(dsti) be.

*
cf.
*

§§ 244, 249.

When

the final sonant aspirate of a root is followed by
?^
or 7f of an ending, the whole group is made sonant, and the aspiration of the root-final is not lost, but is transferred to the initial

of the ending.

170

Lesson XL.

^^ + JT-fa

(pravicdlati)

move, f%TTv + ^iWT approach.

stir (tr.).

^^

«T^ (dogdhi, dugdhe) milk.
*fl«jlv

+

f^f

(nimllati)

+

shut (the

or

f^T^f (ledhi, lldhe) lick.

^m

of pers.)
(uttisthati) arise.

lick.

m., hair.

^7T

n., gift,

Adj.:

RlUlj

generosity.

f.,

3flre^T

m., n., club, pestle.

maiden.

girl,

f-

H+ITI,

f-

?IT firm, resolute.

°^n, shrewd,
0,
?rr, right,

°

skilled.

proper.

,

?n', careless.

Iudecl.:

n., sacrifice.

n.

f-

,

^TRZT,

T$ftpt n -> blood.

,

0,

f-

\JYT!i

mm

*jfacT m.

m., shoulder.

33ff*CT

m., enjoyment.

^Jf

TUtH

gently,

confident, trust (w. gen.

loc.

+ ^^*

TfTT

Subst.:

^XJJ^J

or J&HJ breathe

^SfT

+ f% be
weep.

(roditi)

+

(gvdsiti) breathe.

revive.

eyes).

^^

command, govern.

^JT^C. (f&ste)

(degdhi) smear.

fe?

3?TfT?3

pr.,

the sun -god

ear br >

m

toe morning.

VTSP^ greatly, much.

Savitar; the sun.

Exercise

^le^lrM^: TTfT^jffirT

^u% f *rr

%*fr Tpoti

fm*n<l

ii

q

After

^WTH^

for

n

f*rewf

^,

^^

BrJi^sft

*ftTT:

^

II

^Q.

II

TT5rr*mw Trfa *Tfa-

u% i froftrfa

the initial

^r^JTfW;.

XL

of ^fT and

«rflr*n^

^PW

is

ii

*

ii

*fr-

dropped; thus,

Lesson XL. XLI.

^TfatlT

^

J|«rJ*HTjl<fr

$

ii

ii

wsr^t ^Tf^r
11.

law.

ii

w

Long may

12.

^gig

^rt f%rs:

13.

The

the guest:

"where

wept

Know

^

n

n

^rft irrcprr:

^

ii

^

u

ii

Nala by name

(«TTfl),

son of

lion, satiated-with-the-blood-of-the-slain-gazelle,

his

14.

tongue.

didst thou

bitterly

16.

daily.
*7

(^nj^).

that that

Let the householder say to

sleep during the night"?

cowherd milked the cows twice
his father,

*R[fT

II

the great-king govern the earth according to

mouth with

licked his

M

II

^R^m

nfw faTT

There was a mighty king

Virasena.

-

girl?

world

lives, is the world-spirit.

reverence the sun (^jf^rf)-

no salvation for you

19.

20. If

Having

15.

The

The boy, beaten by

Whose daughter

by which thou

18.

will be

*PsTRt snTTrt

fwr ttR

jj^s^vjf^ftrn:

^H^%

*rer:

$TO^*IT

171

livest,

art thou,

and the whole

arisen in the morning,

you do not praise Rama, there

(use ^PEt> in pres. opt.).

Lesson XLI.
430. Verbs. Reduplicating Class. This class forms the present-

stem by prefixing a reduplication
431.
1.

The

to the root.*

rules governing the reduplication are as follows:

The consonant

of the reduplicating syllable

the first consonant of the root; thus, 27, <^2JTpirate is substituted for an aspirate;
*

and

is

in general

But, (a) a non-as-

(b) a palatal for a guttural

Only a small proportion of the roots of

this class retain the

In the great maaccent on the root-syllable in the strong forms.
jority, the accent is on the reduplication, both in the strong forms
and in those weak forms whose endings begin with vowels.

Lesson XLI.

172
or

thus, V[\,

^;

f^f^;

^TT; f^Tf,

jft,

f«n£t;

(<0 if the

r00t

begin with a sibilant followed by a non-nasal mute, the latter
repeated (with observance of a), not the sibilant; thus,

A

2.

and ^g

is

long vowel

is

^gfT,

is

fT^T-

shortened in the reduplicating syllable;

replaced by T; thus, <*^T and

^TT

above;

*ft,

f%*ft;

fw

**,

432.

The present-stem gunates

forms; thus, f^ft, strong
433.

the 3rd

The verbs

pi. in

impf. act.

434.
cf.

§§

fro, strong f^TT-

of this class lose the «^ from the endings of

the active as well as in the middle; and in the 3d pi.

always take

guna; thus,

f&;

the root-vowel in the strong

^^,

before which a final radical vowel has

^f^T^t-

Root W,

For 2nd and 3rd

'

bear, carry

'.

sing. impf. act.,

122, 414.

Indicative.

Middle.

Active.

f^ra;
fwrs;

f%wr^

f^

2.f%i*f^

faare

fkm

3.f^Hf(i

f^HtT^

fsrefa

f*WT

i.f*re?3

f^f|
fwro
f*Wm

f*w*%

^rfa^rff

°*|*rff

fsraicroR:

f^rem*;

fa*ra
f%**H

Imperfect.
i.

'srfsFRTc ^if*npr

^srfafsr

^rf^^fl

Imperative.

G

O

G

3.f^Hg

f^Hcn^

C

O

f^jfni

f^rag

Opt. act.: f^rj^rf^ etc -5 mid.: fsr^T^T

Part, act.:
435.
cal

vowel

Thp

fsp*^

roots

in the

(§ 259),

f.

and
l^T, 'give',

weak forms,

etc.

f^nffr; mid.: f^WTCTi.Tjrr,

leaving the

'put', lose their radi-

weak stems

^^

and ^el

.

Lesson XLI.
In the 2nd sing. imv. act. they form
of

>n

is

as follows

^f^

173
The

and vtlf-

inflection

:*

Indicative.

Active.
l-

3.

Middle.

^nfa

^ret

^*?s;

^v

^wf|

^r%

^rrfa

^ttto:

^^rfTT

\r%

^erra

^m

Imperfect.
i.

^«r\n^

^fa

^^cf%

^^rff

2.

^^*T*t ^hiti^ ^nrrr

^rawr^

^^nm*c

^ras*t

3.

^^Tfi: ^ttpr:

^^rarr

^vTcrnR:

^r«^ra

^rnrf

^nrf

^^^

^^*rr

^^

Imperative.
l-

Opt. act.:

<Jfc£||i^ etc.;

Part, act.: t[V^,
436.

The

root

^

^nw

^tr

^rrfa

1^7

f.

is

mid.:

^'vfl"^

mid.:

^\ffiT;

inflected

etc.

^^TR-

in precisely the

with change everywhere of \J to W, except where

same way, but

V

belongs to

the ending.

437.

The

root l^f, 'quit, abandon' (act.), drops the ^TT in

weak forms where

the ending begins with a vowel, and in the opt.;

thus, indie. 3rd sing. ^frf^T, pi.

ph ^J5TF^

;

In the other

opt. aniJTft.-

*

5Tffa^

or

sing.

"^fT^,

sing. imv. is SfifTff or 5jff ff .

weak forms before consonant-endings

^tfT or *|ff ; thus,
438.

Wff^T; impf. 3rd.

The 2nd

the stem

is

either

Wff*TO>

HIT, 'measure' (mid.), and 2^f, 'move, go' (mid.), form

In combination with <^ or

H

of an ending,

the TI

of

^y(

does not give U, but follows the general rule of aspirate and of
surd and sonant combination and the lost aspiration is thrown
;

back upon the

initial of the root.

174

Lesson XLI.

f*Tift and "fal^D before consonant-endings,

vowel-endings; thus, 3rd persons

^ 'pour,

439.

sacrifice' (act.

and f^nf before

f*i*^

indie. fij*ft%,

f*f*n%, fWJffi.

and mid.), makes the 2nd

sing.

3rd persons impf.
"SpSpft^,
5prf%i;

imv.

440.

}ft, 'fear' (act.),

1.

-faHtos: or t%fa*^,

thus,

ashamed'

^ksMUH,, ^^1^^may shorten its vowel in weak forms;

changes

(act.),

vowel-endings;

fwftrm:

its

thus, indie.

or

weak stem

f5frjf^

3rd persons



Wotr^to

f^ffa,

#,

2.

<

be

fafg^I before

fajfl<R0

fsj-

Vocabulary XLI.

+

Verbs:

lyr

+

+ f%(

(ddddli, datte) give.

+

Tf entrust.

close, shut.

^J&X

m.,

^T¥f?T

n.,

lay on.

be ashamed.

Adj.:

^,

oblation.
n. pr.

n., rest,

tfTRra

m

-5

° ne

of^,
f-

divine.
°^T> excellent,

able.

possessions, wealth.

1J^ m.,

f.

faf^JH>

JflJ m., gazelle.

f^Tf

;

end of religious pupilage.

at the

demon.

f-,

*rff^ m.,

put together

formed the ablution customary

safety; feeling of safety.

n.,

^f J^ unite,

j^" (jihreti)

Subst.:

^SmU

arrange, ordain.

lW\(jdhati) quit, abandon, neglect.

l^TT (dddhdti, dhatte) put, place

+ ^Sffx?

^STTputon; (mid.) take, receive.

Adv.:

remainder.

wn °

nas

<QT^TC at evening.
p er

"

Exercise XLI.

^^<lf% Msfswfr WT^STTf*

f^*T

f^%

I

remark-

175

Lesson XLI. XLII.

uw

^

r**#T

T WlfrT

^ejj

^

II

9

II

^r?f fsrefa

(voc. sing,

^rnft

Tjffi

f.)

ace.

(part.,

11.

^f^ft fH^f

WSlfo 1

WIH^

ffT

pi.)

II

5lfrf<T^t

Let the Adhvaryus pour the

The

12.

(^TffT)-

Meeting a

woman

be not afraid".

15.

umbrella-and-shoes.

from a strange-field,
close the door.

18.

8

ii

^r^tf^T

*R

II

II

$

II

WW
^TT
II

o.

II

||

sacrificial

sacraments

his sons

^TT

*reU!H<*di

\r3fr: *?rerrrra;

W

II

^"Rrf^rrgTw"^

offerings into the
in the

law-books

to Vasistha as scholars.

the forest, one should say to her: "Sister,

in

16.
is

Do

One who

takes (part.) roots-fruits-or-grain

to be punished.

17.

Let the two doorkeepers

not neglect the teacher's command.

who wore much

i/ieir-lessons are

u

Let a Snataka carry (wear) a garland, and an

like the sun.

brilliancy,

forty

Dacaratha entrusted

13.

royal-sage,

ordain

seers

^

^T^^ll $11
^

^^fwfa^

svn* WTinffaT WFf^T

HT*iPa-rrro

fire.

tfrfrT

^

11

*m 3nrT#H^Tf^ TTOf *rf*WreTTr^-

II

ii

^T?RTnt

14.

II

^nol^H^ii#

% 1 ^T^T fWrT% *f<ft
^t^# ^TT^^^Trnf^^n^T

^ToC

fa

thrift

20.

jewelry,

The

ashamed before

19.

The

shone (f^-HT) with great-

scholars who-have-not-learned-

their teacher (ace. or gen.).

Lesson XLII.
441.

Verbs.

As

sonants.
*

Nasal class.

class-sign

With the

All roots of this class end in con-

they insert a nasal before the final con-

suffix IJJl,

f.

°^, are formed adjectives signifying



'made or composed or consisting of.
In the second
the name merely, i. e. are not in reality such.
'

line,

'bear

Lesson XLII.

176

sonant, unless one be there already (as in *fff

adapted to the consonant, except

expanded
442.

to the syllable «T [T£],

The combination

in the

is

this

nasal

in

radical

accordance

consonants

Thus,

^r^

'join';

strong stem

^JT^, weak ^ff

Indicative.

Middle.

Active.

*pf5*

gut*

yfa

^^

*p^rs:

^t

^* W

^f ^^*
TO**
TO*

si
Imperfect.

with

with the rales al-

ready given for the root and reduplicating classes.
443.

is

it is

which bears the accent.

of the final

those of the personal endings

);

strong forms, where

.

Lesson XLII.

177

Imperative.

wwr

^r\nfa

w*tr

^wr^t "^trI

^jr^

Imperf. act.: ^Tir^R;,
T5T^f«^ etc.



^I^T,

act.:

445.

^Uf^, ^ppfc^; ^V^ef etc.;
^F^rR etc.; mid.; ^«*ffal etc. —

Opt. act.:

f.

mid.:
Part,

"^Tffh mid.: ^ITR-

Roots ftT9, 'grind, crush'

(act.);

and f|f^,

'injure,

destroy' (act.):

Imperfect.

^fro

^rfarz

^rftre**;

^rt^rz

^srfqFR *rfM«H ^rf^R:

^rft**R

^rff^R;
or

*rfw

«>^ ^rf^rR; ^xTi *rc;



Ind. 2nd persons:

ff^fW, fiNR;,
ftRf%, ftfe^, fTO;
ImT * 2nd persons: fwft, ftfe^, ftfe;
fff**, ff^R,,



fTO-

446.

7{% 'crush'

(act.),

combines HUfff with

f?f

and

H

into

<1%f% and rf%S-

Vocabulary XLII.
^J3T (yundkti, yunkte) join;

Verbs:

^J

(inddhe) kindle, light.

fl^

{chindtti,

chinddhe) cut, cut

off.

+

+ ^3^

take away, remove.
exterminate.

oTRPC^l ( caus
fcrq

^^

-

stem) awaken.

(pindsti) grind, crush.

(bhandkti) break, destroy.

f^fi? (bhindtti, bhinddhe) split.

*Hf

+ f^

appoint, establish.

(rundddhi, runddhe) obstruct,

T^f

"^JT

check; besiege.

ftra

(find.sti)

leave,

leave

maining.

+ f^

f^

+

f^^

set apart, distinguish.

^

unite.

(hindsti) injure, destroy.

(bhundJcti, bhunkte) eat, enjoy.

Perry, Sanskrit Primer.

yoke,

harness.

12

re-

178

Lesson XLII.

^flg«f n. } writing, copying.

Subst.:

•^cJ^IT

^q*^

condition, state,

f-,

dawn

f.,

also personified,

;

Dawn.

Usas, the

m., the

f^#H«d
Adj.:

^at^fT

high.

^jT^^R m., thorn; enemy.

^JT^ suitable

^"PE! m., bite, mouthful.

3[]|J

rice.

<TX^T m-,
XTRT^i

n.,

TjpT,

xn"^ m., grandson.

for Ksatriyas.

domestic.

Hf7fc69r,

crime.

Himalaya Mts,

f.

f.

°^TT, unfavorable.

splendid, beautiful,

"^STT,

excellent.

^«*| m., relative.

Exercise XLII.

rt^lJnrfieirt-1 *ft*

ff^f^ T t^f^T

fRit ci^rm^wr^t frwsr wnrrsra

^fRTr^^ ^t

tff^i

11

«*

11

^T^f^fHt

'•h<kmji3<k

t^t

11

3

11

11

^

t%

n

3^

33

||

11

fa?^ cfT T TT 38
ifta urof^i f^rfn aqmri tt

%*T

m ff^fnr ?rt**

^

11

n

^Hhi<i

II

f^m»^<*

II

TTsif ^j^fir

^rr Tnfr ^t%t ^tp^j^ieN

iprf^fcr*rre: *rs

<*i Pa

*?

%

«M*n
fl^fr

feM f»n;foH<3>M

i

gRITfWyTOI ^^TT
8
fa^^MI<lf<<***f*MlfaMct
*i wrrfa wkPsjh fr^% t% wh" "*r^ T«f^ «nw n m *fr
II

II

11

tt

*pjsf:

11.

wm

11

$

11

^ft irfTT^t fafafffiprfs

irffcti

After Jayasinba had long besieged Girinagara, he destroyed

The antecedent of

this relative is the subject of ^r?TTTTtf?T'

Translate as though dative.

179

Lesson XLIII.

(*^)
month

it

at last.

(loc).

(*lf*t*4*J*0;

12.

An

ascetic shall eat only 240 raouthfuls

"Kindle the

13.

m 'lk

to another early in the morning.

Himavant

mountain - range
its

fire;

The

14.

teacher entrusted (f^J-?I5T

of the books (cpd., dat.).

checks

coarse

the
16.

exceedingly-high peaks.

The

15.

who has conquered

the royal-family.

a foreign realm

the

clouds

(°eRJ)

of

must

19.

Women

pounded the

17.

A

not exterminate

Aryans must kindle the domestic-fire

18.

time-of-the-wedding.

)

The

doers-of-right

are happy in Heaven, enjoying the fruits-of-^e/r-works.

king

a

in

firewood

for

cows; grind grain": thus said one priest

the

the scholars with the copying

with

branches

cut

the

at

rice with pestles.

Lesson XLIII.
447.

Verbs.

Perfect-System.

In the later language the perfect-

system comprises only an indicative mode and a participle, each
both active and middle.
verbs;

its

and weak forms;

3.

1.

endings

Reduplication.

1.

cording to the rules given

is

essentially alike in all

reduplication;

in

quent use of the union-vowel
448.

formation

Its

characteristics are:

2.

some respects

distinction of strong

peculiar; 4. the fre-

i.

Initial

in Less.

consonants are reduplicated ac-

XLI

for the reduplicated

pre-

sent-stem.
2.

Medial and

final

vowels, short and long, are represented by

the corresponding short vowel, diphthongs by their second element

but ^J (or ^T^)

is

represented always by

reduplicated present-stem.

3.

Initial

^f,

followed

"^f,

never by

^[

;

as in the

WT, cHHT; fa "4.,

Thus,

sfpF^,

by a

single consonant,

-qsn*^;

becomes

^T

(through =5-^0; thus, ^1^, ^TT^4. Initial

^

and

^

follow the same analogy

;

but in the strong

180

Lesson XLTII.

forms, where the root-vowel

is

ganated, the reduplicating vowel

protected from combination by the insertion of ^J

^n

strong perfect-stem f^fc

,

g^t'^

strong

weak

(u-v-oc),

(}-y-e§)

^^

make

the ordinary

the constant perfect-stem

making

^J show

^^,

;

449. Strong and

but use instead

perfect-system,

But ^(J\

^TPC

;

weak forms.

is

an exception,

and a few roots with

anomalous reduplication

the

the root-syllable

In the

initial

in the perfect.*

"3TT"t.

three persons sing. act.

accented, and exhibits usually a stronger form.

is

regards the strengthening:
In roots with medial vowels long by nature or position,

1.

and

i-is)

is

thus,

;

(u-uc).

a periphrastic formation (see below).

As

(i. e.

^Tf

"Gf

Roots beginning with vowels long by nature or position do

5.

not in general

^J or

weak

or

in those with initial ^f, the difference of strong

and weak forms

does not appear, except in accented texts.
2.

Medial and

strong forms

^%i*

^,

;

initial

thus,

;

w.

vowels are gunated,
w.

f^T,

^,

s.

f^*rf|T,

^3<ft^

f^l^T

if

possible,

in the

|TT , w. $T^,

;

s.

(§ 448, 4).

Medial ^J before a single

3.

s-

final

consonant

is

vriddhied in the

3rd pers., and optionally in the 1st; thus, from TJtT, in 1st sing,
either
4.

TJTT^ or

A

WF^,

in

2nd T?TJ^\

vowel takes

final

either

in the 2nd, vrddhi in the 3rd;

guna

f*T%, 2nd f*J%, 3rd

450.

adds

"^

451.

The

root

m

3rd tJUT^-

guna or vrddhi
thus,

from

in the 1st person,
«ft,

in 1st f^fST or

fa%.

m

makes, irregularly, the perfect-stem mi, and

before a vowel-ending.

Some

*

roots, instead of strengthening the

vowel

in

the

The grammarians prescribe (doubtless falsely) this reduplication for all verbs beginning with ^Jf or ^J followed by more than
one consonant.

Lesson XLIIT.
strong forms, weaken

weak forms; some few even do

the

in

it

181

See below.

both.

The

Personal Endings.

452.

perfect-endings are these:

Middle.

Active.
1.

a

2.

tha

3.

a

md

e

vdke

dthus

d

se

dthe

dhve

dtus

us

e

ate

re

vd

But roots ending

a take du

in

in 1st

and 3rd

mdhe

sing. act.

;

thus,

The endings beginning with consonants

453. Union-vowel.

are in classical Sanskrit usually joined to the base by the union-

The most important

vowel ^.
follows
1.

2.

take

it

The"^ of 3rd pi. mid. always has ^
The other endings beginning with

by eight verbs:

For

its

viz.

it is

13fi

'hear'

"*£

'choose', ^T 'run',
3.

But

verbs.

in nearly all

from "^)

2^

the use of

for

rules

^[

are as

:

it.

^J,

rejected throughout (except

'make',

TjT

,

before

consonants, except

W

It 'bear',

'praise',

'go',

^ 'flow'.

use or omission in 2nd sing. act. the rules are too

complicated to be given here.

With the union-vowel

454.

combined into ^, but becomes
precede) ^TO

;

thus,

Examples
455.

I.

from

Roots in

f^rfcrjT,

3.

^

or %.

final
(if

radical

^[

or

%" is

not

more than one consonant

A. Roots in final vowels.

The

T[

and

XT

of gunated and vrid-

and ^TT^T before the vowel beginning

^sr^r

See also § 454.

an ending.
Thus,

H

a
or

f^rfa?^ ni-ny-i-va.

of inflection.

dhied vowels become

faSTO,

«ft,

^

1.

*ft:

fqWW,

Act.: Sing.
du.

1.

2.f^^,3.f^^Tv

.

1.

(^Hq

f^f^cr,

— Mid.:

2.

or

f^TTO,

f^RJW^,

3.

2.

f^rftra or

f%*nj^;

pi. 1.

Sing. l.f^TO, 2.f?rfcR, 3.fsy^;

Lesson XLIII.

182
du.

f^rf^f

i.

2.
3.

Act.: Sing.

sfiT:

du.

fTCRT;

t%f^T,

1.

II.

3.

3.

^

457.

is

1.

<JFR;

^rf^

f^-*R|«| or f^lfa,

°^H^;

3.

f^f^I^,

pi- I-

"N-

frfogCl-

Thus, ^J: Act.: Sing.

Act.: du.

2.

f^fara,

2.

t^f^mf,

pi. i.

"fasfRT or fasfiltf, 2.

1.

3 or ^S follow

Roots in

see § 453, 2),

fwm;

s.

f^f^f^^,

f^f^R^,

2.

456.

fvRn%,

2.

,

or

rJE^

du.

the

model of the last- mentioned.

<JB"nT,

2.

<JET«T (not

2.^^,

l.£§*,

HSfa*l

3.*J^7J^.

-


^:

etc.

irregular in the perfect.

(Cf. § 450):

Middle.

Active.
1

2.

^J5^ ^5
^npw

^jf^ra

^T*
458.

III.

^^ m

in^.

Roots

1.

^TO

^«fi^

^«R

3.

^^rn;

^ra»<js.

^pc

So

also *T,

459.

If the final

the formation
3.

Mm\K
460.

with

TJ

the ^5T
i.
2.

3.

*J, 2"^

'choose'.

persons thus: from V,

or
is

du.

;

is

2.

^TT

^jf^

^?

*S^

^^

(see § 453, 2):

2.

first

*ajM «r^n^

^J**
*ra
The
or

^^iT%

^|T^
^f^r

^^rm

other roots in "^

^TFTr ^f^T^,

make

^fOT;

the

^t

^J be preceded by more than one consonant,

as follows:

TOft^

^,

*H4K«|«l>

*T^nC or ^TOTT;

1.

etc.



the

2

-

HW$>

^ being gunated.

IV. Roots in ^TT (including those written by the natives

^ or

These take ^ft

Tjft).

lost before

^ft

^ftre

^n^i, ^ftro

^

2. "RTT,

i" 1st

vowel-endings and X-

^r^c
^th^

^P**

^

^^

and 3rd

^
^

1-

1^TT

sing, act.;

and

:

<f*wi
^fW% ^rro
T*n*

^Pwl

^fw

^^

forms from the
^T, and similar roots, make their weak

183

Lesson XLIII.
simpler root-forms

"g etc.; and

ift,

from "g; thus, ^l^^ or 5fifra

Roots

B.
461.
1.

f^

^ffr^
du.

etc.

^TRf^T
463.

-

3.

du.

fwf^ZI,

fwfa^
2.

3.

fsW^;

etc.

^flfa

2.

or

du.

fafa-

So from tf^:
3.

^Tt;

1.

^facf,

ST^S,

,

The

3rd.

vowel capable of guna.

root ^,

TfW,

'go%
4.

f^J^-

pi.

^fTTO,

2.

I-

pi.

III.

With

initial

etc.;

etc.

2.

3.

^,

^?; du.
f^.
3.

2.

^:

also follows this rule, forming

^^

makes

(see §

448

,

5)

^TTfir

^T,

IV. With medial

^grfjf^

^rT^

1.

etc.

But "3P^

(originally

^FTj

^f.

^^j*T or ^sRT*T,

Mid.: ^3i5t

etc.

sucb roots

all

^.

(§ 448, 5).

sR^: Act.: sing.

Thus

2.

etc.

makes ^n«TI[

1.

consonants.

^^f,

T^T

1.

t^^5

"31^, ^TRT

464.

1.

initial

Sing.
3

t^^C'

^gfra

final

Mid.:

etc.

from f*{:

With

^:
etc.

strong forms also

its

etc.

II.

^cpfTj

in

f^^,

1.

f^rfaf^T

etc.; 3.

1.

2.

Act: Sing.

:

pi.

^^f^f^
462.

makes

With medial vowel capable of guna.

I.

fHf

etc.;

"£"[

etc.

2.

^if*TO,

3.

^TR;

etc.

beginning with more than one consonant,

or with an aspirate, a guttural mute, or ^.
465.
final

2.

Roots

in

general having

medial ^f before

a single

consonant, and beginning also with a single consonant which

a guttural, or

the reduplication —
not an aspirate,

contract
with
the
into
one syllable,
reduplication
^

with

vowel, in the

is

repeated unchanged

TJ

as

its

when

in

in

2nd

s.

MMx| and Ml||-^, w. TJ^:
*

sing. act.

i.

weak forms; and

the union-vowel

^

is

e.

this

is

taken.

allowed also

Thus, H^T,

Several roots not having the form here defined are said
undergo the same contraction, most of them optionally.

to

184

Lesson XLIII.

^f^

TjTjcj*j,

466.

persons.

^f

ZJ5T

also

du.

^T-eJ;

3.

Act. sing.
-?r^:

Mid.

etc.

467.

1.

^%

v*fa^

or {t||4>

JZ(^

1.

the strong

cf^ 'dwell', and

^"J^,

^^

or

(u-uc-i-va) etc.

^T^,
Mid.

J^ or ^£*rf^

2.

2.

^3^-

^>%

3.

etc.

fin*!;

etc.

Several roots which

4.

(^J) of the

the full root form in

Act. sing.

du.

^

are treated like roots with

^\ ^, ^,

Thus, ^t^:

or ^5^f%f^r,

^fsre

one with Jf ya)

and abbreviate the

They

*

These roots are

;

^[),

^ (X) n weak forms.
^ (\: § 463) but retain

root to

^^J

(also

one consonant, reduplicate with the syllable ^f (the

in

one root just mentioned, with

initial

^ va

^fW

^tTT%

^f^ft

Certain roots beginning with

3.

and ending

"q^W^ *^T

have medial

^

between single

consonants, but cannot follow the rule of § 465, drop out the ^J

These roots

from the weak forms.
^T^,

TTj^,

?|[*^,

and also

They form

follow § 465.

and 5fU

||«^;

the

the classical language,

which might be expected to

weak stems ^f,

Thus, ^SfW^ or ^"sTTT

.

are, in

of«^,

^IW

^JTJ^,

^fri^ etc.

etc.,

,

5f^J

lp^ makes

;

its

strong stem ^JV|«^ and ^J^TT^468.

5.

The

roots ^J\iJ

weak

forms.

469.

and only
*fST^,

3.

1.

Thus, strong

The root

^Hf[,

in the following

,

^t^, and one or two others, redupli-

and contract

cate from the semivowel,

If

and

^TEgf1^ or '<Qbe||i^,

'speak',

is

forms: sing.

2.

cT

weak

found only

to

and

^

^

in

^T*P£.
this

tense,

-H\JH, 3. "4||^; du.

in

2. ^J"J-

^IT^d^; ph 3. -411^4^- These forms have only the value
2. The root lf^T, 'know ', makes a perfect without

of the present.



reduplication, but otherwise regular, which has only present-value;

see § 417.
470.

f%faj,

2f^T,

The

'

find

',

roots f^(,

f^f^,

f%Tf9T,

forms the regular f^%^.
f^f^,

and

f^f,

f^rf%T

and f^, form as perfect-stems

185

Lesson XLIII.

Perfect participle.

471.

active is

^T^

When

fect-stem.*

1.

Active.

(mid. ^?^, w. ^f), which

The ending

of the pf. part,

added

weak

is

monosyllabic the union-vowel

this is

(but not in the weakest cases, before ^TJ).

strong stem of part.

^f^rrac.,

mR^

from ^r, ^f^rrct,

f^TO

^&!<l,

5

mid.

ft^RT^.
from

^f\>

.

^,

$f*^,

^>

w.



6.

root

^,

from TJ^,

*fa«H,

^*

from

^

>

f*~

f*rofarrcfc

'

The

per-

inserted

from

t^;

^rf^rfafc



^

is

a.

Thus,

^T* But from *ft>
JfTRC <J^^, 31f\»

^f^*C>

from

to the

f**f t^~
>

makes as

its

fH^rfa;, f^f*T3[cT\

faf*l$H/

strong stem of

mid. arfTinRC or
part. arflTTTfar, or 3R7crfcr^

pf.

gjTf;^, weakest only 3f7*pr
araarfaTo

^ra:
2.

which
voice;

^f^tl

etc.;

2f^,

Middle.
is

or

The

Similarly, from <fp^,

SR^, ^^ —

'find',

f%f^^

pf. part,

middle

^\J

,

«MMM

;

>*T,

lf^ff

,

^Tfaqi^ or
know ', makes

etc.
is

added to the weak stem as

thus,

c.

«

made with
this

the suffix

^TT,

appears in the middle

S^TR; 3> ^^TW;

*ft

f^RTR;

Periphrastic Perfect.
472.
sition
is

Most roots beginning with a vowel long by nature or po-

adopt a periphrastic formation

also taken

in the perfect tense; the

same

by the secondary conjugations, and optionally by a
It is

made

the accusative of a derivative noun-stem in ^TT,

made

few primary roots not falling in the above category.
as follows:
473.

To

from the present-stem which

is

the general basis of each conjugation,

are added, for the active, the perfect active forms of

very rarely, of if);
*

for the middle,

Mechanically, the weakest participle-stem
^ instead of ^).

the 3rd pi. act. (of course,

"^j

or

^f^

(or,

only the perfect middle forms

is

identical with

186

Lesson XLIII. XLIV.
Thus, from '-^Hl'trf*,

of|i.

^,

from

is

In classical Sanskrit

the perfect

meaning with the imperfect, as a tense of narration,

coincides in

but

^TT^ri^^n:;

t^t^%-

Force of the Perfect.

474.

or

^fH«n«TO

pf-

less often

met with.

Lesson XLIV.
Verbs.

475.

two

futures:

The verb has

Future-System (aud Conditional).

The

I.

or s-future, which

simple,

is

and much more common, than the other; and

by

II.

far the older,

the periphrastic

future.

476.

and a

The

directly, or

The

active

participle,

verbs.

This tense contains an indicative mode

Simple Future.

I.

tense-sign

is

and middle.

It

the syllable

Tgg,

by the union-vowel

^ (in

root has the
gwna-strengthening

with medial ^g
gunate with
like

precisely

a-conjugation
477.

;

that

of the

thus,

from

When ^

is

^

or

%^fff7l;

478.

^Tfa;

added

*?,

not taken, final radical consonants

^

in

Most roots ending

in

TT^rfTT; fa, %t*rf?T;
thus,

(iff^lfrT) and

^, ^f*TqfrT;

^(HfTOfa).

roots

of the

<J ,

3.

vowels

root cf^

reject

^T, ^TTSTflT.
tT fX

^

suii'er

the

the inflection of the root-

Thus, from ^f, \ftwffT;

,

^T take Xi

some

inflection is

^rf^raf^, o^.

ff* l^lfrT; ft, ^^Tf!f. The
1.

The

present indicative of a verb

reduplicating or nasal class.

JTT,

becoming ^5J).

possible; and

^.

all

to the root either

the latter case

when

instead of

same changes before ^J as before
class

may be made from

m Pd;

\;
2.

'

dwell

',

makes

thus, TT,

But

all

37-

roots in

and also the roots *ft

makes Hffcrflr

.

Lesson XLIV.
verbs which take

In general, the

479.

periphrastic future (see below), take

accordance

is

187

it

^

in the infinitive

and

But the

also in this tense.

from complete; and these parts should be learned,

far

as a matter of usage, for any given verb.

Stems of causative

480.

make

their future-stems in

481.

Participle.

The

and denominatives

inflection,

^f^TO;

participles, act.

and mid., are made from

the future-stem precisely as from the present-stem; thus,

^P<T

^RRTT;

°^Trft),

(f.

f,

in tST^\

thus, ^TT, ^tTf^f^rf?T-

3ifWtT, qrfTTZOTR.

W[, "ZJ-

Cf. §§ 260,

262.

482. Conditional.
is

made from

perfect is

Thus,

A

tense called the conditional
(indie, only)

the stem of the simple future precisely as the im-

made from

the present-stem,

^T^f^, ^^jfT^FC ^T#,
;

and similarly

-4|c|,(\5}.

It is

inflected.

of extremely

rare occurrence.

483.

be

II.

Periphrastic Future.

made from

ail

formed by the nomen

It is

active participle, to the
1st

This tense, which

is

allowed to

verbs, contains a single indicative tense, active,*
agentis in

nom.

and 2nd persons of

<J,

sing, of

having the value of a future

which

(cfT)

are added, in the

numbers, the corresponding inflected

all

forms of the pres. of l^R^ *be\

In the 3rd persons the nomen

agentis is used alone, in the proper

number, without the auxiliary.

484.
suffix ?f

*rnj;

f%

485.

The root has
which

it

%<t;

^,

The

in

most cases the same form before the

takes before
^rt<T; *r>

the TfTT

Hf^*r;

of the

**, ^fij;

infinitive.

Thus,

^rcre, <*«ilej7T.

inflection is then as follows:

The Hindus
ever, practically

also prescribe a middle formation

no existence.

;

it

has,

how-

Lesson XLIV.

188
1-

Wrf%

^<TT^T*C

3.

^rTT

<*dlO

«*«$H*m.

«*<1K«,

Aorist-System.

The

486.

aorist comprises three quite distinct formations, each

with certain sub-varieties; but

complex system by

are bound

all

together into one

certain correspondences of form and meaning.

In classical Sanskrit aorists are comparatively rare.
is

quite that of impf. or pf. as tenses of narration.

Their value

But they are

used also (though not nearly so often as the prohibitive opt.) with
the particle *n, in prohibitions,

ception

The

the aorist always

487.

this

ex-

I.

;

Simple Aorist;

Simple aorist. (1) Root aorist.

an imperfect of the root-class.

^to:
^TcC

I.

This aorist

It is limited to

Redu-

^^Tri

^wa;

^r^c

^^

^r^

^W?T*l

^3^-

precisely

E. g.

^l<idm;
\rr,

is

the active voice

^7<n*

Like ^T:

II.

III. Sibilant Aorist.

of a few roots in ^[J, and of W.

2.

With

has the augment in classical Sanskrit.

varieties of aorist are three:

plicated Aorist

3.

augment being then omitted;

tense comprises, in the later language, only an indicative mode.*

The main

like

the

'do not give'; TfJ *Nfc 'do not fear'.
^T.

thus, *TT

WT, ^RITrt;

*TT,

^^5

TT

^ct
"^^t
'go',

^~

TTrX.

488. (2) The a-aorist.
active

This

and middle. Thus, from

is

1%^

5

like an imperfect of the a-class,
1st

persons ^f fa <*{,, ^tf^TTTW*

^TftpTW; ^ffa%, ^Tfax||ejff, ^rf^TTffThe precative
rare that

its

is

strictly

In general the root

a peculiar aor. optative; but

formation need not be explained here.

it is

so

189

Lesson XLIV.
assumes a weak form
Thus,

^n^;

nsrr^,

^, ^RP^; ^>

;

but three or four roots in

ti^,

>j%

^ji**^;



^TC^ ^HN*K-

"**!«*<tj

^^s

with one or two

makes

w^;

,

T^TT, ^31-

^T-

2^RC 'throw',

and

^|^tx|c^,

w^s

;

Irregular:

*§RU ST> ^QPl» ^T- WScl; Tim, ^rf%T^^;
^fc^ (anomalous).

^g take guna.

final

^rercr^

^5m^c^, which,

TJc^,

were doubtless originally reduplicated

others,

aorists.

489.

not formal, as the aorist

from the

from

differs

all

has come to be attached nearly always to the deriv-

it

ative (caus., etc.) conjugation in
is

This aorist

Reduplicated Aorist (3).

II.

others in that

root.

'Optf,

as

The connection

its aorist.

made from

not

is

but

of quite pe-

characteristic is a reduplication,

Its

^f,

the stem in

culiar character.

The

490.

and

skrit,

or two of
^JTCpt

formation.

its

WTi

>

reduplicated aorist

very unusual

is

in

Thus, ^«^ makes ^ftSTTc^

The

^rffff^Rt,-

inflection is the usual

San-

classical

for the present to give an

will be sufficient

it

example

W^,

;

~^Xf^-

one of imper-

fects of the a-conjugation.
491.

The

usually has

3.

1.

made by adding

du.

2.

i.

492.

(5)

3.

2.

^Tzrff,

^%!*t,

^MdcJItt

3.

-41^

^JS*

The

g. TJ

^;
2.

°Ore,

3.

1.

WFf^zr,

f^^.

s- aorist.

2.

s.

^3?%^
1.

3.

^Rfa,

sing.

1.

^J%-

^tefPR;;

^f%T^,

2.

^sRimrra;; p

(mid.only):

which

root,

g. «ft: Act.: sing.

W3,

*TW

The

augmented

Mid.: sing.



(4)

1

-

1.

l

^*

wf^,

etc.

*s-aorist.
^[.

'purify': Act.: sing.

du.

1.

E.

^^t^to;,

Md-

by means of an inserted
E.

^

to the

vowel strengthened.

its

^1%^^, 3. ^3mH; du.
^R*Jf, 2. ^r%, 3. ^%^-

^?te;

^ff,
2.

is

2.

VP%,
pi.

Sibilant Aorist, of four varieties.

III.

tense-stem

2.

The

tense-stem

The
1.

root

is

1.

made by adding

^

generally strengthened.

^TOff^R^,

WTfa^,

— Mid. sing.

is

3.

WTfrfa

2.

"^tn^W,

o^rjrj
2.

pi.

WTof^,

3.

i.

^nif^"^,

3.

^-

190

Lesson XLTV.

inf^re; du.
2.

°fcjd*^, 3.

made

i.

»f^ff,

is

493.

qiRjMH.
494.
3.

The sw-aorist

(6)

is

The

like

for

will suffix here.

1. "^J-

JJJ: sing.

Act.

1.

and 2nd and

1st. sing, ^H'fef^!',

and °fTR;.

Wf^TTTH

Generally the middle forms of aorists

are used also for the passive.

7,

(but

§ 489).

sing.
'-4|f<j[^l^, 2.°^^,
f«j^:
an impf. of the a-conjugation. But in the

495. Aorist Passive.

or

cf.

°f*nwff,

active only, the corresponding middle

example

mid. the grammarians prescribe the

5,

i.

denominative conjugations

sa-aorist.

°^t^; and so on ;

3rd du.

pi.

which forms are

quite like the inflection of the ts-aorist.

etc.,

(7)

An

s-forra.

°cnra;;

the only aorist of

causatives and denominatives in Iffi,

being of the

3.

°fcpn*rw;,

and

the secondary

in

2.

— This

°"ftffc(cf.

XLV.

may make them

arily take aorists of these forms,

4,

Roots which do not ordinlike

4 or 5 espe-

cially for the passive.

496.

But a 3rd pers.

sing.,

of peculiar formation, has become

a recognized part of the passive conjugation.

^

ing

to

some cases by guna,

strengthened, in
final nSTTis

^,

added



^RTfa;

It is

formed by add-

which takes also the augment, and

the root,

*J.

Thus,

but

^,

ift,

in

4MlRl;

is

usually

others by vrddhi.

After

^J,

^r^TTf^; g, ^^5TfT;

^f*T; f^, ^fifr;

^T,

^Tfa.

Lesson XLV.
Derivative or Secondary Conjugations.
497.

Secondary conjugations are

system of forms, more or
conjugation-stem

,

this

those

less complete, is

in

which

made from a

a

whole system being usually connected with

a certain definite modification of the original radical sense.
conjugations

are:

IV. Causative.

I.

whole

derivative

Passive.

II.

V. Denominative.

Intensive.

III.

These

Desiderative.

XL V.

Lesson

498.

The present-system

Passive.

I.

of the passive has been

as also the peculiar 3rd pers. sing, used as aor. pass.,

described;

the past pass, participle in 7\ or

In

or gerundives.
used,

191

all

and the

«f,

fut. pass,

participles

other parts of the verb middle forms are

necessary, with passive meaning.

if

499.

The

Intensive.

II.

or

intensification

the

intensive

repetition of the

Forms

primary conjugation of a root.

conjugation signifies

the

action expressed by

the

outside the present-system

are too rare to need notice here; indeed, even within that system

means common

they are by no

two

fall into

500.

The verbs of

1.

the

a.

strengthened,

b.

^

with

TJ,

Radical

^SJ

is

^

Sometimes the reduplicating

reduplication

dissyllabic

thus,

TT^,

^TcT, %«ft, "Sft^J^-

syllable has a final consonant, taken
T^rf"^,

consonant of the reduplicating syllable;

The model of
class,

c.

TfTf^f.

Sometimes the

an i-vowel being inserted

,

in-

and ^| are reduplicated with 1R,

^ and ^ with ^;

is

form their

and the reduplicating syllable

from the end of the root; thus,

final

Intensives

language.

class (only act.)

first,

tensive-stem by reduplication,

and

the later

in

classes.

thus,

after the

ej^d^.



inflection is the present-system of the reduplicating-

but deviations are not rare; in particular, an "^

sometimes

is

inserted between stem and ending.
501. 2.

another
It

,

From

the intensive-stem as just described

formally

identical with a passive-stem

,

may

be formed

by the suffix

^Ef.

takes middle inflection, but has no passive value, being used

precisely as is the intensive just mentioned.

502.

A

few intensives

to be used as presents,

as simple roots.

1.

Thus W[1t,

4HHIMl>

2.

TRvf

Tfflslffi.

,

come

and are treated by the native grammarians

assigned to the root-class
impf.

Thus,

lost their value as such,

having

,

:

really

^WTTJ,

3.

of 3T

intensive

pres. 5TITf*T etc.

1M|J|^;

,

'wake',

is

du. ^XT^^C. etc

du.

WRp

T etc.

-

»

So

192

Lesson

also rf(\j*

intens. of

|,

'be poor',

fsf^

XLV.

"gj 'run', used as a present with the sense

and some others, use the

'wash',

way, and are assigned

present -system in the same

intensive

the

to

re-

thus, 3rd sing. ^%fr?i, 3rd pi. %f%«rffT-

duplicating class;

Intensive forms outside the present-system are very rare.
503.
for

the

Desiderative.

III.

or

action

fxRrrfrr 'I drink', desid.
504.

and adds
is

To form

this

conjugation

is

'I

thus,

wish to drink'.

the desiderative-stem the root

The consonant

.

denoted a desire

denoted by the simple root;

fwnnf*T

sometimes ^[^

^f,

By

condition

is

reduplicated,

of the reduplication

determined by the usual rules: the vowel of reduplication

if the

root has an o-vowel,

has an u-vowel.

Thus,

^JT,

an ^-vowel

stem

;

A

thus,

506.

number of

W^>

The

fafirw

perfect is the periphrastic.

The

^TffTf^f^ 2-

The

verbal nouns are

made with

passive

to be obtained';
507.

may

^[ in all

thus,

that

like

is

of

aorist

of the

is

futures are

made

frfWcTTf^-

The

forms where that vowel

be made; thus, ^x^ffi

'it

is

is

desired

part. %f^J7?.

IV. Causative.

1.

has been treated of already.
the derivative

^

form an abbreviated desiderative-

with the auxiliary vowel \; thus, ^f^'RlffT,

A

is

the root

t^ff^; ^T> f^rfa-

thus, %"^J, Tjf^Plft.;

ever taken.

\3 if

Outside of that desiderative forms are quite in-

The

frequent.

roots

conjugation in the present-system

other a-stems.

t's-form;

or ^g, and

t%RT^rf7r; *ft f^P^fafTT; W, ^g^ffl;

w, f^reHfa; fire, fafa(*rf?r; f?r^,
505.

,

noun

^nT^rf ^^TFX'

in

The present-system
2. The perfect is

of the causative
the periphrastic,

^TT being formed from the causative-stem;
3.

The

aorist is the reduplicated,

made

in

general directly from the root, and formally unconnected with the

causative-stem; thus,

\J,

^3T*JT^> ^PfW^t-

^n

a

ew

^

instances,

where the root has assumed a peculiar form before the causativesign, the reduplicated aorist is

made from

this form,

not from the

193

Lesson'LXV.

made from

^;

the

the auxiliary ^[ replacing the final

causative-stem,

thus, \nTj^rsrf?T

\TTTf*J ft !%• 5
I

»

Both futures are

4.

simple root; thus, ^TT, ^I'R^fTT, ^f^f^^ft..

The

-

nouns

verhal

manner

as the futures, in

part from the causatively strengthened

root-form; thus, pass. part. ^nf%cT;

VTQ

fat.

(gerundive)

pass. part,

sftWftnpi; gerund fM^fiMI, °^?TO, °1-

inf-

fTOf^rra, ^J"TO;

and

same

adjectives are in part formed from the causative-stem in the

(§ 310).

508. Cansative passive and desiderative.

from the causative-stem as follows.

by adding the usual passive sign

1.

These may be made

The passive-stem

root, the syllables ^§Rl being omitted; thus, \sTT3ffi-

ative-stem

made by

is

of which the

^q,

A

that has as basis a noun-stem.

the noun-stem

This

f^HT^T^ff^-

V. Denominative.

509.

The

2.

desider-

reduplication and addition of the syllables

replaces the final ^f of the causative-stem;

^

thus, f^jTfcnxf^T^f^T,

formed

is

^J to the causatively strengthened

is

a rare formation.

denominative conjugation
In general, the base

by means of the conjugation-sign

Jf

,

is

is

one

made from

which has the

Intermediate between the denominative and causative con-

accent.

jugations stands a class of verbs plainly denominative in origin but

having the causative accent.

from

g.

See §

The denominative meaning

510.
e.

Thus, from ?Tn^, iTn^T cf mantrdyate

^ftfr?, «$Yr|i|fii klrtdyati.

'be

crave'

'desire,

'act

like',



as',

'regard

which

that

is

is

of the

from

«f*{^,

«T7T^rf?T

greatest

or treat as',

signified

'honor';

variety;

'make

the

by

Examples: from ?TM^ 'penance, asceticism',
ascetism';

;

76.

into',

noun-stem.

rfmirfH 'practise

c(iUyi*J%

'blacken';

^^"T^rfH 'seek horses'; ^TTTT^jf?! 'play the herdsman, protect';
'

^^4j(7T desire wealth
5Rrf?T 'desire

'
;

fH^WfrT

'

pl a y the physician, cure'

a son', from the poss. cpd.

Perry, Sanskrit Primer.

(PTOFR

;

M^«*i-

'desiring a son'*

13

194

I.

Sanskrit-English Glossary.

Glossary to the Exercises.
For the alphabetic order of Sanskrit words see

I.

p. xii.

Sanskrit-English.

Adjectives in -a form their feminine in -a, unless otherwise stated.

aksa m.,

fire

agni m.,

adhas adv., below, down.

die, dice.

aksan (aksi:275)

god of

;

n.,

adhastat adv., below; prep., w.

eye.

as n. pr., Agni, the

fire.

agnihotrin m., a kind of priest.

anga

n., limb; body.
angiras (253) m., certain mythical
characters.

anjali

anu

m.

a.,

a gesture (Voc. 37).
n., atom.

,

small; as

atas adv., hence.
ati

adv.,

across,

adhika

a.,

additional

superior.

;

adhita part, of adhi-i.

n., front; tip. end.

agra

gen., underneath.
adhi adv., over, above, on.

adhuna adv.,

now
who

adhvaryu m.. priest

recites

the Yajurveda.
\

an

(dniti:

429) breathe;

pra breathe;

h

live,

an, before cons. a. negative prefix.

past; in

cpds,

to excess.
atithi

m., guest.
atra adv., here, hither.

anaduh (278) m., ox.
anantaram adv., after, immediately
afterward

;

as prep.,

w.

abl.,

right after.

atha adv., then

anartha m., misfortune.
; thereupon.
atharvaveda m., the fourth Veda. anavadya a., faultless.
adas (asdu 287) pron., that one ; anahilupataka n., n. pr., a city.
ami adv., after, along, toward.
so-and-so.
:

adya adv., to-day.

anukula

adyatana adj., of to-day.
adroha m., faithfulness.

anujna

ad/tar ma

m., injustice, wrong.

a.,
f.,

favorable

;

permission.

anurupa a., suitable.
aneka a., several.

as n., favor.

anrta

untruth.

n.,

anta m., end

antara

inner

a.,

avagya
as

;

interior,

n.,

middle; interval, difference; oc-

andha

anna

j/

a people.

n. pr.,

adj., other.

any a (231) pron.

f.

ap (277)

make

eat, give to eat.

(332) num., eighty.

agru

n., tear.

pr.,

astadaga (332) num., eighteen.

further; as

conj., also, even.
f.,

heavenly nymph.

n., feeling

of safety

;

safe-

eight.
I

las (dsti

V

2as
-1-

-I-

ty-

:

426) be, exist.

abhipraya m., plan, design

;

view.

throw,

(dsyati)

m



entrust;

into.

asura m., demon.

asau same as adas.

n., nectar.

asthan (asthi: 275) n., bone.
asmad same as vayam; as stem

ay am same as idam.
ari m.,

enemy.

artha

m.,

in cpds, cf. 352, 4.

purpose;

meaning; ahan (ahar, ahas :

aham

wealth.

y arthaya
for (w.

(den.

:

artlidyate)

arh

ask ahita

two ace); + pra idem.

aryaman (284) m.,
(drhati)

right to

;

w.

deserve;

inf.

of,

ali

away with; w.

off.

I.

disagreeable.

aho excl., oh
n.,

!

ah

I

a day and a night.

dat.,

a (130) adv., hither, unto; as prep.,
w. abl., hither from; until.

akara m., form,
akdga m.,

m., bee.

ava adv., down,

a.,

have a

(320), be able.

suitable for.

271) n., day.

(223) pron.,

ahoratra

n. pr.

alam adv., enough; very; w.instr.,

enough



a si m., sword.

amrta

immortal; as
amba (273) f., mother.

;

+ pra throw

abhydsa m., study, recitation.
a.,

hurl;

abhi repeat, study, learn

forward or

abhi adv., to, unto.

]/

the Acvins

(the Indian Aioc, xovpoi).

astavingati (329,332) num.,twenty-

apt (190) adv., unto;

abhaya

2af (agnati) eat; caus. (dedya-

asta (332) num., eight.

hinder;

adj.,

other.

apsaras

obtain;

acquire,

nam-upa idem.

afiti

progeny.

water.

pi.,

apara (233) pron.

downward.

agva m., horse.
agvin m. du., n.

anyatra adv., elsewhere.
anvanc (272) a., following.

anvaya m., descendant,

a.,

lap (apnute)

ii)

food, fodder.

n.,

\/

1-

blind.

a.,

ondhra m.,

condition, state.

f.,

avanc (272)

Cf. 375, 4.

casion, juncture.

necessary.

a.,

avastha

in loc, at last.

;

195

Sanskrit-English Glossary.

I.

air,

figure.

sky.

akrsta part, of a-krs.
akranta part, of a-kram.

13*

196

I.

Sanskrit-English Glossary.
tiara (231) pron. adj., other.

n., arrival.

dgamana

"walk and

dcdra m.,

conversa-

tion"; conduct; observance.

deary a
djiid

iti

command.

dtman m.,

soul, self; often simple

in

beginning;

cf.

cpds,

light.

indu m., moon.

1.

375,

this

here.
\'idh, indh (inddhe: 444) kindle,

reflexive pronoun.

ddi m.,

hence.

adv., thus, so.

ittham adv., in this way, so.
idam (285-286) pron., this,

teacher.

ra.,

f.,

tias adv.,

indra m., n. pr., the god Indra.
n.. n. pr., Delhi.

aditya m., sun.

ddega m., command, prescription. indraprastha

acquire, reach; indrdni f., n. pr., a goddess.
ava, pra, or ami pra, idem ; iyant (263) a., so great ; so much.
sam idem finish.
iyam fem. of idam.

Y dp (dpn6ti,dpnute)
r

+

;

opad

iva adv., postpos., as; like.

calamity.

f.,

dpta part, oi dp, trustworthy;

dyusmant (263)
avista,

f.,

i.

dgu

a.,

+

e. filled

d,

as

arrow.

entered iha adv., here, hither.

(with).

hope.

]/

swift.

iks (iksaie) see,

neglect;

dgrama m., hermitage.
\'

y'lis (icchdti: 109) wish, desire.

isu m.,

long-lived.

of vig

part,

(by),

dgd

a.,

fit.

(dste: 424)

sdyati) place;

sit;

tdrg,

caus.

upa

\-

sit

(a-

f.

;



1-

upa

\-prati expect.

-J, a.,

\l\g (iste:

behold

such.

own

422) rule,

(gen.).

by; igvaram., master; lord; rich man.

wait upon; reverence.

dsana

n., seat, chair.

dharana

ucchrita part, of ud-gri, high.

ud

bringing.

n.,

adv., up, up forth or out.

dhdra m., food.

udaiic (272)

dhuti

udadhi m., ocean.

f.,

oblation, offering.

\/i (eti [-tie:

408]) go:

go over,

mid.,

udaya m.,



repeat,

abhi approach



h

;

rise.

adhi udara n., belly.
read; udyata part, of ud-yam, ready.

(adhydpdyati) teach;
anu follow ;
\- apa go away
\-

northward.

+

caus.
4-

a.,

;

udydna

n.,

garden.

udyoga m., diligence.

astam udyogin

a., diligent,

energetic.

go home) set (of the sun, upa adv., to, toward.
ud rise + upa ap- upanayana n., initiation.
etcj
y pra go forth; die. upanisad f., certain Vedic works.
proach;
(lit'ly
;

icchd

f.,

\-

wish.

;

upabhoga m., enjoyment.

I.

upavtta n., sacred cord
three higher castes.

of the

cles ca, carta, rid, api,

uras

n. pr.,

f.,

dawn;

f.,

:

kata m., mat.

kantaka m., thorn, enemy.
kantha m., neck.

an Apsaras.
as n. pr., Usas,

goddess of the dawn.

kanva m., n. pr.
katham adv., how

?

\kathaya (den.: kathdyati)

\r

(rcchdti:

move; go to;

109)

one's lot, fall upon; caus.

fall to

kadd
api,

re

in

the Rigveda.

pi.,

rna

kaniyas

kanyd

debt.

n.,

at

kanistha

the Rigveda.

verse of the Rigveda;

f.,

when ?
cana, rid,
some time, ever; often

adv.,

(-

w. neg.

rksa m., bear.
in.,

relate,

tell.

(arpdyati) send; put; give.

rgveda

no one

whatever (236).

urvi, a., wide.

urvaci
usas

oftenest in neg. clauses

breast.

n.,
f.

some one

or other; so also w. relatives;

updnah (249) f., sandal, shoe.
ubha a., du., hoth.

uru,

197

Sanskrit-English Glossary.

youngest.

a.,

younger.
daughter, maiden.

a.,

f.,

kapi m., monkey.
kapota m., dove.

rtvij ni., priest.

yjkamp (kdmpate) tremble.
kara m., hand trunk (of elephant) ;

rsi m., seer.

;

eka (231) num., one;
eke





eke,

some





pi.,

some;

others.

ekadd adv., once upon a time.
ekddaca (332) num., eleven.
ekddaca (334)

a.

eleventh.

ray; toll, tax.
karin m., elephant.

karuna

etad (231) pron., this, this here.
eva adv., just, exactly.

karman

evam

\/

esa

adv., so, thus.

same as

ostha m.,

a.,

karna m.,
kartr m. ,

lamentable.
ear.

doer,

maker (202);

author.

kal

n.,

deed; ceremony; fate.

+ sam

(samkaldyati)

put

together, add.

etad.

kalaha m., quarrel.
kald f., crescent.

lip.

kalinga m., n. pr., a people.

ausadha

n.,

medicine.

kaliyuga n., the "Iron
the world.

Age"

of

ka (232) pron. 1. interrogative, kalydna n., advantage; salvation.
who, what; kim w. instr., cf. kavi m., poet.
A-«Wi",,»'. p»ei
2. indefinite, kana a., one-eyed.
note on p. 89.



adj.

and

subst., chiefly

w. parti- kdnti

f.,

charm

;

grace.

198

Sanskrit-English Glossary.

I.

karna m., desire, love

as n. pr.,

;

kdmadugha
as

f.

8c.

1-

+

idem.

a.,

vi,

]/krt (krntdti:



krti

a.,

krtrima

kdrya

n.,

causing, making.
business, concern.

krtsna

kola m., time.

frap*

n.,

fagot;

kdsthamaya

of &a

kirn neut.

kiyant

wood.

made

a.,

;

w.

krsi

of wood.

however.

tu,

pron.

(263)

adj.

how

,

great ?
klrti

poor; niggardly.

graciousness, pity.

draw ;

f.,



V

a draw

(krsdti) plough.

agriculture.

krsivala m., husbandman, peasant.
krsna a., black; as m., n. pr., the

god Krsna.
^ kip (kdlpate) be

in order; tend

or conduce to (dat.); caus. (kal-

glory.

f.,

a.,

f.,

on or up;

Benares.

city,

cut off;

cut,

110)

adopted.
whole, entire.

krs (Jcdrmti)

]/

a

n. pr.,

kastha

kfpd

poem.

n.,

f.,



a.,

a.,

krpana
a poet.

n. pr.,

adorn.

scatter;

+ ava idem.
f., work (literary).

-kdrin

kdvya



idem.

kdya m., body.
karana n., reason, cause.

kdliddsa m.,

pers.);

sarn (395) prepare,

]/2kr (Jcirdti) strew,

ulous Wonder-cow.

kdmaduh

loc.

+prddus make known or visible ;

granting wishes;
dhenu, the fab-

a.,

subst.,

or

dat.,

gen.,

the god of love.

&utas adv., whence?

why?

pdyati,

ordain, appoint.

-te)

kutra adv., where? whither?

ketu m., banner.

kunta m., spear.

ke$a m., hair.

Y kup (kupyati) be angry (gen. kdildsa m., n. pr., a mountain.
koti f., peak
or dat.).
point, tip.
kumdra m., boy, prince.
kopa m., anger.
;

kugala
{/

a.,

do, perform;
the head,
h

make

apa do

loc, ace);

+ alam



ruler over (loc.)

harm

\-

rask.) hide

\-

;

make known,
upa do good

;

blame

punish

]/





transgress;

+ d

avis

exbe-

kram (kramati, krdinate: 134)
+ ati pass beyond;

step;

-I-

\/

nis

pass (of time);

stride

up
go out.

to,

1-

attack;




krl (krlnati, krintte) buy.

(<«'-

krldd

rei,

krodha m., anger.

f., game, sport.
puras tfkrudh (krudhyati) be angry (gen.
or dat.).
prati pay,
1-

;

put at the head ;

recompense,

to,

\-tiras

loc);

;

(gen.,

+ apa-d pay;

prepare, adorn

nefit (gen.,

treasury.

;

394-5) make, kdunteya m., n. pr.
1- adhi
put at kdusalyd f., n. pr.

evil to,

(dviskarotf)
hibit;

kosa m., treasure

able; clever; learned.

ikr(karoti, kurute:

(ace

»

kva adv., where? whither? +

cit

n.,

man

of the

m., decay, destruction.

ksan

(ksanoti,

hurt,

ksanute)

\/2gd (ghyati) sing.

\l

wound.
\/ksal (ksaldyati)

wash;

\-

pra

idem.
ksatra



+ ava
gah (gdhate) plunge;
dive or plunge -under (ace).

gir

suitable for Ksatriyas.

voice, song.

f.,

giri
a.,

together,

gandharva, f. -i, a., in the manner
of Gandharvas.

second caste.

)

come

(mid.)

(instr.).

gariyas comp., very honorable.

time.

moment;

ksatriya m., warrior,

kmya

sam

h

meet

sometimes, ever.

ksana m.

199

Sanskrit- English Glossary.

I.

m., mountain.

song; singing.

glta n.,

quality, excellence.

\/2ksi (ksindti) destroy.

guna m.,

ksitipa m., king.

guru m., teacher.

yksip (ksipdti) hurl, throw.

y guh

(guhati: 101) hide, conceal;

cau8. (guhdyati) idem.
kstna part, of 2ksi, reduced, deguha f., cave.
cayed, ruined.
kstira n.,

ksudra
ksudh

milk.

grha

a., little,

house.

family.

hunger.

f.,

n.,

grhastha m., householder, head of

small.

ksetra n., field.

grhya

domestic.

a.,

go (209) m.,
as

V khan (khdnali) dig.

khara m.,

ass.

gotva

gangd

f.,

n. pr., the

steer,

cow;

cowherd,

m.,

shepherd;

guardian.

Ganges.

gaja m., elephant.
}'

bull,

ox-nature, stupidity.

n.,

gopa

f.,

6g., speech.

f.,

9°Vdya (den.

1

:

goptdyati)

be keep-

er guard.
ganaya (den.: gandyati) number,
+ ava despise.
gdurava n., weight; dignity.
count;
;



gaii

f.,

gait; course.

]/

granth

(grathn&ti)

string

to-

gether; compose.
gandha m., odor, perfume.
gandharva m., a Gandbarva, one granth a m., literary work, book.
of a band of celestial singers.
grah (grhnati, grhnlte) receive,
'

]

V gam (gdcchati
follow;
1-

h

:

ava understand

go down, set
+ a come;

(cf. i



+

go

100)

nis

come

f-

;

anu

abhi visit, attend;
Y

;

+



;

;

astam grama m.,

astam)

+ ud

seize

check

rise;

;




forth; proceed from;

grdsa m.,

+
1-

ni hold,

prati take.

village.
bite,

mouthful.

ghafa m., pot, vessel.

restrain,

200

I.

Sanskrit-English Glossary.
or vi-nis decide,

nis

ghdsa m., fodder, hay.
\fghrd (jighrati: 102) smell.

citta n., notice

ca encl. conj., and, also,

sometimes
cakra

rc.,

Y cafes


+

+

-que;

re,

(caste: 421)

a relate;

behold;

see,

name;

call,



catur (332) num., four.
f.

-I,

;

;



thought; mind.

;

cint (cintdyati) consider.

i

impel.
y cur (cordyati) steal.

\/cest (cestati, -te) stir,

caturdaca (332) num., fourteen.

\/cyu (cydvate) totter, fall
fall

quadruped.

a.,

be

alive.

cdulukya m., n. pr., a people.

fourth.

a.,

catuspad (282)

idem

cudd f., top-knot, scalp.
ced adv., postpos., if.

n., eye.

caturtha,

conclude

vi

ciram adv., long, a long time.
j/ cud + pra in caus. (pracoddyati),

=if.

wheel.

vi-d explain.

caksus

—+

+ pra gather;
+ sam collect.

n., clarified batter; ghee.

ghrta

\-vi

;

away.

catvdrincat (332) num., forty.

candra m., moon.

chattra

candramas m., moon.

chdyd

\/cam, used only with a (dedmati),
sip; rinse the mouth.

car (cdrati) go,
(of cattle);

Yd

tr.,

wander; graze

;

\-

ud caus.

carita n., behavior,

— + pra

[-pra-vi, tr.,

;

ffsljj*



.

,

n.,

n.,

a certain

move
h pra or sam idem.
move, jana m., man; pi., and

sacrifice.

(-

coll.

cinute)

janaka m., father.

janam

gold.

car a m., spy.
cdru a., beautiful.
(cinoti,

men

;

trey fas.

sing., people, folks.

cdturmdsya

\ ci

which moves

janman

f.,

mother.

n., birth,

existence.

jaya m., victory.
gather;

ud

(ujjdyate) be born, arise (abl.);

stir.

camtkara

n., that

and beasts; the world.

loc), arise, spring up;

leathern.

cal (cdlati) stir;

on, march

exter-

middle forms) be born (mother in

life.

hide, skin; leather.
a.,

+ ud

Vjan (jdyate : 155 ; janayati) trans.
(jandyati and active forms) beget,
produce; intrans. (jdyate and

a., moving, going.
carana m., n., foot, leg.

carmamaya

;

take

f-«

;

,.

(uccdrdyati) pronounce, say.

n.,

— + ava idem


minate.

perform, complete, do; jagat

-cava

\'

chid (chindtti, chinddhe) cut, cut
off;

perform, commit;

— + sam-d idem

carman

shade.

away, remove

camatkara m., astonishment.
\'

\'

umbrella.

n.,

f.,

\-

jaras (280)

f.,

old age.

in

I.

jara (280)
jala

tatas adv., thence, therefore; there-

old age.

f.,

water.

n.,

upon.
tatra adv., there, thither.

speak; chat.

X'jalp (jdlpati)

jdgaraya (caus.) awaken.

j

jati

birth; caste; kind.

f.,

tatlid adv., in that

way,

tad nom. and ace.

s.

ft

tada adv., then.

wife.

tadyatha adv., namely, to wit.

n., net.

jala
\

woman,

f.,

and

(jdyati) trans,

intrans.,



\ tan (tanoti, tanute),

+ para, mid.,
conquer, win;
be conquered (cf. in Voc. 9).
n. pr.,

jina m.,
jihva
\

a

name

extend;

-f

.

sacrificial

esp.

tapas

a.,

knowing.

]/

jna (janati, jdnite
+ anu permit;



(djnapdyati)

:

403) know;

Yd

command

caus.
\-

;

vi

jya

n.,

f.,

knowledge;

insight.

intr.,

do

a.,

tam (tdmyati:

131)

;

be sad.

taru m., tree.

taruna,

f.

-I, a.,

young, delicate.

tasthivans pf. part, of stha; as n.,

jyestha (340)

a.,

best; oldest.

jyotisan., astronomy; astronomi-

a.,

n.,

such.

palate.

tdvant adj., so great, so
tavat as adv., so long, so

much;
much
;

often concessive, like done, dock,

cal text-book.
light;

tadrg
talu

bowstring.

jyotis n.,

and

the immovable.

recognize.

jndna

tr.

practising ascetism
as m., ascetic.

jetr m., conqueror, victor.

-jna

-te),

in pass., suffer,

heat; self-torture.

n.,

tapasvin

spoon.

\



penance.

spoon,

,

stretch,

sacrifice);

cause, bring about;

burn; pain;

jivita n., life.

tr.,

(a

pra extend.

\/tap (tdpati,

jiv (jivati) live.

juhu f

perform

Yd

of Buddha.

tongue.

f.,

so.

n. to ta; as

adv.. therefore.

jamatr m., son-in-law.
jaya

201

Sanskrit-English Glossary.

heavenly tiraskarinl

star;

body.

f.,

tiryanc (272)

veil.

a.,

going horizontally;

as subst., animal.
ta

(228-230) pron., he,
both subst. and adj.

etc.
;

;

that,

also as

\/

f.,

n. pr.,

ornament (often

Taxila, a

tad (tdddyati) strike, beat.

city.

place of

pilgrimage.
tivra a., great, strong, violent.

however.

tadaga m., pond.

tu conj., but,

tadit

\/tud (tuddti) push; strike.

f.,

lightning.

tandula m., rice.

fig.).

bank, shore.

tirtha n., bathing-place;

def. article.

taksapild

tilaka m.,
fir a n.,

ytul (toldyati) weigh.

202

I.

y'tus (tusyati) rejoice,

Sanskrit-English Glossary.

take pleasure

in (w. instr.).

over;

+ ud emerge;

\-

ava dasta

— + pra

in caus. (pratdrdyati), deceive.

-d (335),

f.

trtiya,

]/

trsnd

leave,

(tydjati)

+ pari

leave

off,

]/

tringat (332)
n.

num.,
-kl

,

the threefold

world.

of a metre.

ddsa m., slave, groom.
ddsi f., female slave, servant.
day.

n.,

divya

num., eighty-three.
tva stem of pron. of 2d pers. (226
352.

present; generosity.

f.
(rarely m.), sky.
divasa m., day.

tryaglti

cf.

adj. (204), gen-

div (277)

trigtrsan a., three-headed.

name

132) cutj qvve

:

n., gift,

dina

f.,

— +pra

ddnava m., demon.

trivrt a., triple, threefold.

tristubh

2da (dydti

ddna

thirty.

f. ,

in

give or

erous.

give up.

(332) num., three.

triloka

436) give;

make

take (312);

abandon; ddtr m., giver; as

trayodaga (332) num., thirteen.
tri

:

entrust; give in marriage.

tejasvin a., courageous.
\/tyaj

Yd

pay;

thirst, desire.

f.,

dah (ddhati) burn.
caus. (ddpdyati)

third.

a.,

part, of dang.

j/lrfd (dddati, datte

trp (tfpyati) satisfy oneself.

V

n. pr.

dagaratha m.,

y'tr (tdrali) cross

descend;

daga (332) num., ten.

y/

4-

;

a.,

heavenly, divine.

dig (digdti)

show, point out;

command

a



;

+ upa



teach,

instruct.

4).

tvad so-called stem of pron. tva.
dig f. ,
point, cardinal
point;
tvastr m., n. pr., a god, Tvastar.
quarter, region direction.
;

j/

\/

dang (ddgati)

danstrd

daksina

dlrgha

a.,

tooth.

dlrghdyus

n. pr.

Y div

f.,

daksa m.,

bite.

dih (degdhi

a.,

right-hand; southern.

\

du

:

428) smear.

long;
a.,



am

adv., afar.

long-lived.

(divyati) play.
(dunoti), intr., burn, feel dis-

danda m.,

stick; punishment.
tressed; tr., distress (ace).
y dandaya (den.: danddyati) pun- duhkha n., misery misfortune.
;

ish.

dugdha

dadhan (dadhi: 275)

n.,

dam (damyati

:

131)

control

;

durjana m., scamp, rogue.
durdagd L, misfortune.
caus. durlabha a., hard to find or reach;

n. pr.

difficult.

(damdyati) tame; compel.

dayd

f.,

daridra

dargana

compassion,
a.,

n.,

milk.

curds.

dadhyanc (weakest -d/ric) m.,
]/

n.,

pity.

\'

dus (dusyati) be defiled.

dusprayukta a., badly arranged.
philosophical system. dus&anta m., n. pr.

poor.

I.

dhanus

dus insep. prefix, bad; hard.
(dogdhi, dugdhe: 428) milk.

yduh
dukitr

daughter.

f.,

pass,

deva



on;

-f



m.,

god;

f.



cover,

yd

put on; mid.,
+ sam-d lay or place
ni lay

+

vi arrange,

sam put together,

goddess;

-I,

435) put,

devakula

dhdnya n., grain.
dhdrmika a., right,

temple.

n.,

divinity, deity,

ctefa m., region, land.

ddiva,

f.

-i,

dosa m.,
dyuti

f.,

dravya

\'

divine.

dhl

n.,

property

;

hymns,

object.

etc.).

1

dru (drdvati) run.
offend.
\S druh (driihyati) be hostile,

\'

dvdr

dhdirya
]/

firmness; courage.

f.,

cow.

f.,

n.,

steadfastness.

dhyd (dhydyati) think, ponder.

Aryan.

dvitlya (335)

a.,

second.

na adv., not

;

dvipad (282)

a.,

biped.

naksatra

lunar mansion.

|/dn'.s

(dvesti, dviste)

hate;

pra hate extremely.
dvis m.,

391),

dhr in caus. (dhdrdyati) bear.

dhenu

m., Aryan.

dhunute:

shake.

dvahstha m., doorkeeper.
door, gate.

steadfast, firm, brave.

(dhunoti,

dhrti

dvijdti m.,

running; course.

n.,

a.,

d«a (332) num., two.

<fo?/a

+ anu

{.,

(ofVedic dhlra
V dhu

X

f.,



understanding, insight.
dhimant a., wise, prudent.

brilliancy.

drastr m., seer; author

+

just.

dhav (dhdvati) run;
run after.

dhdvana

fault.



ordain;

\/2dhd (dhdyati: 126) suck.
dhdtr m., creator.

f.,

-f

make

unite; lay on.

queen.
devakl f., n. pr.

devata



down;

clothe in (two ace);

on,

put
look, glance; eye.

f.,

receive;

:

opt close,

pari in caus. (-dhdpdyati),

seem,

look.

drf

+

keep shut;

(dargdyati)

(drgydte)



place;

open.

;

right; law; virtue.

lrf^a (dddhdti, dhatte

j

\'drg (127) see; cans,

bow.

n.,

dharma m.,

duta m., messenger, envoy.
dr in caus. (ddrdyati) + vi tear
|/

show

203

Sanskrit-English Glossary.

enemy.

h

with

nagara n., -I f.,
nadl f., river.
I

dvis adv., twice.

n.,

nand

(ndndati,

opt., cf. 207.

city.

-te)

+

abhi re-

joice in, greet joyfully (ace).

dvlpin m., panther.

\'nam (ndmati), intr., bow, bend;
tr., honor, reverence (ace).

dhona

namas

dhanin

n.,
a.,

money,

riches.

wealthy.

n.,

honor, glory.

nara m., man

(vir

and homo).

204

I.

Sanskrit-English Glossary.

naraka m.,

hell.

narmada

n.pr., a river in India.

nala

f.,

niti

life; ethics,

nava (332) num., nine.

\/nrt (nftyati) dance.

navati (332) num., ninety.
navadaga (332) num., nineteen.

nrtta n., dance, dancing.

navlna
]/nap

a.,

new.



perish;

(ndgyati)

perish; disappear.
X'nah (ndhyati) bind;



nrpa m., king.
nrpati m., king.

+

vi

ndtaka

n.,

drama, play.

ndraan

n.,

name; ndma

adv.,

ship.
a.,

low.

nydya m.,

logic.

nydyya

right, proper.

a.,

paksa

woman,

f.,

tn., wing, side; party.
paksin m., bird.

wife.

pipe, conduit.

f.,

panka

ni adv.,

down;

in, into.

nitya a., constant; daily;

mud, bog.

panca (332) num., five.
-am as pancadaga (332) num., fifteen.
pancapanedga (334)

adv., always, daily.

nidega m.,

n.,

|/pac (pdcati) cook.

ndga m., destruction.

f

f.,

by

name.

\

nau

nyanc (272)

ndga m., snake.

ndll

netr m., leader.

netra n., leading-rope, cord; eye.

+ sam

gird, equip oneself.

ndri

pol-

niruj

new.

a.,

conduct of

a., healthy, well.
nilakantha m., to. pr,

in., n. pr.

nava

f.,

itics.

command.

a.,

panedgat (332) num.,

nind (nindati) blame.

fifty-fifth.

fifty.

l/pa£ (pdtdyatt) split open.

pa£u a., skilled.
shrewd, skilled.
niyata, part, of ni-yam, ordain- l/pa^A (pdthati) recite, read,
ed, fixed, permanent.
pam m. pi., n.pr., certain demons.

nipuna

a.,

nirdaya
nirvrti

pandita m., learned man; pandit.

a., pitiless.

f.,

contentment, happiness.

nis adv., out, forth.

)/pat (pdtati) fall,

fly;

\-

ud

fly up.

nigcaya m., decision, certainty.
\fnl (ndyati; caus. ndydyati) lead,



pati (274) m., lord, master; husband.

1pattra n„ leaf, letter.
guide ;
opa lead away ;
4- upa introduce, patnl f., wife, consort.
+ a bring;



consecrate,

bring
settle;

to



a.,

end,

\/pad (pddyate) go;

marry.
nlca

+



+ nis pathi same as panthan.
determine, pathya a., wholesome.
pari lead about; parf (282) m., foot.

initiate;

an

low.

caus.

f-

v?'-«

(vydpdddyati) kill;

in
H

I.

nis (nifpddyate)
(abl.);

grow, arise from pdgupalya

pra

\-

flee for

\/pis (pindsti) grind, crush.

n., lotus.

y pi

panthan (278) m., road, path.
payas n., milk.

same

chief, highest; other.

purhs

m., the world-spirit

punya

same

as

pumdm.

meritorious, holy, aus-

a.,

picious; as n., merit.

para^u m., axe.
a distance, away.
pari adv., round about, around.
adv., to

putra m., son

ascetic.

pur

assembly.
parvata m., mountain.
f.,

V paldy (pdldyate:

cf.

;

p. 116,

note)

city.

f.,

earlier, formerly.

pur ana,

-a and

f.

ancient; as

n.,

man

purusa m.,

beast.

pagedt adv., behind (w. gen.).
\/\pd (pibati: 102) drink;

caus.

(paydyati) give to drink, water.
\/2pd (pali) protect; caus. pdld-

-I,

a.,

n.,

n.

pr.,

creation, etc.

(homo).

pururavas m., n. pr., Pururavas.
purohita m., domestic priest.
pidinda m.,n. pr., a tribe in India.
\lpus (pusndti) make increase or

grow.

the city puspa

Patna.

former,

one of a class of

pusta part, of pus, stout,

yati) idem.

pdtaliputra

daughter.

but.

purd adv.,

works on the

flee.

V'pa? (pdgyati: 127) see.
in.,

-tri f.,

punar adv., again,

wandering pumans (279) m., man, male.

parivrdj (247, 2) m.,

pa^u

pi, fat.

]/ptd (piddyafi) torment, vex.

para (233) a.,

parisad

as pyd.

plna part, of

paramatman
para

pi.,

Manes.

step; place.

n.,

padma m.

n., cattle-raising.

refuge pitr m., father; du., parents;

to (ace.).

pada

205

Sanskrit-English Glossary.

n.,

pustaka

fat.

flower.

n.,

book (manuscript).

'

pdtha m., lecture, lesson.
pdni m., hand.
pdnini m.,

n. pr.

y pu (pundti, puntte) clean.
ypuj (pujdyati) honor.

pura m., flood, high-water.

pdndava m., descendant of Pandu. puru
pdtaka
pdtra

pada

papa

n.,

n.,

n. pr.,

Ptisan,

quarter ray, beam. prthivl f., earth, ground.
bad; as n. subst., sin.
prthu a., broad, wide.
;

;

pdrthiva m., prince.
pdrvatl

f.,

palana

n.,

pd$a

(284) m.,

the Sun-god.

pot, vessel.

m., foot
a.,

m., n, pr.

pumn

crime, sin.

n.

pr.

protection.

m., noose, cord, snare.

prthvi

f.,

earth.

prthvirdja m., n. pr.
\'\pr (ptparti)

fill.

,V")p>;

fpaV^/^^'

po?aka m., supporter, maintainer.

«

i?t/6

206

I.

Sanskrit-English Glossary.
sociable.

pdutra m., grandson.
citizen.

pdura m.,

priyavddin

\'pyd (pydyate) swell, get stout.
forth.

pra adv., forward,
prakdgxn
act.,

caus. (pri-

light; mid., rejoice;

glistening;

bright,

a.,

idem.

a.,

(prindti, prtnlte), act., de-

V'jjri

make

ndyati),

glad, please.

+ a

\/plu (pldvate)

illuminating.

drench.

\/prach (prcchdti) ask, ask about.

praja

f.,

phala

creature, subject.

prati adv. and prep., back, back

again

;

towards

(postpos.

,

]'

unfavorable.

a.,

pratyanc (272)
ward.

pratyaham
\lprath

a.,

backward, west-

bandhu m.,

caus.

(prathdyati),

pramatta

a.,

praydga m.,

;

bdla

many.

f.

careless.
n.

j)r.,

com-

relative.

strength, might.

n.,

balavant

bahu

prabhdva m., might, power.

much

join;

strong, mighty.

a.,

balistha a., strongest.

a., first.

pralhama (335)
a.,

catch;

pose.

bala

spread; proclaim.

prabhuta

bandh (badhndti, badhnlte) bind;
entangle,

adv., daily.

in

reward.

a., fruitful.

w.

ace.).

pratikula

n., fruit,

phalavant

Allahabad.

a.,

a.,

much, many.
young; as m.,

prayoktr m., arranger, user.

pralaya m., destruction.

boy;

bdspa m., tear, tears.
bdhu m., arm.
bindu m., drop.
buddha part, of ftucM,

prayukta part, of pra-yuj.

child,

-a, girl.

awakened

;

enlightened.
buddhi f., prudence, intelligence.

pragna m., question.

prasanna, part, of pra-sad, well- buddhimant a., prudent.
Y budh (bodhati, -te ; budhyati,-te),
disposed.

wake know.
prahdra m., stroke, shot; wound.
budha m., wise man, sage.
prdnc (272) forward, eastward.
;

prdna m., often

pi.,

breath,

life.

prdnin m., living creature.
prdtar adv., early, in the morning.
prdyagcitta

n.,

penance, expiation.

prdyena adv., commonly.

prdsdda m., palace.
pn?/a

a.,

dear.

priyakarman
priyavdc

a.,

a.,

brahmacarya
brahmacdrin

a.,

life

of holiness,

studying sacred
m. , Brahman

as

knowledge;
student.

brahman
(of

kind.

n.,

esp. religious studentship.

n.,

devotion; sacred

God);

sacred

word

knowledge;

world-spirit.

saying pleasant things, brahman (a personification oibrd-

I.

207

Sanskrit-English Glossary.

hman)m., the supreme All-Soul; bhdm f., speech, language.
bhdwant a., shining, brilliant.
Brahma, the Creator.
brahmahan (283) m.
killing a \' bhiks (bhiksate) beg, get by beg,

Brahman.

brahmana m.,

priest,

gingbhiksd

Brahman.

y'bru (braviti, brute), speak, say;

f.,

alms.

bhiksu m., beggar; ascetic.

\pra explain, teach, announce; }'bhid (bhindtti, bhinddhe) split.
announce.
\'bhl (bibheti) fear; in caus. (bh'i-

— +vi explain,

sdyate, bhdydyate) terrify.

bhakta
bhakti

devoted, true.

a.,
f.,

[

devotion; honor.

-bhuj

n., eating.

bhagavant

— +vi

a.,

distribute.

bhuvana
\/bhu

enjoying.



n. pr.,

n.,

a Vedic persorf.

world.

(bhavati,

-te)

+

abhi

exist;

\'bhanj (bhandkti) break, destroy.
bhadra a., good, pleasant; as n.,



+ pari

become;

bhaya n., fear.
bharatakhanda m.,
bliartr m.,

despise;

bhava m.,

supporter; preserver;
husband.

n. pr.,

f.

being, creature.
bhuti

f.,

prosperity, blessing.

a name of Civa. bhubhuj m., king.

bhavati; in voc. bhos,

used

bhavati;

2nd person.

in

respectful

bhubhrt m., king; mountain.

bhumi

n.,

Cf. § 264.

f.,

earth, ground, land.
adj.,

bhusana
glance;



\

n.,

ornament.

bhr (bhdrati,

-te)

support (lit. and

fig')-

-I-

n., n. pr.,

bhdga m., part, piece, share.

bhrgukaccha

-bhaj

holy place in India.
bhrtaka m., servant.

sharing.

bhanu m., sun.
bhara m., burden.
bharyd f., wife, woman.
bhds (bhdsate) speak;
\

answer

Baroch, a

bhrtya m., servant.

— +prati

(ace. of pers.);

converse.

more;

-yas adv., mostly.

ashes.

bhd (bhkti) gleam,
a or vi idem.

a.,

pra

f., earth, ground.
bhuta part, of bhu; as n. subst.,

address instead of pronoun of bhuyas (340) comp.

]

1-

bhu
n. pr., India.

lord, master;

bhasman

be,

overpower;

arise; be mighty, rule; valere.

fortune.

f.

enjoy.

honorable, blessed. bhujyu m.,

a.,

y'bhaj (bhdjati, -te) divide;

bhavant,



+ upa

\'bhaks (bhaksdyati) eat.

bhaksana

2bhuj (bhundkti,
bhunkte) eat,
enjoy; caus. (bhojdyati) feed ;

\-sam

bhr^am adv., greatly, much.
bheka m., frog.

bhoga m., enjoyment.
bhojana n., meal.

208

I.

Sanskrit-English Glossary.

mastaka

bhos see bhavant.

head.

n.,

wander mahant (261) a., great.
mahdnasa n., kitchen.
about, flit
pari idem.
bhrdtr m., brother.
mahardja m., great king.
)'bhram (bhrdmyati :
1-

;

bhru

131)

mahisa m.,

eyebrow.

f.,

mahisi

maksikd

f.,

gnat.

fly,

maghavan (270)
I

m., Indra.

majj (mdjjati) sink ;

—+

sure;

ni id em.

mani m., jewel.
mati

a.,

matsya m.,
called

352,

greek

mdtr

fish.

stem

of

\/mad (mddyati) get
+ pra be careless.

aham;
drunk;

cf.



mdnava
manasa

n.,
f.

fflajB m.,

mitra
n.,

n.,

man

(homo).

sense; understanding.
-£,

human.

way,

street.

garland.

f.,

month.

n., friend.

middle; mitradruh

(249)

friend-be-

a.,

traying.

]/man (mdnyate;

manas

195.

m., road,

madhulih m., bee.
waist.

used in

like Lat. ne,

sweetness.

n.,

m.,

mdnusa,
mfl/«

etc.,

mother.

honey.
madhuparka m., sweet drink.

madhyaa., middle; as

work, create.

cf.

^uvf;

f.,

marga

n.,

suppose

nis

n., flesh.

madhurya

4.

madhu

J-

adv. and conj., not;

mdhsa

shrewd, prudent.

mathi same as manthan.

mad

ma

prohibitions,

mind.

{.,

matimant

n. pr.

queen.
j/lma (jndti; mimite: 438) meaf.,

1-

;

manute) think, mina m.,

sam honor.

tfmtl

mind.

fish.

wink;

(milati)

+

ni

close

the eyes.

manusya m., man (homo),

muktd

f.,

pearl.

mukti f., salvation, deliverance.
manoratha m., wish.
manohara a., agreeable; entranc- mukha n., mouth, face.

mukhya

ing.

mantra m., sacred text;
charm.

spell,

mantrin m., minister; councillor.

manth (mathnati)
manthan (278) m.,
\'

Storm-gods.

stirring-stick.

pi.,

n. pr,,

]/mud (modate) rejoice;

h

anu

allow.

stir.

mandara m., n. pr., a mountain.
marana n., death.
marut m., wind;

a., principal, first.

\/muc (muncdti: 110) free, release;
muktvd, without (312).

the

muni m., sage;
[' mus
(musndti)
musala m.

n.,

ascetic.
steal, rob.

club, pestle.

\/muh (muhyati) be confused or
dazed or stupid.

I.

murdhaga a., on the head.
murdhan m., head.
mula

rdyati) kill.

(den.:

mrgdyate)

\'

yd



chase, hunting.

f.,

glory, fame.

with

go;

(ydti)

into such

abstracts,

and such a state;

+ a approach.

wipe; ydtrdt, march, journey support.
polish; ydma m., watch of the night.

rub,

y/mrj (rndr&ti: 423)
caus. (mdrjdyati) rub

Jumna.

stick, staff.

f.,

come

for, seek.

mryayd

n.,

yasti

hunt

ni or-

fix,

yavana m., Greek, barbarian.
yapas

m., wild animal; gazelle.

\lmrgaya

\-

;

appoint.
yamundf., n. pr., the river

\'mr (mriydte: 155) die; caus. (md-

mrga

ud undertake

(-

dain,

root.

n.,

209

Sanskrit-English Glossary.

;

off,

how much or many
h apa, pari or pra, wipe off. ydvant a.
mrta, part, of mr, dead, fallen.
ydvat as adv., as long as, while;
as soon as.
mrtyu m., death.

;

,

»nrrf

earth, dirt.

f.,

mekhala

yuga

age of the world.

n.,

yugma

girdle.

f.,

n., pair.

megha m., cloud.
Vyuj (yundkti, yunkte) join, yoke,
moksa m., deliverance; salvation.
harness; caus. (yojdyati) idem;
»<o/ja m., infatuation.

ni place, appoint, establish

h

— + pra

arrange

;

ya (231) rel. pron., used as subst. yuddha n., battle.
and adj., who, which, what; cf. \yudh (yudhyate) fight
234 ff.
yuvati f. to yuvan.

V yaj

(ydjati,

pers.,

yati)

instr.

make

crifice for

yajus

sacrifice

-te)

yuvan (269)
stem

young;

yuyam (226)

pron., you.

suitable for sacrificing.

yatas adv., whence; wherefore.

raksitr m., protector.

yati m., ascetic.

y'rac (racdyati) arrange,

yatna m., exertion.
yathd adv., in which
adv.,

yadi adv.,

when,

way

;

rajju
as.

j

ranj

f.,

cord,

+ anu

(anurdjyati

inclined or devoted to

if.

if.

•\Jyam (ydechati: 100) furnish, give
Perry, Sanskrit Primer.

compose

(a literary work).

yatra adv., where, whither.

yadd

you.

sacrifice.

yraks (rdksati) protect.
raksana n., protection.

a.,

yuvati.

sacrificial post.

y'yat (ydtate) strive after (dat.).

yajniya

f.

in cpds. (352, 4.),

yupa m.,
formula, text.

a.,

(instr.).

called stem of yuya?n; as

yusmad

to sacrifice, offer sa-

(ace).

n., sacrificial

yajna m.,

(ace.

caus. (ydjd-

rei);

;

use.

P*

;

rana m.

n., battle.

ratna

jewel.

n.,

14

,

-te)

Hoc).

be

210

I.

Sanskrit-English Glossary.

ratha m., wagon.
rathya
\/rabh

rupa

street.

f.,

grasp;

(rdbhate)



-fa

take hold on, begin.



rein.

;

rasa m., taste, feeling.
raxavant a., tasteful.

(rdjati,

rohini

{.,

laksa

n.,

ratri
\'

kingdom.

;



-f

apa

rap

n.

-f vi

ruj

f.,

yrud

scream;



please (dat., gen.).

sickness, disease.

grow; caus.

make
+ ava

+ ava

\-

upa

spring

(roJidyati, ropdyati)

rise or



;


— + pra

harsh, rough.



+

nis rob.

lup (lumpdti) break to pieces;

devastate
j

427) lick;

idem.

;

plunder.

lubh (lubhyati) covet (dat, loc).
n.,

writing, copying.

world

;

sing,

people.
lobha m., desire, avarice.

loman n., hair.
grow, plant;
+ a climb, loha n., metal;

descend;

up.
a.,

up,

smear.

lidhe:

X'lunth (lunthdyati)

loka m.,

rise,

mount, ascend
ruksa

likh (likhdti) scratch, write.

ob-

runddhe)

blood.

(rohati)

acquisition, gain.

lip (limpdti)

lekhana

n.,

plough.

n.,

rn.,

]/

\

besiege.

rudhira

take;
receive,

]/

;

surrounded; suffused.

}/ruh

labha

\'lih (ledhi,

429) weep.
ruddha, part, of rudh , besieged,

(rundddhi,

make

n., salt.

Jangala

(roditi:

struct, check, besiege;

com-

vi

receive,

(Idbhate)

lavana

idem.

\/rudh

\-

lalata n., forehead.

m., heap.

\/ruc (rocate)

cling.

light;

give.

a noted poem.
pr., a demon.

\iru (rduti: 410) cry,

a.,

Ceylon.

caus. (lambhdyati)

n.,

ravana m.,

n. pr.,

f.,

labh

[

m., n. pr., a hero.

ramdyana

-ghu or -ghvt,

plain.

do wrong.

rdma

goddess of for-

f. ,

lap (lapati) prate;

\

rddh (radhnoti) succeed

a hundred thousand.

little.

small,

lanka

night.

f.,

n. pr.

f.

laghu,

shine; be illustrious.

n.,

possessions,

lag (lagati) attach, hang,

]

rule;

rajan m., king.
rajya

f.,

tune.

direct,

-te)

gold-piece.

rat (277) m., rarely

laksmi (276)

raksasa m., demon.
\/rdj

n.,

wealth.

\/ram (rdmate) amuse oneself;
+ vi (virdmati) cease (abl.).

rapmi m., ray

form, beauty.

n.,

rupaka

iron.

grow
vahga m., race, family.
vakra a., crooked, bent.

and

pi.,

I.

vaksas
\/vac

n., chest,

(vdkti:

speak,

written leal) speak,
vanij m., merchant.

vatsa m.,

+

(a

abhi

caus.

in



+

vi

say;



dispute,

vadhu

vana

]/

!

\

vand

wife.

;

(validate) greet, honor.

body;

n.,

vayam (223)

culp-

n., trade.

vata m., wind.

a

m.,

Brahman

f.,

in

life.

cistern.

vdyasa m., crow.
vayu m., wind.

forest-dwelling.

a.,

word.

;

blameworthy,

a.,

able.

vapi

vari

vap (vdpati) scatter; sow.

vapus

voice

the third stage of his

forest.

woods,

vanavdsin

murder.

killing,

woman

f.,

n.,

f.,

vdcya

vdnaprastha

in.,

,

encl., or.

(abhivdddyati) vanijya
(mid.)

argue.

vadha

tr.
carry, bear;
proceed; flow; blow.

intr.,

vac

speak,

garment.

n.,

y'vah (ydhati)

vd

read.

e.

calf.

(vddati)

greet;

i.

say;

make

caus. (vdcdyati)

name;

I'vad

vastra

hreast.

415)

211

Sanskrit-English Glossary.

figure.

pron., we.

n.,

water.
out.

vi adv., apart,

away,

vinca (334)

twentieth.

a.,

vincati (332) num., twenty.

vincatitama (334) a., twentieth.
vayas n., age.
lvard m., suitor, bridegroom.
vikramdditya a., n. pr., a king.
2vdra m., choice, privilege; favor. \/vij (vijdti) tremble;
h ud in
Zvara a., best; better (w. abl.
caus. (udvejdyati) terrify.
:

tu'tta n.,

than).

vardha m., boar.
varuna m., n. pr., a god.
varna m., color caste.
varnaya

(varndyati)

describe,

vartin a., abiding, being.
n.,

vallabha
\

year.
dear.

vidvista

;

on a journey;

V



\-

vasu

+

n.,

dwelling.
wealth, money.

vasudeva m.,

n. pr.

ni in-

of vi-dvi§,

part,

vidhi m., rule, fate;

pra go away vidheya

habit.
f.,

pass.

detested.

wish.

\'vas (vdsati) dwell;
habit, dwell

knowing.

vidya f., knowledge, learning.
vidoans a., knowing, wise.

a.,

ra<; (vdsti)

vasati

\/2vid (vinddti, -te) find, acquire.
-vid a.,

portray.

varsa

— 417) know,

consider; caus. (veddyati) inform
h ni caus., idem.
(dat.);

;

\

possessions; wealth.

\/vid (vetti; veda: 416

prati

in-

a.,

Brahma.

obedient.

vinaya m., obedience.
Btnfi prep., without (with

instr.

or ace, often postpos).

vipaka m., ripening; recompense.
vipra m., Brahman.
14*

212

I.

pervading, far-

-bhvi, a.

f.

vibhu,

Sanskrit-English Glossary.

reaching; omnipresent, mighty.
vivdha m., wedding, marriage.
vivekin
[/vig

shrewd.

a.,



enter;

(vigdti)

+



self;

pra enter, penetrate.

vig

1-

m.

seat one-

part, of vi-gis,

excellent,

give

rain

;

pain.

f.,

veddnta m.

a system of philo-

,

sophy.
altar.

f.,

vigva (231)

a., all

vyanjana

(Vedic).

man

of the third caste.

n., spice.

caus. (vyathdyati) tor-

in

yvyath
ment.

vigvdsa m., trust, confidence.
n.,

sooth; often untranslated.
vdigya m.,

vigruta part, of vi-gru, famous.

poison.

y'vyadh (vidhyati)

visnu m., n. pr., a god.

vyal'ika a., false,

vihaga m., bird.

vyavahdra m.,

vihita part, of vi-dhd, ordained.

vydkarana

]/

,

vdi assev. particle, to be sure, in

remarkable.

visa

rain

shower down; overwhelm.

veda m., science, knowledge; esp.
sacred knowledge, holy writ.

people; the Vaicya- vedi

pi.,

caste.
vigista

vrs (vdrsati)
fig.,

sam-d vedand

approach;

+ upa

[

hit, pierce.

wrong.

trial,

n.,

law -suit; trade.

grammar.

lvr (vrnoti, vrnute) cover, sur- vydghra m., tiger.
1- d cover ;
r apa-d vyddha m., hunter.

round ;
open ;
1-

\/

f-

sam

vi explain

;

manifest

;

shut.

2vr (vrnlte ; vardyati,

-te)

select.

tree.

exist, subsist,

— +m return home;

become;

wander

proceed;



become an

as-

-te)

forth

;

cetic.

,^

yvrt (vdrtate) turn;
be,

n. pr.

\/vraj (vrdjati,
-f

ill.

sick,

a.,

choose, vyasa m.,

vrka m., wolf.
vrksa m.,

vyddhi m., disease, illness.
vyddhita

vrana m., wound.
vrata

n.,

vow, obligation; duty.

break out,
arise; continue; caus. (act.) con- ]/gans (gdnsati) praise; proclaim;
\-pra get a-going,

tinue (trans.).

\-

vrttdnta

ra.

,

state

of

affairs

;

news.
rrddha part, of vrdh, old.
]/ vrdh
(vdrdhate) grow

;

bring up.

pass.,

cf.

322.

gaka m., Scythian.

vrtra m., n. pr., a demon.

(vardhdyati

pra proclaim.

\'gak (gaknoti)be able; sometimes

vrtta n., conduct.

,

-te)

gakata m., car.
gakuntald
caus.

make grow;

gankd

f.,

f.,

n. pr.

hesitation.

gata (332-333) n., a hundred.

gatatama

a.,

hundredth.

I.

213

Sanskrit-English Glossary.

gatru m., enemy.

gura m., hero.

gabda m., sound, noise, word.

grgala m., jackal.

y gam

(gdmyati)

become

gem m.

quiet,

be extinguished, go out.
gayyd f., bed, couch.

garad

}/

grdddha

garlra n., body.

garva m., n. pr., a
fafc/?a

name of Qiva.

branch;

f.,

red-

edition,

f.,

n.,

trouble.

}/

gri

+

d

grl

repose.

(dgrdyate)

command;

luck,

f.,

go for prowith (ace).
riches; as |>(ess

fortune,

goddess of fortune

n. pr.,

rule; pun-

Manes

16).

tection, take refuge

j/pds (paste)

become

131)

oblation to the

Voc.

(cf. in

action.

gdnti

(grdmyali:

grama m., pains,

autumn; year.

f.,

gram
weary.

protection.

n.,

remainder.

a fabulous snake sup-

porting the earth.

gara m., arrow.

garana

n., rest,

gesa m.,

as

;

prefix to proper names, famous,

ish.

honorable, etc.

gdstr m., governor, punisher.

gdstra

n.,

science; text-book.

V'piArs (giksate)

grlmant
'

learn.

\

gikhara m., summit.
p?'ras n., head.

a.,

rich

;

famous.

gru (grnoti, grnute: 391) hear; in
caus. (gravdyatf)

make

hear,

i.

e.

proclaim (ace. pers.).
firaa., beneficent, gracious; bless- gruta part, of gru; as n., learning.
ed; as m., n. pr., a god.
gruti f., hearing; holy writ.
recite,

greyas a., better; best; greyas as

gigu m., child.
gis (gindsti)

\'

leave, leave remain-

gvan (269) m., dog.

apart, distinguish.

gvagura m., father-in-law.
gvagru f., mother-in-law.

gisya m., pupil, scholar.

y

gl

409) lie;

(gete:

+ adhi
git a a.,
]/

lie

sleep;

gvas adv., to-morrow.



cold.

or

a.,

gudratva

man
n.,

white.

a.,

sattringat (329) num., thirty-six.

good; splendid.

sadag'iti

(329) num., eighty-six.

sas (332) num., six.

gus (gusyati) dry up.

gudra m.,

be confident; trust (gen.

loc.).

gveta

;

\

;

n. pr.

gubh (gdbhate) be brilliant, shine.

gubha

:

\-vi

guc (gocati) grieve, sorrow.

gunahgepa m.,



(gvdsiti 429) breathe
\-sam-d breathe gently: revive;

y gvas

asleep on (ace).

guci a., pure, clean.

]/

salvation.

n.,

— + ava remain over, sur— + ud idem; — +vi set
vive;

ing;

of the fourth caste. sasti (332) num., sixty.

condition of a Cudra.
j

saslha,

f.

-7

(334),

a.,

sixth.

214

I.

Sanskrit-English Glossary.

sodaca (332) num., sixteen.

samagama

m., meeting, encounter.

samdja m., convention, company.
of sam-yuj, pro- samidh f., fagot.

samyukta part,
vided with.

samlpa

sairwatsara m., year.

a.,

near; as

sampaya m., doubt.

samudra m., ocean.

sakrt adv., once.

samunnati

sakthan (sakthi: 275)

n.,

vicinity,

nearness, presence.

n.,

f.

height

,

,

elevation

sakhi (274) m., friend.
sameta a., provided with.
sakhi f., female companion, friend. sampurna part, of lpr
sajja

y sanj

{sdjati

;

sajjdte:

cf.

in

Voc. samyak adv., well, properly.
sarit

(loc).

satkdra m., hospitality.

\'

sad

n., truth,

down; be sarvatra

overcome or exhausted

\-

;

a

\-sam-d seat one-

approach;

self; caus. (saddyati) meet, en-

counter;

\-

ni

sit

down;



+ pra be favorable.
sadd adv., always.
f.

sadrpa,

-e,

sathdigdha

samdhyd

a.,

f.,

a.,

river.

sarva (231)

righteousness.

(sidati) sit; settle

f.,

sarga m., creation.
sarpa m., snake.

sattra n., sacrifice.

mtya

sam,

be fastened on samrdj m., great king; emperor.

hang on,

22)

+

full.

ready.

a.,

;

high position.

thigh.

a., all.

a.,

everywhere.

savitr m., n. pr., the

Sun-god Sa-

vitar; sun.

l/saA (sdhate) endure,

sa^a adv., together; prep., often
with , along with,
postpos. ,
(instr.).

similar; worthy.

doubtful; unsteady.

twilight.

sant, part, of las, being, existing

;

sahacara m.,

companion;

-l

f.,

wife.

sahasa adv., suddenly, quickly.
sahasra n., a., thousand.

as m., good man ; as f. sahaya m., companion, helper.
good woman, especially a saksin m., witness.
widow who immolates herself. sddhana n., means, device.

good

;

satl,

sddhu m., holy man, saint.
sdman n., Vedic melody, song;

sapta (332) num., seven.
saptati (332) num., seventy.

pi., the Samaveda.
saptadapa (332) num., seventeen.
sabhd {., council, meeting, court. sdmanta in., vassal.

sam

sdmpratam adv., at present.
the sdijam adv., at evening.

adv., along with; completely.

samaksam

adv.,

before,

presence of (gen.).
samartha a., capable, able.

in

sdrasa m., crane.

smk

m., lion.

y sic

moisten

(sincdti) drip, drop,

anoint as king.

\-abhi



yisidh (sedhati) repel;
hold back; forbid.

;

ed juice of the Soma-plant.
+prati skandha m., shoulder.

;

in caus.

(sddhdyati) perform; acquire.
sindhu m., n. pr., the Indus.

siman

|

easy

;

sundara,

f.

sumanas

song of praise.

(276)

woman.

f.,

(tisthati)

stand, intr.

;

as



stop;

+



follow out, accomplish
p. 96, last

+pra

sukta

n.,

over;

rise

bring forth;

(sute) generate,

rule, govern;

(cf.

note);

Vedic hymn.



+ sam

in caus.,

-\-anu follow

\-apa go

away;

(-sdrdyati) drive

away.

up;

\/



srj

in caus.



let go, create;
loose or out ; raise (the

(srjdti)

+ ud

let

voice,).

move

y srp (sdrpati)

;

sthiti
}'

f.,

\-pra idem.

upa ap-

+ pra

mid.,

send ;



cf.

290, end.

condition.

snd (snati) bathe.

sndtaka m., one who has performed the ablutions customary at
the end of religious pupilage.

sndna



arise,

place, locality; stead.

sthdna

sthita part, of sthd;

flow;

\-

also

(cf.

cause to remain

surya m., sun.

n.,

+ anu

ud

start off; in caus. (act.),

suda m., cook.

sr (sdrati)

;

1-

Voc. 40);

proach, reach;

generate.

suta m., driver, charioteer.

]/

be in

stand

adhi mount,

suhrd m., friend.



;

(sthdpdyati) put, place; appoint;

flower.

surdpa m., drunkard.
suvarna n., gold.

y su

— 4 upa

;

or on, etc., be situated; caus.

favorably-minded

a.,

strew

in., thief.

y sthd

a., beautiful.

-z,

strnati,

strnute;

scatter, bestrew.

strl

fortune, luck, happiness.

n.,

song of praise; praise.

(strnoti,

stotra n.,

very.

;

su (sunoti, sunute) press.

f.,

str

stena

su adv., well

sukha

(stduti: 411) praise.
f.,

strnite) scatter,

skirts.

\

stuti

out-

border, boundary;

f.,

soma m., the intoxicating ferment-

y stu

(sidkyati) succeed

V 2sidh

215

Sanskrit-English Glossary.

I.

n.,

bathing, bath.

sndyu m., tendon, bowstring.

srsti {., creation.

snigdha part, of snih, affectionate.

setu m., bridge, dike.

y snih (snihyati)

send

love (gen., loc).
snusd f., daughter-in-law.

f.,

army.

y'sev (sevate) serve,

ni

dwell;

devote

sdinika m., soldier.
n.,



+

oneself to;

y sprg

inclined to,

(sprgdti) touch.

ysprh (sprhdyati) desire

attend.

sdinya

honor;

feel

army.

sma

encl.,

(dat.).

slightly assev.

accompanies

a

present

;

often
tense,

216

I.

the force of an histor-

it

giving

Sanskrit-English Glossary.

ical tense.

y smr

remember; think havis
mind teach esp. in hasta

(smdrati)

on ;

call to

'it is

taught,

i.

e.

tradition

f.,

;

own

a.,

V svanj

(svdjate)

embrace;

\'

y svap

(svdpiti:

svayam pron., own
a.,

epithet of

svasr

a.,

of ldlid;

as

adj.,

ad-

Himalaya Mts.

self, self.

self-existent; asm.,

Brahma.

sister.

f.,

part,

vantageous ; as n., advantage.
himavant a., snowy; as m., the

svarga m., heaven.

svddu

hins (hindsti) injure, destroy.

hita

429) sleep.
svapna m., sleep, dream.

svayambhu

causal,

;

because.

for,

\-

similar.

a.,

\-pra idem.

send;

]/hi (hinoti)

hi assev. particle, surely

pari (Cf. Voc. 21) idem.
svadrq

(f <•**.)

)/2hd (jihite: 438) move.

one's own.

;

(jdhdli) abandon, give up;

neglect. ChTytx^e

srasjr m., creator.

sva

hastin m., elephant.

law-book.

garland.

f.,

oblation.

m., hand.

y lhd

traditional'.

smrti

n.,

;

;

pass, smaryate

sraj

harina m., gazelle.
hala m. n., plough.

hma

part, of \hd, abandoned;
wanting in; w. instr., without.
]/ hu (juhoti, juhute) sacrifice.
fire.

hutabhuj (nom. -bhuk) m.,
y hu see hvd.

sweet.

steal ;
svadhyaya m., private recitation \ hr (Jidrati) take away
of sacred texts.
+ apa idem;
+
plunder;
svdmin m., possessor, lord.
a act. and mid., fetch, bring;
;



svdiram adv., at pleasure.

h

ud-d

praty-a

hata part, of han.

cite,

mention;
back;

bring





h

+ ud

save, rescue.

y han (hdntix 419) kill; caus. (gha- hrd (281) n., heart.
+ apa hrdaya n., heart.
tdyati), have killed;







+ abhi smite;
remove;
y hrs (hdrsati,
sam-d wound;
h ni kill;
-1delighted;



h

pra idem.

\-prati hinder; injure, offend;

he interj., O, ho.

+ sam

hemanta m., winter.
hrasvam adv., near by.

-han (283)

hanu

hfsyati) rejoice, be

f.,

write.
a.,

killing.

jaw.

hanumant m.,

\'hri (jihreti)
n. pr.,

a monkey- hrl

king.

f.,

yhva

be ashamed.

modesty, bashfulness.
(hvdyati) call

;

hantr m., killer, slayer.

ydyati) have called

hari m., n. pr., a god.

summon.

in caus. (hvd;

— +d

call,

II.

217

English-Sanskrit Glossary.

II.

English -Sanskrit.

abandon, to: tyaj; Ihd.

answer, to: bhds + prati.

able: samartha; galcya.

appoint, to: kip, caus.; yuj +

able, to be: cak.

approach, to:

according to

argument (reason): vac

anu, postpos.

:

ni.

gam + d; yd+d.
f.

Acvins: acvindu, du.

bhu; (get up) sthd+ ud.
arm: bdhu m.

address, to: bru.

army

acquire, to: labh

arise, to:

dp.

;

nam + pra.

adore, to:

arrow

adorn, to: \kr + alam.

advantage: hita n.
adversity duhkha

;

afraid, to be

afterward

:

kalyana

n.

n.

;

:

+ anu.

allow, to: jiid
bhiksd

:

also

:

always

sadd,

:

:

pari-

be-

ca, postpos.

labh

:

bank

tathd.

anger: kopa m.; krodha
animal: tiryanc m.

parisad

2vid;

;

:

va.

to: Ivid+ni, caus.

f.

lac; dp;

labha m.

kartr

in.;

etc.) drasfr

ram.

bad
;

;

axe; paracu m.

nit yam.
:

f.

jyotisa n.

-\-ava or pra.

hymnns,

api.

oneself, to

announce,

;

— to

;

vraj+pra.

sabhd

:

author:

ancient: pur ana.

and

m.

yati m.

;

for, to: arthaya.

attainment

:

:

ask

Qp

f.

although

amuse

a.,

attain, to:

eva.

api.

altar: vedi

muni m.

:

astronomy

f.

:

ascetic

assembly

all-protecting: vicvapd.

alone (adv.)

m.

isu

ask, to (inquire): prach.

sarva; (entire) vicva.

alms

;

dvija m.; dvijdti

ashamed, to be: hrl.
ashes: bhasman n.

prati.

age: vayas n.
all:

gara m.

:

Aryan:

come an

tatas.

again: punar.
against

f.

gam + d.

vrdj m.; tapasvin m.

bhl.

:

send

:

arrive, to:

papa.
:

\

V\

^

w

tira n.

banner: ketu m.
barbarian
bathe, to:

:

yavana m.

ma.

(of

m.

Vedic

218

II.

rana m.

battle:

be,

to:

n.

;

bhu; vrt;

English-Sanskrit Glossary.

yuddha
(be

sthd.

bear, to: bhr
su +pra.

bear

rksa

:

(bring forth) su;

;

both

ubha du.

:

nam.

bow,

to

boy

bdla m.

:

:

:

branch

beautiful: sundara; rupavant.

brave: dhira.

to:

bee:

va.

alt

beg, to

;

bhu; vrt.
madhulih m.

+ d.

:

uar« m.
hr +

d.

:

burn, to

behold, to: tks.

Benares

dah.

:

business: kdrya n.
but: tu; kimtu ; punar.

kdfi f.
bend, to: nam.
:

+ upa.
beseech, to: pad+pra.

call, to:

besiege, to: rudh; rudh + upa.
best crestha; jyestha.

caste

betake oneself, to: yd;

cease, to:

gam; ram + vi.

celebrated

:

benefit, to; lkr

creyas

:

;

cri

bird

+ d.

jydyas.

birth

vihaga
jdti

:

black

chain

f.

va.
;

;

janman

n.

:

kdnti

:

blood: rudhira

n.

to (intr.)

:

f..

rudh.

;

uras

it.;

n.

child: bdla m.; cicu m.

bhagavant ; (as prefix) choose, to:
cistern

boat: ndu

vicruta ; crimant.

chest: vaksas

prf.

blow,

pi.

check, to: dam, caus.

blame, to: nind; lkr + tiras.
blessed

va.

hdra m.

:

charm

paksin m.

krsna.

:

go

:

charioteer; suta m.

dvipad.

:

:

jdti f.

:

cattle

bind, to: bandh.

biped

hvd; (name) vac; vad.

capable: samartha.

:

better

citizen

vah.

city

:

:

:

2i\r.

vdpi

f.

pdura m.

nagara

n.

;

-j f.;

cleverness: buddhi

f.

pur

f.

f.

body: garira n.; vapus n.
kdya climb, to ruA + a.
m. (heavenly sun, etc.): jyotis n. close, to lur + sam ; lcMa +
bone: asthan n.
cloud: megha m.
:

;

;

book:

;

prthu ; uru.
brother: bhratr m.

pagcdt (w. gen.),

:

m.

f.

m + a;

bring, to:

broad

begin, to: rabh

behind

bridegroom

bhiks.

:

dro/'a

breast: «ras n.; vaksas n.

n.

rupa

:

Qdkhd

:

;

m.

drijdti m.; y/pra

beat, to: tad.

beauty

kumdra m.

;

Brahman brdhmana m.

va.

become,

+ ud.

born, to be: jan; jan

n.

situated)

:

(manuscript) pustaka

(work) grantha m.

:

n.;

apt.

coachman: suta m.
come,

to: graw

+

a; ya

+

6;

t -f

II.

come out: gam +

abhi or a;

yd +

nis;

command

f.

Txjnd

nideca m.

;

+

caus.

jnd+d

to: dig+d;

:

day: divasa m.
d.

putri f

.

;

;

f/u-

f.

d.

by

:

rfma n.

;

dine dine

;

ahan

to

car

:

n.;

pratyaham

;

a day and a night: ahordtra
companion: sahdya m.; sahaca- dead: mrta; vipanna.
ra m.
decide, to (settle) nl + nis.

commit,

a;

f.

daughter: kanyd

tor

nis.

command,

219

English-Sanskrit Glossary.

\kr.

;

n.

:

company: samdja m.
to: rac.

compose,

conduct: vrtta

deity

+

:

deliverance

cint

:

patnl

devatd

:

f.

depart, to

Ivid.

;

mukti

:

i -f

:

desire, to
n.

lubh.

:

destroy, to: bhanj.

man + ava ; bhu -f pari.
ci + nis or vi-nis.

cord, sacred: upavita n.

despise, to

count, to

determine, to:

ganaya.
:

cover, to

f.

\vr (mid.)

:

;

\vr

+ sam

f.

;

go

:

srj.

crescent: kald

;

kft

;

:

:

+ ava;

nac

:

f.

ruj

di,-?(i distress, to

:

+

ava. distribute, to

prati-d.

vi.

du.

:

:

bhaj

;

pra-

+

vi.

divya.

do, to: \kr ; car

daily: nitya; (adv.) nityam

-f

domestic: grhya.
dog cvan m. ; cum
:

n.

vi.

t

chid

divine

tyaham.
dancing: nrtta

-f-

vad +

dispute, to:

+

vyddhi m.
ruh -f ava.
;

dismount, to
disown, to: khyd

cut, to: krt; chid.
:

disappear, to
disease

f.

crow: vdyasa m.
curds: dadhan n.

off, to

+ pra pad +

diligently: bhrcam.

jagat n.

cross, to: tr.

cut

i

durlabha; duskara.
dig, to: khan.
diligence: udyoga m.

creator: dhdtr m.; srastr m.

creature: prdnin m.

mr ;

:

difficult:

f.

cowherd: gopa m.
create, to

die: aksa m.
die, to

(mid.),

cow: dhenu

:

devoted: bhakta; snigdha.
devotion: bhakti f.

tejasvin.

course: gati

apa.

describe, to: varnaya.

f.

cook, to: pac.

courageous

f.

demon: rdksasa m.

+ upa.

copying: lekhana

:

n.

delight, to (tr.): tus, caus.

ni.

ji.

consecrate, to: ni
consider, to

karman

:

delicate: taruna.

n.

confine, to: rudh

conquer, to:

consort

deed

door: dvar

f.

sam-a.

f.

vi.

220

II.

English-Sanekrit-Glossary.
p.

7?

doorkeeper: dvdhstha m.
dove kapota m.

even (adv.):

draw, to: vah.

evil (adj.):

drink, to: \pd. j.t<\
driver: suta m.

exceedingly:

:

ni; dwell

sanj.

karna m.

ear:

earth

:

:

bhu

;

bhumi

f. ;

f.

prdnc ; the E. prdcl
:

8c. die.

\kr

:

+

+

bhuj.

chid

to:

one's

kirti

:

f.

yacas n.

;

f.

vicruta.

fasten, to: bandh.

eldest: jyestha.

fat:

gaja m. hastin m.
ekadaca.
;

tr

+•

ud.

field

encompass, to: Icr ; chid
end: anta m.

+

ava.

enjoy, to: bhuj.

;

dvis m.

finish, to:

:

+ pra.
nah + sam.

entrust, to: Ida

equip, to

:

eulogy: stotra n.

sampurna.

find, to: 2y»d.

fire:

entrancing manohara.
envoy: data m.

#«dA.

finally: ante.

enter, to

vie -f pra.

m.

tiras.

anavadya.

puma;

enjoyment: bhoga m.
:

/>?7r

+

pancama.

filled:

catru m.

;

Ikr

:

ksetra n.

:

fifth:

fight, to:

endure, to: sah.
;

fault, to find

fear: bhaya n.

emperor: samraj m.

ari m.

pina; pusta.
janaka m.

father:

faultless:

eminent, to be: cubh.

:

to

family: vahga m.

eightieth: acltitama.

enemy

fall

(killed):

patita; mrta.

fast (firm): drdha.

:

aksan n.;

ni ;

fallen

r;

famous:

emerge, to

+

pat; pat

lot:

eighth: astama.

:

ud.
;

f.

eighty: aciti

:

vi;

fair: sundara.

fame

tiras.

eight: asta.

elephant
eleventh

+

+

n.

samidh

:

:

\vr

vi\

caksus n.

;

mukha

fagot

fall,

ad; 2ac; bhaks;
eating: bhaksana n.
eat, to;

eclipse, to

eye: netra n.
locana n.

face:
f.

prthivi

east, eastern
f.,

+

n.

ati.

exterminate, to

dwell, to: Bvas; vas
(fig.)

pdpa\ (subst. ) papa

explain, to: bru
caks + vi-d.

drop, to: sic.
drop: bindu m.

on

api.

every: sarva.

:

dp + sam.

agni m.; hutabhuj m.
firewood: samidh f.
first:

prathama;
thamam.

fish
fit,

:

to

tnatsya m.
:

«/w;'.

;

at

first

mina m.

2?ra-

II.

five: paiica.

generous

flee, to

get, to:

flit,

paldy.

:

to: bhram.

flock

fly,

to:

fodder

:

foe: ari

:

fly

+

follow, to: <7a?w

anu;

i

+ anw.

fond, to be: tus.

food
foot

anna

:

force

bala n.

vana

give, to:

f.

glance: drc

f.

ktrti

f.

:

;

:

deva m.

good: sddhu;

graciousness
grain

crl

crl

often pi.

f.,

;

muc.
mitra n.;

sakhi m.; su-

phala

f.

n.

:

n.

grah.
car.

mitradruh.

:

great king: mahdrdja m.
greater: mahlyas; adhika.

:

(gen.),

Greek: yavana m.
greet, to vand vad +

n.

grieve, to: du.

agra

samaksam

f.

greatly: bahu; bhrcam.
greedy lubdha.

hrd m.

fruit:

devl

:

great: mahant.

friend -betrayer
front:

.

graze, to

four: catur.

friend:

krpd

vyakarana

:

grasp, to
f.

:

dhdnya

:

goddess grammar

f.

forty: catvarincat

free, to:

go on

i;

pra.

sant.

(sacrificial): yajus n.

:

+

govern, to: pas; rajyam kr.

n.

n.

:

:

n.

gam;

n.

formula

f.

yacas

goddess

;

gold: suvarna

gracious: civa.

of

f.

Ida.

yam;

forest-dwelling: vanavdsin.
form, to lwd + nw.

fortune

f.

2>a7a

;

giver: ddtr m.

god

foreign: para.
forehead: lald{a
forest:

kanyd

go, to: car: yd;
(continue): vrt

n.
;

:

:

glory

pada m. pad m.

:

girl

dp.

saw*.

girdle: mekhald

f.

up pat + ud.
ghdsa m.
m. ; catru m.

pat;

+

nah

gird, to:

pi.

flower: puspa n.; sumanas

ddtr.

:

/aM; lac;
dana n.

gift:

papu m.

:

221

English-Sanskrit Glossary.

in

n.;

f.

of:

agre,

:

;

bhumi

fruitful: phalavant.

ground

full:

grind, to: pis.

purna; sampurna.

;

f.

;

abhi, caus.

on the

g.

:

adhas.

guard, to: raks; gopdya.
guest: athiti m.

gain, to: ZaM.

garden: udydna
garland: «ao/a
gate: drar f.
gather, to:

ci

f.

n.
;

guilt:

sraj

papa

n.; enas n.

f.

hand: kara m.; pdni m.; hasta m.

+

gazelle: harina

hang, to

sam.
in.

;

wroa m.

sanj lag.
happiness: sukha n.
:

;

222

II.

English-Sanskrit Glossary.

happy, to be: mud.
hard to find durlabha.

harm, to
hate, to

dvis

:

+

\kr

:

intelligence: buddhi

+

pra.

jaw: hanu f.
jewel mani m.

hear, to: gru.

heart

heaven

heavy
hell

n.

hrdaya

:

:

:

hrd

;

n.

:

sana

svarga m.

:

kill, to

gura m.

vtra m.

;

hesitation: gankd

mr, caus.

:

;

nrpati m.;

king: nr/ja m.;

m.

rthiva

f.

m.

ra/an

;

holy: sddhu.

knowledge:

holy writ: gruti

madhu

jnana

n.

tri.

language: bhdsd

sev.

f.

last, at: ante.

grha n.
grhastha m.
:

house-priest

;

land: depa m.

f.

householder

+

lament, to: Jap

n.

law: dharma m.

horse: agva m.

house

m'cfya f .

f.

honor, to: puj; nam;

hope: dgd

pa-

bhubhuj

:

(adv.); grham.
:

;

m.; bhubhrt m.

kingdom rdjya n.
know, to: lvid;jnd.

honey

bhu-

han Aan, caus.

;

high: ucchrita.
high water: pura m.
hold shut, to: Idha + apt.

home

;

kindle, to: idh.

here: atra; iha.

hero

rafria n.

;

n.

guru.

naraka m.

:

f.

iron: io^a n.

apa.

dvis

;

adharma m.

injustice:

:

:

master of the

h.,

law-book:

;

m.

w'dfo"

«mrti

f.;

dharmagd-

stra n.

:

grhastha m.

law-suit: vyavahdra m.

:

purohita m.

lead, to:

how?: katham.
human: mdnusa.

m.

leader: netr.
learn, to: #«?«

+

ava; Ivid;

i

+

hunter: vyddha m.
hurl, to: 2as; ksip.

learned

husband: pati m.; bhartr m.

learning: wicfya f.
leather: carman n.

hymn:

swfcto n.

vidvdhs ; pandita ; kugala.

:

leavings: ucchista
I

:

impart, to

n.

lesson: adhydya m.

aham.
:

Void

+

ni,

caus.

lick, to: &7t;

fo'A

+

ara.

inclined, to be: snih.

life

increase, to: vrdh.

light:

India: bharatakhanda m.

light (not heavy): laghu.

initiate, to: ni

+

upa.

:

jivita n.; ayws n.;
jfyoft's

like: ioa.

n.

carita n.

II.

limb: afiga

modesty: Art

m.

ostha

:

moisten, to:

listen, to: cru.

jlv ; vrt ; an + pra.
long: dirgha; (adv.) dram.
live, to

:

+

look at, to: Iks
lord: icvara m.
lotus:

god of

love,

1.

lanar mansion

:

:

kanyd

:

man

mostly

bhuyas.

:

kama m.
naksatra n.

mother-in-law

.

f.

;

bald

mouth

f.

cvacru

m.

giri

mukha

:

mo-ithful

nam

:

;

:

;

f.

parvata m.

n.

much: prabhuta; bahu.

f.

to: \kr.

(w>):

n.

month: mdsa m.

morning, in the: prdtar.
mother: mdtr f amfta f.

maidservant: ddsl

make,

sic.

monarch; samrdj m.
money: dhana n.; rasu

mountain

maiden

f.

inaw m.

n.

snih.

:

n.; a/»arf

f.

moon: candramas m.; candra m.;

pra.

pati m.

;

padma m.

love, to

duhkha

misfortune:

n.

lion: sinha xa.
lip

223

English-Sanskrit Glossary.

:

grdsa m.

to

m.; pumdns m.; murder,

mr, caus.

:

caus.
m.; (homo): jana m.;
mdnava m. manusya m. wara m. must: arh;

;

han

;

han,

purusa

;

mankind:

cf.

;

m.

jiawa

§320 and Exer-

cise 30.

pi.

many: 5aAw; prabhuta.
march, to: cal+pra.

name: ndman

marriage: vivdha m.

name,

marry, to rat + pari.
master: bhartr m. ; pafi m.

ganaya.
neck: kan\ha

mat

neglect, to: \hd.

:

:

Acta m.

means: sddhana
meet, to

(intr.)

:

jam + sam

(mid.),

mention, to hr -f urf-a.
merchant: vanij m.
:

n.

vad;

ndma.

:

(reckon)

xa.

no one

:

f.,

n.; waft"

minister: mantrin m.

f.

cid,

or

or cana.
the N.

na

kirn

+

api,

cid,

now adhund ; sdmpratam.
:

:

sc. dig.

not: way ma.

n.

cid,

north, northern: udanc ;

nothing:
cana.

payas

api,

f.

na ka + api,

mighty: balin; balavant; vibhu.
<iuA.

+

news: vrttdnta m.
night: rdtri

milk, to:

mind: manas

by

carta.

wdw

merit: punya n.

fcszra n.;

;

:

n.

meeting: samdgama m.
melted butter: ghrta n.

milk:

n.

vac;

net jala n.
never: na kadd

n.

medicine: dusadha

to:

or

224
O:

II.

English-Sanskrit Glossary.

he.

pilgrimage: iirthayatrd
pious: sddhu.

obedient: vidheya.
oblation havis n.

place, to

:

:

ldhd ; dhd

f.

+ sam-d.

occur, to: drc, pass.; 2vid, pass.

place: pada n.; deca m.

ocean

plan

:

udadhi m.

offend, to:

;

samudra m.

han+prati;

Via.

offering (sacrificial): havis n.

play, to

old: vrddha; older: jydyas.

omnipresent
once sakrt.

:

ruh, caus.
div.

:

please, to: rue.

vibhu.

:

abhiprdya m.

:

plant, to

pleasure: sukha

pAl
n.

;

with

one: eka.

icchd

only: eva.
opinion; mati f

cchayd.

.

mata

;

or; vd, postpos.

;

f.

kdma m.

;

plough, to

:

point out, to;

outskirts: siman

polluted, to be: dus.

f.

post, sacrificial:

parents: pitr, m. du.

path

:

pearl

:

muktd

powerful: balinj balavant.
praise,

panthan m.

;

people

:

f.

pray

perform,

to:

;

loka,

sidh,

s.

and

caus.;

car + sam-d; (a sacrifice)
perfume: gandha m.
perish, to: nac + vi.
pestle: musala m. n.
pierce, to: vyadh.

gam;

for, to

:

:

stutii.

;

stotra n.

stu.

arth.

prescription: ddeca m.

n.; prdyagcitta n.

./ana, pi.

song of p.

praise, to:

peasant: krslvala m.

penance: tapas

yupa m.

pound, to : pis.
pour, to: hu.
power: bala n.

n.

bhdga m.
mdrga m.

die.

pot: ghata m.

palace: prdsdda m.

:

n.

possessions: dhana n.

sva.

:

part

sve-

poor: daridra.

».<^3

to: vrs.

yugma

:

krs.

other; anya; itara, apara.

own, one's own:
ox anaduh m.

at p.

poem: kdvya n.
poet: kavi m.

order, to: jna + a, caus.

overcome, to: 2pr.

;

ldha + vi; plunder, to: lunth; hr ; lup,

ordained: vihita.

pair:

pleas-

plough: larigala n.; hala m.

n.

athavd.

;

ordain, to: kip, caus.

overwhelm,

p.,

antly: sukhena ; (wish, choice)

:

pi.

car;

tan.

presence: samlpa n.

previous

;

purva.

priest: rtvij m.

prince kumdra m.
property: vasu n.; dhana
:

n.

prosperity: bhuti f.
protect, to : raks ; 2pd ; pa, caus.
protection; carana n.

II.

protector

raksitr

:

riches: dhana n.; vasu n.; crii.

ra.

punish, to: dandaya

rdi

gas.

;

punishment: danda m.
put, to: stha,

+

Rigveda: rgveda m.; rcas
rise, to
i

quadruped

+

quarter: pdda m.; (of the sky)

ud.

f.

rajni

;

f.;

mahisl

f.

pdda m.

+

i

:

srj

ud.

root: inula n.

run, to

dp

;

adhi; (aloud) path;

+

grah;

grah

a.

(tell) kath.

path;

reckon, to: ganaya.
recompense, to \kr
:

rein

:

f.

remember,

mud.

return, to

vrt

grah

+

+

reward phala
:

rich: dhanin;

of,

for
3).

lavana

nam\puj;

the:

n.

:

trpta.

to

:

caus.

trp,

;

(oneself)

+ ud.

say, to

:

vad

;

vac

bru.

;

scatter, to: 2kr.

ds

+ upa.

scholar:

(learned

gisya:

man)

pandita m.

crimant; vasumavt science: gdstra
udadhi rn.

Perry, Sanskrit Piimer.

artha in cpd.

Savitar: savitr m.

(comp. and sup. sometimes va- sea
sty as, vasistha).

n.

salvation: muktii.; bhutii.; hitan.

save, to : hr
ni.

ni.

n.

:

trp.

tandula m.

reverence, to:

some one)

yajna m.
formula yajus
m.

375,

satiated

to: smr.
:

:

salt:

rsi

satisfy,

restrain, to

:

+ prati.

racmi m.

rejoice, to: tus;

rice

(cf.

deca m.

;

sacrifice:

m. sage:
sake

(in fortune): kslna.

region: die

n.

caus.

sacrificial

recitation (private): svddhyaya

reduced

Ig.

dru.

;

sacrament: samskdra m.

ya;',

labh;

Ida

recite, to:

d//a<;

:

sacrifice, to: yaj; (for

to:

+ prati;

caus.

wir;',

;

running: dhdvana

rajya n.

receive,

mrj

:

+ pra.

vac, caus.
:

f.

:

+

ragmi m.

;

reach, to: labh

read, to:

vrs.

:

raise, to (the voice)

realm

sarit

;

royal: raja-, in cpd.
stha + adhi ;
rule, to

f.

rain, to (give rain)

ray:

.

road: mdrga m.; panthan m.

rub, to
vrsti

:

pi.

rob, to: mus, lunth.

f.

queen: devl
rain

f.

(of sun, etc.): gam-\ ud;

river: nadi f

catuspad.

:

;

m.

righteousness: satya n.
yuj right (subst.): dharma m.

ldhd;

caus.;

ni.

dig

225

English-Sanskrit Glossary.

:

seat oneself, to

n.

samudra m.

;

:

sad +

15

ni.

226

II.

second

:

English-Sanskrit Glossary.

putra m. suta m.
son-in-law jdmdtr m.
son

dvitiya.

see, to:

pac; drc;
seer: rsi m.

ties;

Iks

+

pra.

:

;

:

f.

song: gir

send, to: sthd+pra, caus.

stotra n.

servant: bhrtya m.; bhrtaka m.

soul:

serve: sev.

sow, to: vap.

to: (place)

set,

sun, etc.)?

shade: chdyd

f.

she, etc.

f.

shine, to

ship

sd,

:

(intr.,

gam +

rdj

;

;

bhd

+

vi.

sin

:

f

f.

.

vyddhita

+

sawi.

rugna.

;

stone : drsad

f. ;
(precious)
stop, to (tr.): rudh.

rathyd

:

f. ;

singing: gita n.

strive, to

-f a.

sister: swasr
sit,

:

yat.

study, to:

+

i

+

subject: prajd

six: sas.

such: idrc.

sastha.

suffering:

f. ;

die

slave: c/aso m.
slay, to:

;

f.

pi.;

ddsl

akdea

n.

sleep, to: svap;

*fo";

(pi.):

ers: ke cit



bhdnu m. ; dditya m.
:

cis

+

ud.

abhi.

swift: dcu.

sword:

asi

m.

m.

ke

sometimes: kva

:

survive, to

tathd.

eka pi.; some
'

n.

sweet: svadu.

+ pra; han +

evam:

soldier: sdinika

some

duhkha

suitable: anurupa.

snn

ci.

smell, to; ghrd.

so:

f.

summit: cikhara m.

f.

wr, caus.; Aan.

smite, to: hr

+

suffused: ruddha.

skilled: patu.

sky: div

adhi (mid.); 2as

abhi.

ni.

situated, to be: vrt.

:

mdrga m.

strongest: balistha.

f.

to: sad\ sad

sixth

mani m.

strange (another's): para.
street

strike, to: tad.

cam

lunth.

danda m.

stick:

api; \vr

4-

enas n.

;

mm;

m.

sing, to: 2gd.

:

f.

stand, to (intr.): sthd.

steer: go

paksa m.
/?apa n.

sip, to

bhdsd

;

state, to: 6rS.

shut, to: \dhd

side:

speech: vac

spoon juhu

steal, to: cur;

f.

show, to: drc, caus.
shrewd: patu.

:

spear: kunta m.

:

f.

shoe: updnah

sick

dtman m.

of speak, to: vad: vac; bhds.

astam.

of ta.

cubh

:

ndu

:

\dhd;

astam;

4-

gita n.; (of praise)

;

stfwto' f.

;

tit.

tit.

oth-

take,

to:

da

+

a;

grah;

prati.

take place, to

:

jan; bhu

grah

+

II.

treasury kom m.
tree vrksa m. ; taru m.

pad + pra.

take refuge, to:

:

tasteful: rasavant.

:

tremble, to: kamp.

tax: kara m.
to:

teach,

+

i

adhi, caus.; dig

truth

dcdrya m.
tear: agru n.; bdspa m.

tell,

guru m.

:

ten

twelve: dvddara.

to: kathaya; vad.

:

twenty-eight

n.

:

bhi,

caus.;

vij

+

ud,

n.

umbrella: chattra

that: ta; ayam; asau.

there

twine: bandh.

two: dva.

cans,

understand, to:

tadd.

:

f.

twilight: sandhyd

kip.

to:

text-book: gdstra

then

saptavihgati.

:

twice: dvis.

to, to

terrify,

aMdvihgati.

:

twenty-seven

daga.

tend

n.

satya

:

twelfth: dcddaga.

;

temple: devakula

satya; (faithful) bhakta.

+ true:

upa.

teacher

227

English-Sanskrit Glossary.

unite, to (intr.)

tatra.

:

thereupon

:

anrta

tatas.

untruth

m.; caura m.

upanisad

thief: stena

think, to: tint;

man;

think on:

:

:

n.

gam ava.
gam + sam (mid.),
-f-

n.

;

asatya n.

upanisad

:

f.

useful, to be: sev.

smr; dhyd.

sdmanta m.

third: trtiya.

vassal

thirty: tringat.

Veda: veda m.

:

thirty-three

trayastringat.

verse

:

gloka m.

:

;

ay am.
thou: tvam.

vessel

three

victory: jaya m.

this: ta;

view (opinion): mati
village: grama m.

threefold: trivrt.
thrice:

tris.

thus: iti;

time

evam;

tathd.

kdla m.

:

voice

:

;

:

<7<zw

vac

f.

;

+

trade

:

mata

n.

n.

abhi.

gir

f.

:

f.

pid; vyath, caus.

wagon: ratha m.
warrior: ksatriya m.

wash, to: ArsaZ; «pff.
water jala n. ; ran n.
vyavahara m. ; vdnijya.
travel, to vas + pra; sthd + pra wave: vlci m.
we: va^a/n.
n. (mid.).
15*

touch, to

;

dharma m. punya

:

:

f.

gvas.

tongue jihvd
torment, to

virtue

visit, to

to-day: adya.

to-morrow:

f.

victorious, to be:,;i.

tri.

:

(of Rigveda) re

n.

pdtra

:

sprg.

:

:

:

;

ap

f.

pi.

228

II.

wear, to

:

dhr, caus.

English-Sanskrit Glossary.
winter: hemanta m.

bhr.

;

weary, to become: gram.
to: granth

weave,

;

wipe, to: mrj; mrj

bandh.

wish, to:

western:

West:

what

pratici

alone,

pratyanc;

f.,

the

withered

:

mldna.

without: vind

sc. dig.

(instr.,

wolf: vrka m.

n.

when (rel.): yadd.
when ? kadd.

woman:

whence?:

woman-servant: ddsl

jay a

:

where

kutas.

where?: kva; kutra.
(rel.)

:

:

ya.

which (of two) ?

:

.

;

strl

f. ;

f.

;

;

world:

vana

loka

m.; jagat n.;

worship, to

ya ka + api, cid
cana; often by rel. alone,
whole: krtsna.
:

bhu-

n.

brahman

world-spirit:

ka.

whoever

f

ntha m.

katara.

(rel.): ya.

who?:

vadhu

f. ;

:

white: gveta.
whither?: kva; kutra.

who

ndrt

f.

wood: kdsthan.; (forest) vana n.
word vac f. gabda m.
work karman n. (literary) gra-

(rel.): yatra.

which

ace),

witness: saksin m.

(rel.): ya.

wheel: cakra

or pari.

with: saha, w. inst.; or by instr.

wedding: vivdha m.
weep, to: rud.
west,

+ apa

is.

:

n.

_pfi;'.

or worthy: sadrga.

wound, to ksan.
wreath maid f. sraj
:

:

;

f.

why?: kutas; kasmdt.
wicked: papa.
wife

:

bhdryd

win, to

:

year: samvatsara m.; varsa m.
f.

;

nan

f.

patnl

f.

yoke, to:
yonder:

ji.

wind: vdyu

;

va.

;

vdta

ta.

^iy, caus.

tatra.

young: yuvan.

n.

Appendix.
Hindu Names

The Hindus

call

the

different

of

Letters.

sounds, and the characters re-

presenting them, by the word kara ('maker') added to the sound
of the letter, if a vowel, or to the letter followed by a, if a con-

Thus, a (both sound and character) is called akdra ; u,
kakara; and so on. But sometimes kara is omitted, and

sonant.

ukara;

k,

a, u, ka, etc.,

are used alone.

The

r,

kara, but only ra or repha ('snarl').
are called by these names alone.

however, is never called raThe anusvara and visarga

Modern Hindu Accentuation of Sanskrit.

Brahmans employ,
with insignificant variations, an ictus-accent, which is quite different
from the older musical accent (svara) described in Indian and
In the pronunciation of Sanskrit almost all

European grammars, and employed nowadays exclusively
of the

itation

Yeda

the Vedic texts,

The

older system,

in the rec-

moreover, as marked

in

subjected to very considerable modifications by the Hindus in the traditional recitations of the Vedic

has been

schools.

The modern ictus-accent is weaker than that of English. The
more important rules governing its use are as follows:
1. a. In primitive verbs and derivatives from them the rootb. But the accent never goes further
back than the fourth place, and seldom back of the third. It may
rest on the third syllable only if the penult be short; on the fourth,

syllable is usually accented,

only if both antepenult and penult be short; thus, kdranam, kdranat,
but karanena ; bodhati, kxipasi, nflvyatha, but bodhdvah, ksipdmah,
napydnti; duhitd, duhitaram, but duhitfndm.
2.

Derivatives from nouns generally retain the accent

of the

230

Appendix.

primitive, with the limitations given in 1. b.; thus, rdnku, rankava;
gdrga, gdrgyah, but gargyayani. A naturally short vowel in the
penult, if followed by a group of consonants containing y or u,

does not generally become long by position; thus, prdbala, prdba-

lyam; ukta, uktatvat.
3. In verbs and verbal derivatives joined with
prepositions, in
augmented and reduplicated forms, and sometimes in declensional
forms, the accent

is

recessive, if the root or stem-syllable be short

but utkfstam, niruktam

thus, dgamat, dnatam, anusthitam,

;

;

dgamat,

dksipat, but bibhdrti, tustdva,jagdu. Polysyllabic prepositions, when
prefixed to other words, retain their own accent as secondary accent;

thus, upagacchati,
4.

upagdmatdm.

In compounds, unless the

word, each part generally retains
principal

member

is

the

member be a monosyllabic
own accent, but that of the

first

its

strongest

;

thus, rdjapurusam, pdrvatagi-

khardkaram ; but unmukham, diggajam, pragisyam.
The division of syllables is much more apparent
than in English.

in

Sanskrit

reading Sanskrit prose the Hindus generally
drop into a sort of sing-song recitativo. Verses are always chanted.
In

Corrections and Additions.

P.

10.

P. 27.

At end o/§ 38 add: The four semivowels are always sonant.

Add

to § 102
The final ^S({ a of the root is shortened in
Add
the reduplicated stem, except in the first persons.
to § 103
In the dual and plural of all declensions the
:



:

vocative

P.

31.

P. 39,

Add
1.

is like

the nominative.

to § 112.5: It is also

used as terminus ad quern.

For: makes some forms with short If a read: makes
also forms according to the unaccented a - class
thus,
7.

:

^rTf?T bhrdmati
P. 40,

1.

At

7.

etc.

beginning of line insert: the.

v. tj pr. After: overcome insert: (evils).
P. 49, Vocab., s. v. ifj^ + ^n^. After: meet insert: (w. instr.).
P. 53, 1. 9 from below. After 'WSffi insert
<\.
L. 11. For: were
P. 56, 1.10. For: besought read: beseech.

P. 43, Vocab.,

s.

:

\



read: are.

P. 59.

P. 60,

At end of
1.

P. 65. Dele the
P. 70,

The

§ 188 add:

impf. pass,

is

similarly inflected.

For: pratisedati read: pratisedkati.

19.

first

word

(the) of the page.

from below. Bead: accompanied.

1.

10

P. 72,

1.

12.

P. 73,

1.

9

P. 74,

1.

7.

P. 87,

1.

12.

After: are insert: so.

from below. For:

«nT« read:

^TH-

After: saved insert: (ud-hr: cf. § 267).
Bead: Final
and ^ of a stem regularly become.

^

Bead: possessive.
P. 117, 1. 6. For: T^TT read: Trf^fSTT.
P. 119, Vocab. Insert in last line: + ^r^— "^JT come together, join.
P. 126. Add to § 329 the following: Note also: $1<^3| 12, etc., but
P. 90, last

line.

WM*K 33

82 only gnftf?!; ^ftf^lTfTT 23,
83 only ^nfffil;
#i M^RujfH 26,

for

^H

f^hrfa 2#, ^Tf^nrct 38, ^anflOi 88.

etc.;

>

for

^TTT-

Corrections and Additions.

^^

P.

135,

1.

5.

For:

P.

137,

1.

2.

Bead:

read: 41

<*R

.

yrWTffiPft-

P. 138,

1.

1'2.

Z)eZt!

P. 180,

1.

17.

For:

P. 182,

1.

1.

For: fM5*rf read: fafacQ.

'firm in battle'.

^fcrfST

f^rf^

read:

P. 186,

1.

1.

.Kead:

P.

190,

1.

6.

For:

P.

192,

1.

13

from below. For:

P.

196, col. 1. S. v. \fi, insert:

P.

197, col. 1.

P.

199, col. 1.

P. 205,

f%f^.

^T^fff.
suffix read: suffice.

qf^jM^

read: \*1$\

+ sam-d come

\

.

together, join.

Insert: rsabhadatta m., n. pr.

+ upa-a come

S. v. \/gam, insert:

col. 2,

from below. Read:

2

1.

Also insert in Vocab.:

fill.

near.

lpr (piparli; caus. purdyati)

]<

pr (pardyati) overcome

j/2

(evils); prevail.

P. 207,

col. 2,

P. 208,

col. 1,

Col.

5.

1.

2.

1.

2, 1.

below.
P. 209,

col. 2,

\/yuj

P.

f.,

begging, alms.

w

1.

+

Insert:

2.

ni,

+ pra

-te;
195,

fly.



bhramyati: 131).
L. 9 from

486.



shoot.

give, give in marriage.



S. v.

add: caus. set (as jewels).

Insert: + pra idem.
1. 5.
Read: + pra wander forth.

214, col. 2,

;

After: release insert: let

212, col. 1,

+ pra
P.

Read: bhiksa

Read: \/bhram (bhrdmati,
cf.
11. Read: Greek



Col. 2,1.15 from

below.

L. 9 from below.

Read:

idem.
1.

9.

Read: sameta

vided with.

(|

i

+ sam-a)

a.,

followed by, pro-

F

*

"

"I

7P /*<V*4

14 DAY USE
RETURN TO DESK FROM WHICH BORROWED

This book

is due on the last date stamped below, or
on the date to which renewed.

Renewed books

OCT 2

1

are subject to immediate recall.

US9 68

B EC£*VED
OCT

IV 69 41 MA
%& && P£PT*
OCT 15

D6C

1970

I5t

W6
u

^RECDtD

**EC

9



970 -8 PM^'fc

>VIAY

u 9

LD



21-40m-2,'69
(J6057sl0)476 A-32

General Library
University of California
Berkeley
IN

U.C.

BERKELEY LIBRARIES

CD3TS7bTD^

¥>.

!

.'

hi

7\ </
UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA LIBRARY

Sponsor Documents

Or use your account on DocShare.tips

Hide

Forgot your password?

Or register your new account on DocShare.tips

Hide

Lost your password? Please enter your email address. You will receive a link to create a new password.

Back to log-in

Close